Porteiro Elvox 63M7

INDEX ®
Pages
WARNINGS AND GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 3
TABLE OF CONDUCTOR SECTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 4
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Petrarca interphones and accessories................................................................................................................................................ 5-6
Series 8870 interphones and accessories.......................................................................................................................................... 6
Petrarca monitors and accessories..................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Monitor and phones open voice series 6600 ....................................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
Open-voice monitors type 5650.......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Open voice interphone type 7400....................................................................................................................................................... 15
Open voice monitors type 7500....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Giotto 6300 and 6500 series monitors................................................................................................................................................ 17 - 18
Series 152 audio switchboards.......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Galileo entrance panels...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
8100 series entrance panels.............................................................................................................................................................. 21 - 23
3300 entrance panels......................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 26
Entrance panels with letter box........................................................................................................................................................... 26
Patavium series entrance panels........................................................................................................................................................ 27 - 28
1200 series entrance panels........................................................................................................................................................ 29 - 38
Cameras and audio speech units for entrance panels........................................................................................................................ 39
Additional cameras and interchangeable lenses................................................................................................................................. 40
Power supplies and switching modules.............................................................................................................................................. 41
Transformers, amplifiers, video distributors and relays....................................................................................................................... 42
Ringtones, wiring, accessories and cables ....................................................................................................................................... 43
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CHECKS............................................................................................................................................... 44
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR AUDIO SYSTEMS WITH "SOUND SYSTEM" CALL..............................................................................
Minimum section of conductors.......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Audio door entry system without conversation privacy with power supply type 931............................................................................ 46 - 47
Audio door entry system without conversation privacy with power supply type 931 and interphones series 6600/AU.......................... 48
Audio door entry system with power supply type 931, conversation privacy and door lock release at all times................................. 49 - 50
Audio door entry system with power supply type 931, conversation privacy interphones series 6600/AU and door lock release at all times.... 51
Audio door entry system with power supply type 931, conversation privacy and door lock release after call..................................... 52 - 53
Audio door entry system with power supply type 931, conversation privacy, interphones series 6600/AU and door lock release after call.... 54
Audio door entry system with amplified speech unit type 930F and power supply type 936.............................................................. 55 - 56
Systems with power supplies type 931 and switching module for more than one speech unit.......................................................... 57 - 59
Systems with power supplies type 936 and switching module for more than one speech unit.......................................................... 60 - 61
Audio door entry system with "1+n" wire without conversation privacy............................................................................................. 62 - 63
Audio door entry system with "1+n" wire with power supply type 6837 and two speech units without conversation privacy............ 64 - 65
Audio door entry system with “1+n” wire with conversation privacy................................................................................................... 66 - 67
Audio door entry system with "1+n" wire with power supply type 6837 and two speech units with conversation privacy.................. 68 - 69
Audio door entry system with “1+n” wire with speech unit type 930D,without conversation privacy................................................... 70 - 71
Audio door entry system with "1+n" wire with speech unit type 930D and conversation privacy........................................................... 72 - 73
Audio door entry system with Petrarca series intercommunicating interphones and power supply 938A............................................. 74 - 75
Audio door entry system with Petrarca series intercommunicating interphones with more speech unit............................................. 76 - 77
Audio door entry system with independent intercommunicating networks with Petrarca series interphones.................................... 78 - 79
Intercommunicating interphones system without conversation privacy............................................................................................... 80 - 81
Intercommunicating interphones system without conversation privacy one master interphone and sub-master interphones............. 82
Pair of intercommunicating interphones.............................................................................................................................................. 83 - 85
Audio door entry system with power supply type 931 and intercommunicating phones type 6221.................................................... 86 - 88
“Building complex" type audio door entry system.............................................................................................................................. 89 - 90
Audio door entry system with porter switchboard type 152A-152B ... 152I.......................................................................................... 91 - 92
Audio door entry system with porter switchboard type 152A-152B ... 152I and two speech units....................................................... 93 - 94
Systems with porter switchboards type 142A - 142B ... 142I and 162A - 162B ... 162I with interphone for night service and entrance panel... 95 - 100
Audio door entry system with porter switchboard type 153A................................................................................................................ 101 - 105
STANDARD INTERPHONE WIRING DIAGRAM VARIATIONS
Standard wiring diagram variations 1 and 2: wiring diagram of call repeater loudspeaker type 2/841................................................ 108
Standard wiring diagram variations 2B: wiring diagram of activation push-button from speech unit................................................... 108
Standard wiring diagram variations 3 and 4: wiring diagram of additional electronic ring tone type 860A....................................... 109
Standard wiring diagram variations 5 and 6: wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells....................................................... 110
Standard wiring diagram variations 7 and 8: wiring diagram of landing call......................................................................................... 111
Standard wiring diagram variations 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14: wiring diagram of switching module type 6153................................. 114
Standard wiring diagram variations 15 and 15A: wiring diagram of ring tone type 6150....................................................................... 115
Standard wiring diagram variations 16: Wiring diagram for the stair light switching on or other services through relay type 170/001.............. 116
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS WITH "SOUND SYSTEM" CALL AND COAXIAL CABLE
Description of power supply type 6680........................................................................................................................................... 118-119
"Sound System" single and multiple residence video door entry system with power supply type 6680 and without conversation privacy..... 120-121
"Sound System" single and multiple residence video door entry system with power supply type 6680 and without conversation privacy and
camera type 559A, 559B............................................................................................................................................................................... 122
"Sound System" single and multiple residence video door entry system with power supply type 6680 and conversation privacy...... 123-124
"Sound System" single and multiple residence video door entry system with power supply type 6680 and conversation privacy and
camera type 559A, 559B.............................................................................................................................................................................. 125
“Sound System" single residence intercommunicating video door entry system with power supply type 6680 and type 935A............. 126-127
Examples of wiring diagrams for intercommunicating monitors and interphones on single residence systems with switching module type 935A... 128-129
Video door entry system for single residence with switching module type 6935/A and Video-intercommunicating phones Type
6000+6221.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 130-131
Video door entry system with more than one intercommunicating network with switching module type 935A.................................... 132-133
Video door entry system with 2 or 3 speech units, only one of which with video, and switching module type 5590/001 or type 5590/303..... 134-140
Video door entry system with two video speech units and switching module type 6591...................................................................... 141-143
Video door entry system with two video speech units and switching module type 6592...................................................................... 145-149
"Building complex" type video door entry system with main entrance panel and two or more secondary entrance panels............... 150-153
Video door entry system with porter switchboard type 152A-152B ... 152I........................................................................................ 154-155
Video door entry system with porter switchboard type 152A-152B ... 152I with 2 speech units......................................................... 156-157
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM VARIATIONS WITH COAXIAL CABLE
Variations 17 and 18: Wiring diagram with simultaneous activation of two or more monitors by power supply type 6582. . . . . . . . . 158-159
Variation 19: Wiring diagram for power supply type 6583 on installations with considerable voltage dropon power lin “+ -” . . . . . . . 160
Variation 20: Wiring diagram of call repeater loudspeaker type 2/841 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Variation 21:Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type 860A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Variation 22: Wiring diagram for additional mechanical doorbells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Variation 23: Wiring diagram for landing call button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Variation 24: Wiring diagram of additional button for auxiliary services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Variation 25: Wiring diagram for self-start of monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Variation 26: Wiring diagram of ringtone Type 6150." . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1
INDEX
®
Pagine
Variation 27: Wiring diagram of “Videomoving” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Variation 28: Wiring diagram for interphone in parallel with monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Variation 29, wiring diagram of switching module type 6153.............................................................................................................. 168
Variantion 30, 31: Wiring diagram of ringtone level control module and wiring diagram of "lock open" visual indication (green LED) . 169
Variation 32: Wiring diagram for separate camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Variation 32B: Wiring diagram for camera 559A - 559B with power supply type 6680 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Variation 33: Wiring diagram for relay Type 170/560 for additional camera. with monitor type 6600, 660A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Variation 33B: Wiring diagram for relay Type 170/560 for additional camera with monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Variation 34: Wiring diagram of card type 6155 for conversation privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Variation 35: Wiring diagram for video amplifier Type 5559. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Variation 36: Wiring diagram for additional transformers for bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Variation 37: Wiring diagram for video distributor for cable risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Variation 38 and 39: Wiring diagram for video floor distributor............................................................................................................ 176-177
Variation 39B and 39C: Auxiliary relay connection for F1, F2, LS outputs and Auxiliary relay connection for 6S programmed output. 178
Variation 39D:Connection for programmable relay type 170F. 179
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE AND "SOUND SYSTEM" CALL
Description of power supply type 6568............................................................................................................................................... 180-182
Video door entry system without coaxial cable with power supply type 6568, with or without conversation privacy ........................... 183
Video door entry system without coaxial cable with power supply type 6568, floor distributor type 6669 and with or without
conversation privacy.......................................................................................................................................................................... 184-185
Video door entry system without coaxial cable with two entrance panels with or without conversation privacy................................. 186-187
STANDARD VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM VARIATIONS WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE
Variation 40: Wiring diagram of an interphone in parallel with a monitor............................................................................................ 188
Variation 41: Wiring diagram of an interphone in a video door entry system without coaxial cable................................................. 188
Variations 42 and 43 Wiring diagram of monitor self-start button......................................................................................................... 188
Variations 44 and 45 Wiring diagram of two or more monitors connected in parallel with simultaneous switch-on............................ 189
Variations 46 and 47 Wiring diagram of call repeater loudspeaker type 2/841.................................................................................. 189
Variations 48 and 49 Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtonesType 860A......................................................................... 190
Variations 50 and 51 Wiring diagram for landing call button............................................................................................................... 190
Variations 52 and 53 Wiring diagram of a button for auxiliary services............................................................................................. 191
Variations 54 and 55 Wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells........................................................................................... 192
Variation 56: Wiring diagram of ringtone type 6150.......................................................................................................................... 193
Variation 57: Wiring diagram of card type 7155 for conversation privacy......................................................................................... 193
Variation 58: Wiring diagram of power supply type 6583 for monitor supply regeneration................................................................... 193
Variations 59, 60, 61: Wiring diagram of switching module type 6153.............................................................................................. 194-195
Variation 62: Wiring diagram of floor distributor................................................................................................................................... 196
Variation 63: Wiring diagram of video distributor for cable risers........................................................................................................ 197
Variation 64: Wiring diagram of speech unit with separate camera..................................................................................................... 198
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS WITH 4-WIRE VIDEO KIT
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................. 200-201
Single residence video door entry system with camera type 63U7 or 63B7for kits type 637E, 637G and 637G/C1............................. 202
Single residence video door entry system with camera type 63U7/V or 63B7/V for kits type 637G/S2 or 637G/C1....................... 203
Single residence video door entry system with entrance panel with letter box for kit type 637P.......................................................... 204
Double residence video door entry system with camera type 63U7/V or 63B7/V for kits 637G/S2 or 637G/C2................................... 205
VARIATIONS ON STANDARD DIAGRAM FOR 4-WIRE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM KIT
Variation 66: Wiring diagram for relay type 537R for switching on the auxiliary viewing series illumination bulb.............................. 206
Variation 67: Wiring diagram for additional monitor............................................................................................................................. 206
Variation 68: Wiring diagram for additional button for auxiliary services............................................................................................. 207
Variation 69: Wiring diagram of additional door lock release button............................................................................................ 207
Variation 70: Wiring diagram of landing call button........................................................................................................................ . . 208
Variation 71: Wiring diagram of call repeater loudspeaker Type 2/841............................................................................................ 208
Variation 72: Wiring diagram for additional interphone........................................................................................................................ 209
Variation 73: Wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells.................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . 209
Variation 74: Wiring diagram of 2 entrance panels with camera type 63U7 or 63B7 and switching module type 537W. . . . . . . . . . 210
Variation 75: Wiring diagram of 2 entrance panels with camera type 63U7/V or 63B7/V and switching module type 537W . . . . . 211
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR OPEN VOICE AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
Minimum section of conductors......................................................................................................................................................... 212
Description of power supply type 6450............................................................................................................................................ 213
Open voice audio door entry system with interphones type 7400...................................................................................................... 214-215
Open voice audio door entry system with two speech units and interphones type 7400................................................................... 216-217
Description of power supply type 6681............................................................................................................................................... 218
Open voice video door entry system with with monitors type 5651 and 5653 and conversation privacy........................................ . 219-220
Open voice video door entry system without conversation privacy with monitor type 7500 and interphone type 7400........................ 221-222
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM VARIATIONS FOR OPEN VOICE AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
Variations 76 and 77: Wiring diagram of monitors in parallel (type 5651 or 5653) with simultaneous switch-on......................... . . 223
Variation 78: Wiring diagram for additional mechanical doorbells....................................................................................................... 224
Variation 79: Wiring diagram of call repeater loudspeaker type 2/841.......................................................................................... 224
Variations 80 and 81: Wiring diagram of additional button for auxiliary services................................................................................... 225
Variation 82: Wiring diagram of self-start button............................................................................................................ 226
Variation 83: Wiring diagram of additional transformers for bulbs.................................................................................................... 226
Variation 84: Wiring diagram of power supply type 6583 for regeneration of monitor supply................................................ 226
Variation 85: Wiring diagram of apartment landing call button......................................................................................... 227
Variation 86: Wiring diagram of separate camera.......................................................................................................................... 227
Variation 87: Wiring diagram of video distributor for cable risers................................................................................................ 228
Variation 88: Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type 860A.................................................................................... 228
Variation 89: Wiring diagram of additional power supply type 6583 for more than one monitor type 7500....................................... 229
2
WARNINGS AND GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
®
GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

This manual lists the wiring diagrams of the most common installations. The following general directions are valid for each type of installation.
1) Install the conductors in appropriate tubing, which should be different from the tubing used for the 230V and 380V power supply. It is advi-
sable to use conductors which are differently coloured in order to facilitate the connection.
2) The equipment must be installed in a dry place far from any source of heat.
3) Make the system connections and check the mains voltage. Check that interphone handsets are on-hook, before proceeding with the gene-
ral test and inspection. Adjust the volume and the connection time whenever needed.
4) To operate electric locks at the same time, in connections with very long lines, use a repeater relay type 170/001. This relay can be used
for activating equipment operating at 125-230V, e.g. for switching on stair lights.
N.B. We recommend that the instructions of every diagram are carefully followed and that the sections of the conductors compared
to the distances are respected.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLERS
- Carefully read the instructions on this leaflet: they give important information on the safety, use and maintenance of the installation.
- After removing the packing, check the integrity of the set. Packing components (plastic bags, expanded polystyrene etc.) are dangerous for
children. Installation must be carried out according to national safety regulations.
- It is convenient to fit close to the supply voltage source a proper bipolar type switch easy accessible with 3 mm separation (minimum) between
contacts.
- Before connecting the set, ensure that the data on the label correspond to those of the mains.
- Use this set only for the purposes designed, i.e.for electric door-opener systems. Any other use may be dangerous. The manufacturer is not
responsible for damage caused by improper, erroneous or irrational use.
- Attention: to avoid hurting himself, this appliance must be fixed to the soil/wall according to the installation instructions.
- Before cleaning or maintenance, disconnect the set.
- In case of failure or faulty operation, disconnect the set and do not open it.
- For repairs apply only to the technical assistance centre authorized by the manufacturer.
- Safety may be compromised if these instructions are disregarded.
- Do not obstruct opening of ventilation or heat exit slots and do not expose the set to dripping or sprinkling of water.
- Installers must ensure that manuals with the above instructions are left on connected units after installation, for users' information.
- All items must only be used for the purposes designed.
- The installer must make sure that the information for the user be present with the appliances.
- This leaflet must always be enclosed with the equipment.
Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)

The crossed-out wheelie bin symbol marked on the product indicates that at the end of its useful life, the product must be handled separately
from household refuse and must therefore be assigned to a differentiated collection centre for electrical and electronic equipment or returned to
the dealer upon purchase of a new, equivalent item of equipment.
The user is responsible for assigning the equipment, at the end of its life, to the appropriate collection facilities. Suitable differentiated collection, for
the purpose of subsequent recycling of decommissioned equipment and environmentally compatible treatment and disposal, helps prevent poten-
tial negative effects on health and the environment and promotes the recycling of the materials of which the product is made. For further details
regarding the collection systems available, contact your local waste disposal service or the shop from which the equipment was purchased.
Risks connected to substances considered as dangerous (WEEE).

According to the WEEE Directive, substances since long usually used on electric and electronic appliances are considered dangerous for peo-
ple and the environment. The adequate differentiated collection for the subsequent dispatch of the appliance for the recycling, treatment and dis-
mantling (compatible with the environment) help to avoid possible negative effects on the environment and health and promote the recycling of
material with which the product is compound.
Product is according to CE mark and directives:

- EC Directives 89/336/EEC and following norms.
- EC Directives 2006/95/CE (73/23/CE) and following norms.
Power supplies constitute SELV sources in compliance with the requirements stipulated in Article 411.1.2.2 of CEI standard 64-8 (ed. 2003).
Conversion table for section-diameter and resistance of 100 m. standard conductors.
Section mm2 0.12 0.25 0.35 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.50 4.00 6.00
Diameter mm. 0.40 0.58 0.68 0.80 1.00 1.15 1.40 1.80 2.30 2.80
Diameter (tenths) 4/10 6/10 8/10 10/10 12/10 14/10 18/10
Resistance Ω 100m. 14.00 6.60 4.80 3.50 2.20 1.70 1.14 0.69 0.39 0.28
SYMBOLS
A.C. bell Bulb Loudspeaker A.C. supply from mains
A.C. buzzer Push-button Amplified microphone Ground
Electric lock Switch Receiver Coaxial cable block
3
CONDUCTOR TABLES
®
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM (mm2)

Section type Terminals Ø up to 50 m. Ø up to 100 m. Ø up to 200 m.
a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, AS, S1

2 2 2
C1, C2, C3, P1, P2 0,5 mm 0,75 mm 1,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
b Other 0,25 mm 0,5 mm 1 mm
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR STANDARD VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

SYSTEM AND TWO-CHANNEL VERSION WITH COAXIAL CABLE (in mm2)
a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, +, AS, S1

2 2 2
C1, C2, C3, P1, P2, +T 1 mm 1,5 mm 2,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
b Other 0,75 mm 1 mm 1,5 mm
Video 75 Ohm coaxial cable (type RG59) or RG11double insulation
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE (in mm2)

2 2 2
a 0, 15, -, +, S1, P1, P2, +T 1 mm 1,5 mm 2,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR 4-WIRES KIT SYSTEM (in mm2)
Monitor terminal up to 10 m. up to 30 m. up to 50 m. up to 100 m.

11 - 12 1,5mm2 - - -
1-2 type 63CV / 0,5 mm2 0,75 mm2 1mm2
Video type 63CV

Coaxial cable 75 Ohm (type RG59) Coaxial cable 75 Ohm (type RG59)
CONNECTION LEGEND
Connection with section type b
Connection with section type a
Call connections with section type a
4
PETRARCA INTERPHONES AND ACCESSORIES
®
INTERPHONES
PETRARCA SERIES
The PETRARCA series wall-mounted interphones made of ABS are equipped with a loudspeaker for electronic calls and with
screws for mounting on a rectangular vertical box or with wall plugs. Desk-top installation requires the use of conversion kits.
Although supplied with a single push-button, the interphones are designed to accommodate a further 8 push-buttons or acces-
sories. Dimensions: 89x226x65 mm.
type 6200 Interphone for audio door entry system, video door entry system and intercommunicating
system for use with power supplies type 931, 931A, 931A+935A, 931+935A, 936, 938A,
931/0CT, 931/0CT+935A, (type 6680) or with series 152 Sound System audio switchboards.
type 6201 Interphone for audio door entry system with 1+n wire and video door entry system without
coaxial cable for use with power supplies type 6837, 837/0CT, 6568 and series 142 and 162
Sound System audio switchboards.
Installation instructions
Fig. 1-
Open the interphone, split the cover from the
bottom making pressure on the lower side of
the cover
Fig. 2-
Fix the interphone to the rectangular, vertical
flush-mounted back-box with the 2 screws
supplied, or fix the screws with the ø5 expan- Fig. 1 Fig. 2
sion plugs. Connect the wires to the terminals.
You are advised to fix the top of the interpho-
ne at a height of about 1.5 m above the
ground.
PETRARCA SERIES ACCESSORIES
type 6140 Conversion kit for converting interphones into desk-top version, with 2 metres of 6-con-
ductor cable and equipped with fixed terminal block.
type 6A40 Conversion kit for converting interphones into desk-top version, with 2 metres of 16-con-
ductor cable and equipped with socket with removable plug.
type 6154 Signalling module with red LED and eight transparent keys. For use with Petrarca inter-
phones for auxiliary services. Supply voltage 15V DC or AC.
type 6V54 Signalling module with green LED and eight transparent keys. For use with Petrarca inter-
phones for auxiliary services. Supply voltage 15V DC or AC.
type 6152 Pack of 8 additional buttons (normally open) for fitting on Petrarca series interphones type
6200 and type 6201.
type 6153 4-position switching module for fitting in PETRARCA interphones. The module is used for
setting the call volume to one of three levels and disabling it. The latter state is indicated
by means of a red LED. The switching module must be fitted
in the appropriate seat after removing the bezel. A green LED indicates that the door is
open when connected to a suitable lock or door.
type 6155 Conversation privacy card for fitting in interphones type 6200 and operating with power
supplies type 931, 931A, 931/0CT, 837/0CT and 6680. Do not use with intercommuni-
cating systems.
5
SERIES 8870 INTERPHONES AND ACCESSORIES
®
type 6157 Additional push-button (normally closed) for controlling automated gate systems, which
can be fitted in the interphone.
type 6150 Ding-Dong ringtone card for fitting in interphones to change the call ringtone.
The card can be used in all audio and video systems with Sound System call and AC call,
but not for intercommunicating systems with audio door entry system. Supply voltage
13.5-18V D.C.
type 7155 Conversation privacy card for fitting in interphones type 6201 for use with power supply
type 837/0CT, 6837 and 6568.
8870 SERIES
Series 8870 wall-mounted interphones in ABS, equipped with two push-buttons, loudspeaker for electronic calls and screws for
mounting on a rectangular vertical box or with wall plugs. Dimensions: 75x220x60 mm.
type 8875 Interphone without conversation privacy for audio and video door entry systems, for use
with power supplies type 931, 931A, 936, 931/0CT, 833 and 6680.
type 8872 Interphone without conversation privacy for audio and video door entry systems, for use
with power supplies type 931, 931A, 936, 931/0CT, 833 and 6680. Equipped with push-
button for enabling conversation on interphone.
type 8878 Interphone with conversation privacy for audio door entry systems, for use with power
supplies type 931, 931A and 931/0CT.
type 8877 Interphone without conversation privacy for audio door entry system with 1+n wire, for
use with power supplies type 6837, 837/0CT and 6568.
type 8873 Interphone with conversation privacy for audio door entry system with 1+n wire, for use
with power supplies type 6837 and 837/0CT.
type 887G Interphone for switchboard 153A without conversation privacy with receiver call.
Fig. 1 -
To separate the base of the interphone
from the cover, insert a screwdriver in
the slit in the middle and turn it until
the unit clicks open.
Fig. 2 - (A)
Fix the top screw (A) in the flush-
mounted box (or wall plug), leaving the Fig. 1
screw head to protrude by 2 mm. (B)
Hook the interphone onto the top
screw using the appropriate hole in the
back, by placing it close to the wall Fig. 2
and then pulling downwards
Complete mounting by screwing the
bottom screw (B) into the appropriate
hole.
6
PETRARCA SERIES MONITORS AND ACCESSORIES
®
MONITORS
PETRARCA SERIES
Petrarca series monitors may be used in conjunction with interphones type 6200-6201 for "Sound System" video door entry
systems. These monitors may be also used with A.C. call, DIGI BUS and "w/o coax cable" systems. They may also be used
separately with the correct accessories.
Dimensions: 135x226x45 mm.
TYPE 6000 Slim-line surface wall-mounted monitor with 4” B/W flat screen
Minimum supply voltage: 15 V d.c. (maximum 20 V d.c.)
Video signal standard: CCIR with 625 lines and 50 frames
(EIA standard available on request)
Passband: 4 MHz
Video signal input voltage: 1Vpp via 75 Ohm coax cable or twisted pair.
Supplied with interconnection circuit.
TYPE 6003 Slim-line surface wall-mounted monitor with 4” LCD colour screen
Minimum supply voltage: 15 V d.c. (maximum 20 V d.c.)
Video signal standard: PAL
Video signal input voltage: 1 Vpp via 75 Ohm coax cable.
Supplied with interconnection circuit.
ACCESSORIES
TYPE 6145 Wall-mounted fixing bracket for combined interphone (type 6200, type 6201) and moni-
tor (6000-6003)
TYPE 6A47 Wall-mounted fixing bracket for individual monitor (type 6000, type 6003). The bracket
is equipped with a housing for a monitor interconnection circuit and with fixing screws for
mounting on a rectangular, vertical box.
TYPE 6142 Desk-top conversion kit for combined interphone (type 6200, type 6201) and monitor
(type 6000, type 6003). Supplied with 2-metre, 12-conductor cable and coax. Equipped
with socket and removable plug.
TYPE 6A42 Desk-top conversion kit for combined interphone (type 6200, type 6201) and monitor
(type 6000, type 6003). Supplied with 2-metre, 26-conductor cable and coax. Equipped
with socket and removable plug.
TYPE 6A41 Desk-top conversion kit for individual monitor (type 6000, type 6003). Supplied with 2-metre,
8-conductor cable and coax. Equipped with socket and removable plug.
Supplied with monitor interconnection circuit.
TYPE 6160 Power supply for installation in desk-top kits type 6142 and 6A42. This power supply is fit-
ted in installations with several monitors connected in parallel or in systems with extremely
long cable runs prone to excessive voltage drops. The power supply is equipped with a
white power supply cable. Power supply: 230 Vac.
7
ASSEMBLING PETRARCA SERIES DEVICES
®
The following instructions explain how
to install the monitor with the interpho-
ne.
Fig.1 -
Fix the bracket type 6145 to the wall
at a height of approximately 1.4 m Fig. 2
above the ground.
Fig. 2 - 3
Open the interphone, split the cover
from the bottom making pressure on
the lower side of the cover Fig. 1
Fig.4 -
1,40
Inside the interphone, fit the connec-
tion card supplied with monitor type
6000 or type 6003 and connect the
card to the interphone by means of the
connectors CN2 (card) and CN1 (inter-
Fig. 3
phone 6200) or CN4 (interphone
6201).
Fig.5 - CN4
Fit the base of the interphone into the CN1 Fig. 4

appropriate seats to the left of the ELVOX
bracket. Slide the base of the interpho-

ne downwards
until it is completely fastened. Connect
X
ELVO
the wires to the terminals of the inter-

phone and monitor card.
Fig.6 -
Connect the wiring of the monitor to CN2
the connection card by means of con-

nector CN1 on the card.
Fit the monitor in the appropriate seats
in the bracket. Slide the base of the
monitor downwards Fig. 5
until it is completely fastened.
Fig.7 -
Close the interphone by hooking the
cover onto the base and pressing the
bottom of the cover until
it clicks shut. To remove the interpho-
ne or monitor from the bracket, press
the safety tab with a screwdriver in the
direction of the arrows. X
ELVO
CN1
Brightness
Contrast
or colour
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
8
ASSEMBLING PETRARCA SERIES DEVICES
®
Assembly of desk-top conversion kit for monitor and interphones:
Fig. 8 -
Assemble the base of the interphone
as illustrated in figures 2-3-4-5.
Connect the cable on the base to the
terminal blocks. Then fit the monitor as
illustrated in figures 6-7. EL
VO
X
Fig. 8
type 6142
type 6A42
Assembly of desk-top conversion kit for monitors only:
Fig. 9 -
Fix the interconnection card supplied
with the monitor onto the base.
Connect the cable of the base to the
interconnection card.
Fasten the monitor to the base with the
appropriate tabs.
type 6A41
9
ASSEMBLING OPEN VOICE SERIES PETRARCA
®
DESCRIPTION:
Flush-mounted monitor with "open voice" two channel and 4'' colour LCD screen. The monitor screen may be vertically sloped.
PUSH-BUTTONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A) Screen with manually angle-adjustable 4" LCD monitor. A
B) Microphone.
C) Loudspeaker.
D) Pair of push-buttons.
1) When the monitor is ON, the push-buttons can be used to
C B
adjust the brightness.
2) When the monitor is OFF, the push-buttons can be used to
select the tune for calls from a speech unit only. To program- D E
me the tune: hold 1 of the 2 push-buttons down for at least 2
seconds, and press the push-buttons again repeatedly to
select the desired tune.
F H
E) Pair of push-buttons
1) While holding the "i" push-button down, press the "E" push-
button to increase or decrease the internal voice line volume. G I
2) To adjust ring-tone volume: without pressing the "I" push-
button, hold down 1 of the 2 push-buttons for at least 2
D L M E
seconds, then press the pushbuttons again repeatedly to
increase, decrease or disable the ring-tone volume.
F) Push-button : for activating 1st auxiliary service if connected (e.g. stair lights).
G)Push-button : for door lock release.
H)Pushbutton : for activating 2nd auxiliary service if connected (e.g. 2nd lock). Enables the monitor to self-start without being
called (the function is optional according to the type of installation).
I) Pushbutton : after the call and/or switch-on of the monitor, hold the push-button down for conversation with the speech
unit. Enables the monitor to self-start without being called (the function is optional according to the type of installation).
L) Door open signal: if the green LED lights up, this indicates that the door is open (the function is optional according to
the type of installation).
M) Call disabled signal: if the red LED lights up, this indicates that the call is disabled (see point "E").
PROGRAMMING OF THE CONVERSATION PRIVACY

The "Conversation privacy" function can be obtained by pressing both push-buttons " " for 3 seconds at the same time; when
the red led flashes press the push-button. The "without conversation privacy" function can be obtained as indicated above,
but using both " " push-buttons.
TERMINALS FOR MONITOR TYPE 6600 - 660A

1: Interphone receiver
2: Interphone microphone
3: Common audio line
4: Button for auxiliary services (related to terminal 5)

5: Power supply negative
6: Power supply positive (minimum input voltage 15V D.C.)
7: Second auxiliary function or self-start (its operation is controlled by the microswitch placed on the monitor rear side).
8: Call from entrance panel
9: Lock push-button
10: 12V D.C. output for video distributor
11: Landing call
12: Push-button for the audio activation (or self-start with switch in “A” position)
13: Green LED supply voltage (18V D.C. (max) positive voltage imput)
V: For systems with coaxial cable, input for connection of the 75 Ohm video cable.
M: Ground for terminals V.
NOTE: Monitor type 6600 dispose on the rear of a microswitch for the switching of the "auxiliary (position A)/self-start (posi-
tion B)" function of push-button .
Monitor type 660A dispose of a micro-switch on the bottom of the basis for the switching of the "auxiliary" function (lower
position) /self-start (upper position) of push-button , and of the colour adjustment.
10
ASSEMBLING OPEN VOICE SERIES 6600 MONITOR
®
INSTALLATION 6601 INSTALLATION OF TYPE 6601 WITH BRACKETS TYPE R660

- Install the video interphone away from sources of light and - Make a 120x120mm (nearly) hole in the plasterboard wall at 1,40 from
heat. the floor to the lower border.
- Flush-mount back box type 6149 in the wall at a height of approxi- - Fix the bracket to the monitor as indicated in figure, keeping the cur-
mately 1.4 m above the ground. sors well aligned to the monitor sides (part. 1, Fig. 2A)
- Remove the plastic cross-piece from the back box (see Part.1, Fig. - Carry out the terminal block connections (see wiring diagram)
2) - Insert the monitor inside the wall in plasterboard.
- Carry out the terminal block connections (see wiring diagram). - Tighten the screws so as the cursors can get closer to the plasterboard
- Fix the video interphone to the back box with the 4 screws supplied wall.
(fig. 2). - By screwing, the cursors should get aligned orthogonally to the moni-
- Fit the side panels, taking care that the panel with the slot for the tor (see part. 1, Fig. 2A)
microphone is fitted on the right (fig. 2). - Insert the side grids, paying attention that the one with the slot for the
microphone must be inserted on the right.
139 136
mm mm
Flush-
mounted
version
141mm 59mm 10mm
Fig. 2
Part. 1 3
2
1 Fig. 2A
11
®
INSTALLATION OF TYPE 6701 INSTALLAZIONE 6601/AU

- Install the video interphone away from sources of light and heat. - Installare il citofono lontano da fonti luminose e di calore.
- Fix the monitor fixing plate at 1,40m. from the ground level to the lower - Incassare la scatola Art. 6149 al muro ad un’altezza di circa 1,40 m
border. dal pavimento.
- Connect the terminal block. - Togliere il traversino in plastica dalla scatola (vedi Part. 1 di Fig. 2)
- Insert the monitor according to the 1 and 2 arrow direction - Eseguire i collegamenti della morsettiera (vedi schemi di collegamento)
- To remove the monitor from the plate hook, operate with a screw dri- - Fissare il citofono alla scatola tramite le 4 viti in dotazione (Fig. 2).
ver on the security lock (placed on the upper side and behind the - Inserire le mascherine laterali, facendo attenzione che quella con la
monitor), and remove it according to the 3 and 4 arrow direction. fessura per il microfono, vada inserita a destra (fig. 2).
Surface wall-mounting version
139 139 136

mm mm
Fig. 2B
Montaggio
da incasso
141mm 40mm parete
141 mm 59mm 10mm
(microfono)
Fig. 2
4
1
2 3
Part. 1
INTSLLATION OF TYPE 660C

- Fix the monitor support to the wall and hook the stud to the support.
- Connect the terminal block (see wiring diagrams).
Table version
125
mm
141mm 125mm
Fig. 2C
12
®
INSTALLAZIONE 6601/AU CON LE STAFFE Art. R660 INSTALLAZIONE 6701/AU

- Installare il citofono lontano da fonti luminose e di calore. - Installare il citofono lontano da fonti luminose e di calore.
- Praticare un foro nella parete in cartongesso di 120x120mm ad una - Fissare la piastra di aggancio del citofono ad una altezza di 1,40m
altezza di circa 1,40m dal pavimento al bordo inferiore. dal pavimento al bordo inferiore.
- Fissare le staffe al citofono come indicato in figura, tenendo i curso- - Eseguire i collegamenti della morsettiera (vedi schemi di collega-
ri allineati ai fianchi del citofono (Part. 1, Fig. 2A). mento)
- Eseguire i collegamenti della morsettiera (vedi schemi di collega- - Inserire il citofono seguendo il senso delle frecce 1 e 2.
mento) - Per togliere il citofono dalla piastra di aggancio, agire con un caccia-
- Inserire il citofono all’interno della parete in cartongesso. Avvitando i vite sulla linguetta di sicurezza (posta sopra e dietro al citofono) ed
cursori devono muoversi in modo perpendicolare rispetto al citofono estrarlo seguendo il senso delle frecce 3 e 4.
(vedi Part. 1 Fig. 2A).
- Inserire le mascherine laterali, facendo attenzione che quella con la
Montaggio da esterno parete
fessura per il microfono vada inserita a destra.
139
mm
141mm 40mm
4
1
2 3
Fig. 2B
Part. 1
Fig. 2A
INSTALLAZIONE 660C/AU
- Fissare la borchia alla parete e inserire la presa nella borchia
- Eseguire i collegamenti della morsettiera (vedi schemi di collega-
mento).
Montaggio da tavolo
125
mm
141mm 125mm
Fig. 2C
13
MONITOR OPEN VOICE SERIES 5650
®
FLUSH WALL-MOUNTING OPEN VOICE 4" MONITOR

type 5651 Flat screen 4" monitor, electronic call on loudspeaker, two-channel open voice conversation; lock push-button,
Dimensions: stair light button, push-button for system self-start or additional camera, push-button for audio connection with
190x260x10 door entry panel, additional button; external brightness and contrast control; internal and external volume and
call intensity. Usable with flush-mounted wall box type 5509. The monitor is equipped with conversation pri-
vacy towards other users.
type 5653 Monitor same as type 5651 but with 4" colour screen.
Dimensions:
190x260x10
Fig. 1
Installation instructions:
Fig.1 Install the flush-mounted box with the bottom edge at a height of 1.3 m above the
ground.
Fig. 2-3-4 Install the monitor by inserting the bottom tab into the flush-mounted box and fix
the 2 springs supplied into their respective locations.
Fig. 5 Fix the top of the monitor with the screw and lastly, fit the screw cover into its loca-
tion
External controls (Fig.6)

A) BUTTON“ ”
Electric lock control
B) BUTTON “ “ Fig. 2
2nd push-button for auxiliary services, can be
used as "C" key
Fig. 3
C) BUTTON“ ”
Button for auxiliary services (stair light, etc.). If
connected to the "VIDEOMOVING" system of
the video entrance panel, this push-button con-
trols the vertical camera angle in such a way as
to frame people of different heights from close
up.
D) BUTTON“ ”
System self-start from inside and switch-on of
additional cameras (if fitted). Fig. 4
E) BUTTON“ ”
Control for activating audio connection with Fig. 5
entrance panel (keep pressed down to talk).
F) BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB “ ”

Control for adjusting the brightness of the
screen.
G) CONTRAST OR COLOUR CONTROL KNOB
Fig. 6
“ ”
Control for adjusting the contrast of the screen
for monitor 5651, or colour for monitor 5653. A
B
C Fig. 7
Internal controls (Fig.7) D
P1) INTERNAL VOLUME E
P2) EXTERNAL VOLUME F
P3) CALL INTENSITY CONTROL
G
For monitor controls, see next page.
14
OPEN VOICE DEVICES
®
INTERPHONE TYPE 7400
type 7400 Wall-mounting interphone without handset, colour white, with 4 push-buttons (lock,
DIMENSIONS: self-start, additional service and audio line enable). The unit is supplied with loud-
90x220x72 speaker for "SOUND SYSTEM" calls, call intensity control, call disable with LED, and
internal and external volume control. Must be used exclusively in two-channel open
voice systems with power supplies type 6681 and 6450.
INSTALLATION OF INTERPHONE TYPE 7400

Fig. 1 - Separate the base of the interphone from the cover by inserting
a wide-blade screw-driver in slots till opening (see drawing).
Fig. 2 - Fit interphone on flush-mounted vertical rectangular back box
by means of the 2 screws provided, or fix the screws with
expansion plugs (diameter 5) and make the various terminal
connections. Fit the interphone upper part at about 1.5m of
height from floor level.
Fig. 3 Close the interphone by positioning the cover on top (Fig. 3A)
and pressing the base (Fig. 3B) until the two parts snap toge-
ther.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B
Fig. 5
15
OPEN VOICE DEVICES
®
MONITOR SERIES 7500
type 7500 Wall-mounting monitor without handset with 2.5" angle-adjustable colour screen, with
DIMENSIONS: 4 buttons for lock, self-start, additional service and audio line enable. The unit is sup-
90x220x60 plied with loudspeaker for "SOUND SYSTEM" calls, call intensity control, call disable
with indicator LED, and internal and external volume control.
The monitor must be used exclusively with two-channel open voice systems with
power supply type 6681.
The monitor must be installed in a 3-module, rectangular, vertical box.
Fig. 1 e 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 2
B
MOUNTING OF MONITOR WITH INTERPHONE TYPE 7500

Fig. 1 - Flush the 3 module type back box vertically in the wall at approx.
1,40 m height from the floor.
Fig. 2 - Open the monitor splitting the housing upper part from the lower
one by inserting a screwdriver (see diagram) in the interphone slots
till opening.
Fig. 3 - Insert the circuit with terminals into the flush-mount back box and
carry out connections.
Then insert the monitor connector into proper base placed on the
support terminal block.
Fix the monitor bottom and the circuit with terminal block to back box
by means of screws. A
Fig. 4 - Insert the monitor housing by hooking the upper part to the lower
one and by pressing the latter till the closing snap.
Fig. 5- Adjust the screen angle by means of adjuster A.
Fig. 5
16
GIOTTO 6300 AND 6500 SERIES MONITORS
®
GIOTTO 6300 SERIES MONITORS
GENERAL FEATURES
The GIOTTO 6300 series surface wall-mounted monitor in ABS is supplied with a fixing bracket with terminal block, loudspea-
ker for electronic calls and 3 push-buttons (door release, self-start and stair light). Desk-top installation requires
the use of conversion kits. Dimensions: 204x220x71 mm
type 6300 Monitor with 4" black/white, low-profile screen for surface wall-mounted, equipped with:
internal ringtone, call volume control to one of three levels and call disable with red indica-
tor LED. The green LED indicates that the door is open when connected to a suitable lock
or door. The conversation privacy function can be activated by means of an appropriate
microswitch. Operation of the video signal with coaxial or twisted pair cable can be selec-
ted by means of a microswitch. Must be used with power supplies type 6680 or type 6580.
Power supply type 6680 can power two monitors turned on at the same time.
type 6320 Monitor with 4" black/white, low-profile screen for surface wall-mounted, equipped with:
internal ringtone, call volume control to one of three levels and call disable with red indica-
tor LED. The green LED indicates that the door is open when connected to a suitable lock
ted by means of a microswitch. Must be used with power supplies type 6680 or type 6580.
Power supply type 6680 can power only one monitor, if turned on individually.
type 6301 Surface wall-mounted monitor with 4" black/white, low-profile screen for connection with
coaxial cable; equipped with call volume control to one of three levels and call disable with
red indicator LED. The green LED indicates that the door is open when connected to a sui-
table lock or door. Must be used with power supply type 6680.
type 6321 Surface wall-mounted monitor with 4" black/white, low-profile screen for connection with
table lock or door. Must be used with power supply type 6680.
Power supply type 6680 can power only one monitor, if turned on individually.
type 6303 Surface wall-mounted monitor with 4", low-profile, colour screen for connection with coaxial
cable; equipped with call volume control to one of three levels and call disable with red indi-
cator LED. A green LED indicates that the door is open when connected to a suitable lock
microswitch. Must be used with power supplies type 6680 or type 6580.
type 6306 Surface wall-mounted monitor with 4" low-profile, black/white screen without coaxial cable,
equipped with call volume control to one of four levels. The green LED indicates that the
door is open when connected to a suitable lock or door. Must be used with power supply
type 6568. Power supply type 6568 can power two monitors turned on at the same time.
type 6326 Surface wall-mounted monitor with 4" low-profile, black/white screen without coaxial cable,
type 6568. Power supply type 6568 can power only one monitor, if turned on individually.
type 6610 Desk-top conversion kit for monitors type 6300, 6301, 6321, 6303, 6306, 6326. The kit
comes supplied with 2 metres of 12-conductor cable + 1 coaxial with socket and remova-
ble plug.
type 661T Desk-top conversion kit for monitors type 6300, 6301, 6321, 6303, 6326, 6306. The kit
consists of a built-in power supply and is for use with several monitors in parallel or very
long connection lines with excessive voltage drops. The kit is supplied with 2 metres of 12-
conductor cable + 1 coaxial with socket and removable plug. Power supply 230 VAC.
GIOTTO 6500 SERIES MONITORS
The GIOTTO 6500 series semi-flush wall-mounted monitor in ABS is supplied with a fixing bracket with terminal block, loud-
speaker for electronic call, three push-buttons (door release, self-start and stair light). The monitor can be installed with the stan-
dard 3-module flush wall-mounted box (not supplied). Dimensions: 204x220x90 mm + 50 mm (for flush-mounted).
type 6500 Semi-flush mounting monitor with 5" black/white, low-profile screen, equipped with: inter-
nal ringtone, call volume control to one of three levels and call disable with red indicator
LED. A green LED indicates that the door is open when connected to a suitable lock or
door. The conversation privacy function can be activated by means of an appropriate
ted by means of a microswitch. Must be used with power supplies type 6680 or type 6580
Power supply type 6680 can power two monitors turned on at the same time..
type 6501 Semi-flush wall-mounted monitor with 5" low-profile, black/white screen for connection with
table lock or door. Must be used with power supply type 6680. Power supply type 6680
can power two monitors turned on at the same time.
type 6506 Semi-flush mounting monitor with 5" low-profile, black/white screen without coaxial cable,
type 6568. Power supply type 6568 can power two monitors turned on at the same time.
17
ASSEMBLY OF 6300 AND 6500 SERIES MONITORS
®
Control functions A) INTERPHONE: enables communication with the speech unit.

A B) push-button " ". electric lock control.
C) push-button " ": push-button for auxiliary services (stair light, etc.). When connected
to the VIDEOMOVING system of the video entrance panel, the push-button controls
the vertical camera angle in such a way as to frame people of different heights from
H
close up.
D) push-button " ": push-button for auxiliary services or for self-start of the system from
inside and switch-on of additional cameras (if fitted).
B
E) BRIGHTNESS : knob for controlling the brightness of the screen.
C F) CONTRAST OR COLOUR : knob for controlling contrast or colour.
I G) CALL CONTROL: 4-position selector for controlling intensity of or muting the acoustic
call signal.
D H) CALL DISABLED INDICATOR : If the indicator (red LED) illuminates, this indicates
that the call is disabled (see point "G"); only on models with this function.
I) DOOR OPEN INDICATOR : If the indicator (green LED) illuminates, this indicates
that the door is open (the function is optional depending on the type of installation).
F E G
Installation instructions Fig. 1 1 Fig. 2

Install the monitor away from sources
of light and heat. 2
Fig. 1 - Fix the monitor mounting plate to 1
the wall with a distance of about
1.4 m between the bottom edge 1
and the ground.
1 2
Make the connections on the
monitor terminal block.
Fig. 2 - Fit the monitor following the 1,40
direction of arrows 1 and 2.
INSTALLING 6500 SERIES

MONITORS WITH FLUSH-
MOUNTING BOX type
5609/000.
Mounting points
2°
INSTALLING 6500 SERIES Fix the plate on point 1, resting
MONITORS WITH 3- the plate tabs on the base of the
MODULE FLUSH-MOUN- box, and then fix points 2.
TING BOX (type 6609).
Mounting points
2° 1°
2°
18
ASSEMBLY OF 6300 AND 6500 SERIES MONITORS - AUDIO SWITCHBOARD
®
INSTALLING 6300
SERIES MONITORS
Mounting points
SWITCHBOARDS
AUDIO SWITCHBOARD
The audio switchboard with internal/external switching comes in a single version for flush desk-mounting, flush wall-mounted and
surface wall-mounted:standard colour black, ABS, interphone with "TINSEL" spiral cord, keypads in modules with 10 keys, acou-
stic and illuminating call alert signal, conversation privacy. Used in the internal position, the switchboard enables calls and con-
versation from switchboard to users and vice versa, while entrance panel calls are received by the switchboard. In the external
position, calls are sent directly to the user. For use in installations for audio and video door entry systems
with Sound System and AC call with power supply type 6680. The switchboard requires a additional power supply type 836.
Version Overall dimensions Flush-mounting hole dimensions

mm. (W.xH.xD.) mm. (W.xH.xD.)
type 152A 10 lines 258x265x153 240x247x100
type 152B 20 lines 308x265x153 290x247x100
type 152C 30 lines 358x265x153 340x247x100
type 152D 40 lines 408x265x153 390x247x100
type 152E 50 lines 458x265x153 440x247x100
type 152F 60 lines 508x265x153 490x247x100
type 152G 80 lines * 408x265x153 390x247x100
type 152H 100 lines * 458x265x153 440x247x100
type 152I 120 lines * 508x265x153 490x247x100
*On these switchboards, each key is equipped with two different coloured LEDs and can
be used for two lines by means of the multiplier key.
19
GALILEO SERIES ENTRANCE PANELS
®
ENTRANCE PANELS
“8000” (GALILEO) MODULAR ENTRANCE PANELS
The “8000” modular entrance panel component system has been designed to provide the option of combining panels of various
type s of audio and video door entry systems using only a few basic components. The panels can be predisposed for flush-
mounted and equipped with rainproof covers, if required. The same device can be installed on a wall surface using the appro-
priate back box. Several modules are available as described below.
8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8D02 8D04 8006 8008 800C 80C1
80C2 80C3 8DC2 80C4 80C6 800N 80N1 80N2 80CN 8010 8011
8012 8019 8T19 8020 8T20 8C20 8CT2 8015 8016 8017
The modules are easily inserted into the module-holder frame as indicated:
Fig. 2
Fig. 1 Fig. 3
Inserting the modu-
Opening the Closing the
les and module sepa-
frame. Operate frame..
rators (detail A).
on the lower
head rear side
by means of a
screwdriver
(see detail).
Fig. 6
Exploded dia-
Fig. 5 gram of modu-
Fig. 4 Exploded lar entrance Fig. 7
Insertion of diagram of panel for audio To reach
internal flush-moun- door entry name-tag,
c o m p o - ted modular system for sur- remove
nents on entrance face wall-moun- name-tag
the keypad panel for ted installation. holder from
frame. video door the back,
e n t r y as shown.
system.
The module-holder frames are available in 1 module (type 8081), 2 modules (type 8082) and 3 modules (type 8083)
When the modular entrance panels are flush-mounted in a wall, the flush-mounted back box, type 9091 is used for 1-module version, type
9092 for 2-modules, type 9093 for 3 modules. More modules can be obtained by combining the three models. Back boxes are constructed in
hot-galvanized sheet steel with heads made from copolymers. Each back box is supplied with two fittings allowing to join several built-in models
together (Fig. 1) so various models can be used simultaneously providing more keys. Removing the plastic from the heads, located in corre-
spondence to the fittings, creates a passage for connecting cables. Installation of camera entrance panels should be made between1.40 and
1.65 meters, measuring from its upper edge to the ground surface (Fig. 2).
When more than one panel is used, we recommend use of the series 91XX hole-cover frame or the series 92XX rainproof cover to ensure that
the plates are kept aligned and any damage which might be done to the wall during installation is covered (Fig. 3 and 4).
If installation is on the wall surface, a series 93XX back box should be used suitable to the module-holder frames selected, together with series
92XX rainproof cover of the same size.
20
8100 SERIES ENTRANCE PANELS
®
DESCRIPTION
Series 8100 low-profile audio, video and push-button only entrance panels.
In line with the Galileo design, they consist of a surface-mounted frame with rainproof cover in polycarbonate, and a protective
plate in painted aluminium. The call keys are equipped with a protective key cover in stainless steel and are bordered with a
transparent plastic profile which, by refracting the light emitted by the LEDs that light the name-tag holder, also illuminate the
keys so that they can be seen easily even in the dark. The LEDs can be supplied at 12 to 15 V A.C. (11mA per LED) or 15V rec-
tified (see power supplies type 931 and 6680). The name-tag holder is opened from the back of the plate. All models have the
same dimensions (101 x 200 x 38 mm, width x height x depth).
Type 8190 Type 8100 Type 8151
Type 819D Type 8103 Type 8154
Type 8T90 Type 8112 Type 8156
Type 8T9D Type 8118 Type 8164
Type 8T94 Type 8166
Type 8168
Type 8170
Type 8172
Type 8174
Entrance panels for B/W camera

Type 8190 Type 8191 Type 8192 Type 819D Type 8194
To be used with B/W cameras with speech unit
type 559A or 561A.
Entrance panels for colour camera

Type 8T90 Type 8T91 Type 8T92 Type 8T9D Type 8T94
To be used with colour cameras with speech unit
type 559B.
Entrance panels for audio speech unit

To be used with speech unit type Type 930A, 930C, 930D and 930F.
Type 8100 Type 8101 Type 8102 Type 8103 Type 8104 Type 8112 Type 8114 Type 8116 Type 8118
21
®
Pushbutton entrance panels

Type 8151 Type 8152 Type 8153 Type 8154 Type 8155 Type 8156 Type 8157
Type 8162 Type 8164 Type 8166 Type 8168 Type 8170 Type 8172 Type 8174
Opening the entrance panel
With a screwdriver, press the left- Slide the door to the left. Unscrew the entrance panel fixing screw,
hand side of the sliding door mar- with the special EVOX key provided.
ked with the ELVOX logo.
Installation
38 mm 101 mm
200 mm
Mount the entrance panels with the screws and expansion plugs supplied, or on a 3-module vertical box. Entrance panels with
cameras should be installed at a height of 1.65 m, measured from the top edge of the entrance panel to the ground. Before instal-
ling equipment, choose location for camera entrance panel: the camera should be protected from direct light (sun, car headlights,
etc.) as this may affect the quality of the picture, and may damage the camera.
22
®
Fig. 1A
Fig. 2A
Fig. 3
Fig. 1B Fig. 2B
Fit the speech unit or camera in its seat in the entrance panel (as shown in fig. 1A and 2A), remove the microphone from the
camera or from the speech unit and fit it in its seat in the entrance panel as shown in fig. 1B and 2B. Connect the call lines to
the push-buttons, and the speech unit or camera to the system; the supply voltage for the LEDs is connected to the terminals
shown in fig. 3.
To reach name-tag, remove name-tag holder from the back, as shown.
23
®
Series 3390 video (Galileo Security) VIDEO ENTRANCE PANELS

Die-cast aluminium plate with special paint treatment; Type Push-button Plate
metallic buttons with name-tags removable from rear; number dimensions
panel bulb 24V 3W; security fitting system with stainless 3390 0 120x280x30
steel screws, screwed into galvanized steel frame with 3391 1* 120x280x30
special key; socket for cameras (Arts. 558, 559 and 561). 3392 2* 120x280x30
3393 3* 120x280x30
Anti-theft protection by security lock. Possibility of fitting
3394 4** 120x280x30
panels from 3350 series with push-buttons only. 3396 6** 120x280x30
They can be mounted with flush-mount back box type
320S or with rainproof cover type 330P - 332P - 333P. 3T90 0 120x280x30
3T91 1* 120x280x30
3T92 2* 120x280x30
3T93 3* 120x280x30
3T94 4** 120x280x30
3T96 6** 120x280x30
AUDIO ENTRANCE PANELS

Series 3300 audio (Galileo Security)
Die-cast aluminium plate with special paint treatment; Type Push-button Plate
metallic buttons with name-tags removable from rear; number dimensions
3300 0 120x280x30
panel bulb 24V 3W; security fitting system with stainless 3301 1* 120x280x30
steel screws, screwed into galvanized steel frame with 3302 2* 120x280x30
special key; socket for speech unit type 930. 3303 3* 120x280x30
Possibility of fitting panels from 3350 series with push-but- 3304 4* 120x280x30
tons only. 3305 5* 120x280x30
They can be mounted with flush-mount back box type 3306 6** 120x280x30
320S or with rainproof cover type 330P - 332P - 333P. 3308 8** 120x280x30
3310 10** 120x280x30
Series 3300 additional (Galileo Security) ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSH-BUTTONS

Panels with push-buttons only with same manufacturing ONLY
characteristics as previous panels. They may be matched Type Push-button Plate
to panels type 3390 to increase push-button number. number dimensions
3356 6* 120x280x30
3358 8* 120x280x30
3362 12** 120x280x30
3364 14** 120x280x30
3366 16** 120x280x30
N:B:
* The buttons are laid out in a single row.
330S ** The buttons are laid out in two rows.
Back box equipped with brackets for adjacent installation
of additional entrance panels.
Dimensions: 111x265x45 mm (WxHxD).
330P
Surface-mounted rainproof cover for one, two or three modu-
le. Dimensions: 130x290x100 mm (WxHxD).
330C - 332C - 333C

Flush-mounted rainproof cover for one, two or three
modules. Dimensions (1 module): 130x290x100 mm.
332P
Surface-mounted rainproof cover for two modules.
333P
Surface-mounted rainproof cover for three modules.
24
MOUNTING OF 3300 SERIES PANEL
®
H
B E
Fig. 1A
A
D C F
L
Fig. 1B
Fig. 2
The recommended height for

the installation of video entrance
panels is between 1.40 and 1.65
m. from the upper part of the
panel to the floor level.
The average recommended

height for audio entrance panels
is of 1.45m.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED PANEL MOUNTING
Fig. 1 The diagram shows the components of the panel:
A- Front plate
B- Camera
C- Frame
D- Flush-mounted back box type 320S (supplied separately).
E- Special key for security screws
F- Removable terminal block to facilitate camera wiring.
G- Antitheft security key.
L- Speech unit
Fig. 3A -3B These entrance panels may be matched either horizontally or vertically. In this case back-boxes are separated from the panels and
frames and assembled as shown in figure 3A, in order to mount them at the same height. For this purpose, special brackets are
used for holding back-box in position. These brackets may be vertically or horizontally fitted.
Fig. 4 To gain access to the name-tags, take out the name-tag holder from the rear, as shown in the diagram.
Fig. 5 Make the holes for the electric wires to pass through, placing the wires in the correct position.
After installling the flush-mounted back box (Fig. 1A, detail "D"), connect camera by using removable terminal block (detail "F") or speech unit
(Fig. 1A) connect also push-buttons, bulb and electric door lock.
Fix the camera to the entrance panel frame by inserting the camera hooks into the frame slots (Fig. 1A, detail "H"). Testing the equipment, fasten
the plate with the security screws, using the special key supplied (point "E" fig. 1A), then definitively lock in place with the special key supplied
(point "G" fig. 1A).
For the installation of the surface wall-mounted entrance panels use frames type 320P, 322P and 333P, to be used (respectively) for
the mounting of one, two or three entrance panels fitted horizontally.
25
MOUNTING OF 3300 SERIES PANEL
AND LETTER BOX SERIES PANEL ®
Fig. 3A Fig. 3B Mounting with rainproof cover

(Fig. 6).
The rain-proof cover is moun-
ted on surface wall-mounted
vandal-proof security panels
using rain-proof covers type
330P, 332P or 333P respecti-
vely.
To install, follow the procedure
previously described but
without using the back box.
The panel may be set up with
1, 2 or 3 rows.
Fig. 6
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
ENTRANCE PANEL FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
ARTICLE PUSH-BUTTON PLATE
WITH LETTER-BOX AND FRONT OR REAR OPENING
NUMBER DIMENSIONS
Type 2550/301-302
2550/301 1 265x363x135
Entrance panel with housing, rainproof cover and front plate
2550/302 2 265x363x135
in profiled anodized aluminium; without camera and speech
unit; preset for cameras type 570, 570C, 570G or type 571
with "VIDEOMOVING" system and speech unit series 930.
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
Mount video entrance panel shown in Fig. 1 (min. 1.40, max.
1.70 m. from ground level; see Fig. 2).
This panel is provided with letter-box with front opening. To
obtain rear opening follow these instructions:
Fig. 3 - 4
Open front opening with the key supplied. Remove front plate
by pulling it downwards after loosening screw A.
Fig. 5
Open rear part of panel by loosening the screws on lock
block. Remove parts B-C-D and lock. Insert them again
reversing their position.
Fig. 6
Carry out electric wiring to speech unit and to camera, write
name on name-tag and block front plate. Then fix front open-
ing with lock system removed from rear opening.
26
PATAVIUM SERIES ENTRANCE PANELS
®
TECHNICAL FEATURES OF PATAVIUM SERIES ENTRANCE PANELS

Plate in satin-finish brass with protective treatment. The treatment consists in nickel plating, gold plating and PVD titanium nitra-
te surface coating. Buttons only in brass with protective treatment. Equipped with flush-mounted back box in galvanised steel
and name-tag holders that pull out from the rear. 24V 3W torpedo bulb for lighting entrance panel. Security mounting with brass-
plated screws for use with special wrench (for audio entrance panels) or 2 screw-type security locks (for entrance panels), which
fix the plate to the frame in galvanised steel.
Entrance panels for video door entry systems have a mounting for cameras type 558-559-559C-559G-561 and 561G. Entrance
panels for audio door entry systems have a mounting for 930 series speech units.
Plate flush-mounted back box
Additional entrance panels with a sin- No. Push-buttons dimensions mm dimensions mm No. bulbs
gle row of buttons. (WxH) (WxH)
The entrance panels can be coupled
2301 1 120 x 244 105 x 200 x 55 1
with the button-only series directly in 2 120 x 276,5 105 x 233 x 55 1
2302
the factory. 2303 3 120 x 309 105 x 266 x 55 1
N.B.: For colour camera type 559C, 2304 4 120 x 341,5 105 x 298 x 55 1
2305 5 120 x 374 105 x 331 x 55 1
add "/T" to the code of the Patavium 2306 6 120 x 406,5 105 x 363 x 55 2
entrance panel (e.g. type 2301 beco- 2307 7 120 x 439 105 x 395 x 55 2
mes type 2301/T). 2308 8 120 x 471,5 105 x 428 x 55 2
2309 9 120 x 504 105 x 460 x 55 2
Entrance panels with mounting for 2402 2 180 x 244 165 x 200 x 55 1
audio speech unit with two rows of 2404 4 180 x 276,5 165 x 233 x 55 1
2406 6 180 x 309 165 x 266 x 55 1
buttons. 2408 8 180 x 341,5 165 x 298 x 55 1
N.B.: For colour camera type 559C, 2410 10 180 x 374 165 x 331 x 55 1
add "/T" to the Patavium entrance 2412 12 180 x 406,5 165 x 363 x 55 1
2414 14 180 x 439 165 x 395 x 55 1
panel code (e.g. type 2402 becomes 2416 16 180 x 471,5 165 x 428 x 55 1
type 2402/T). 2418 18 180 x 504 165 x 460 x 55 2
2420 20 180 x 536,5 165 x 493 x 55 2
2422 22 180 x 569 165 x 525 x 55 2
2424 24 180 x 601,5 165 x 558 x 55 2
2426 26 180 x 634 165 x 590 x 55 2
Entrance panels with mounting for 2101 1 120 x 211,5 105 x 168 x 55 1
2102 2 120 x 244 105 x 200 x 55 1
audio speech unit with single row of 2103 3 120 x 276,5 105 x 233 x 55 1
buttons. Designed for 930 series 2104 4 120 x 309 105 x 266 x 55 1
5 120 x 341,5 105 x 298 x 55 1
speech unit. 2105
6 120 x 374 105 x 331 x 55 2
2106
2107 7 120 x 406,5 105 x 363 x 55 2
2108 8 120 x 439 105 x 395 x 55 2
2109 9 120 x 471,5 105 x 428 x 55 2
2110 10 120 x 504 105 x460 x 55 2
Entrance panels for video door entry 2202 2 180 x 211,5 165 x 168 x 55 1
2204 4 180 x 244 165 x 200 x 55 1
system with two rows of buttons. 2206 6 180 x 276,5 165 x 233 x 55 1
Designed for 930 series speech unit. 2208 8 180 x 309 165 x 266 x 55 1
2210 10 180 x 341,5 165 x 298 x 55 1
2212 12 180 x 374 165 x 331 x 55 2
2214 14 180 x 406,5 165 x 363 x 55 2
2216 16 180 x 439 165 x 395 x 55 2
2218 18 180 x 471,5 165 x 428 x 55 2
2220 20 180 x 504 165 x 460 x 55 2
2222 22 180 x 536,5 165 x 493 x 55 2
2224 24 180 x 569 165 x 525 x 55 2
2226 26 180 x 601,5 165 x 558 x 55 2
2228 28 180 x 634 165 x 590 x 55 2
Additional entrance panels with a sin- 2000 1 108 x 64 82 x 51 x 45 0

2001
* 1 166 x 85 130 x 103 x 55 1
gle row of buttons. 2002 2 120 x 146,5 105 x 103 x 55 1
To be coupled with 2100, 2200, 2300 2003 3 120 x 179 105 x 135 x 55 1
and 2400, by request to the factory. 2004 4 120 x 211,5 105 x 168 x 55 1
2005 5 120 x 244 105 x 200 x 55 1
2006 6 120 x 276,5 105 x 233 x 55 2
* Without name-tag holder 7 120 x 309 105 x 266 x 55 2
2007
2008 8 120 x 341,5 105 x 298 x 55 2
2009 9 120 x 374 105 x 331 x 55 2
2010 10 120 x 406,5 105 x 363 x 55 2
2011 11 120 x 439 105 x 395 x 55 3
2012 12 120 x 471,5 105 x 428 x 55 3
2013 13 120 x 504 105 x 460 x 55 3
27
MOUNTING OF PATAVIUM SERIES ENTRANCE PANEL
®
INSTALLATION FOR “PATAVIUM” VIDEO ENTRANCE PANEL

Before installing equipment, choose location for camera entrance panel: the camera should be protected from direct light (colour
type 559C is equipped with white light LEDs) as this may affect the quality of the picture, and may damage the camera. This B/W
camera is equipped with infrared Led’s (l’type 559C a colori è munita di Led a luce bianca) allowing perfect picture at one metre
distance.
Fig. 1 With cameras type 559-559C-561 install flush-mounted back box at a height of between 1.65 and 1.40 m measured
from the top edge to the ground.
These diagrams show vertical camera coverage at one metre distance.
Fig. 2 A-B These diagrams show the components of the entrance panel:
A- Front plate
B- Camera
C- Back-box
D- Security lock (for video entrance panels only)
E- Removable terminal block for connecting the camera (for video entrance panels only)
F- Wrench for security bolts (for audio entrance panels only)
G- Speech unit
Fig. 3 To gain access to the name-tags, take out the name-tag holder from the rear, as shown in the diagram.
Carry out connections to camera by means of removable terminal block (video entrance panels, Fig.2A point “E”), speech unit,
wire push-buttons (audio entrance panels), bulb and door lock.
After testing, secure the entrance panel with the screw-on security locks (video entrance panels, detail D, Fig. 2A) or the security
bolts (use the wrench provided, audio panels, detail F, Fig. 2B).
Fig. 1 Fig. 2A
C
B
A
D
E
Video entrance panel
C Fig. 2B
D
Audio entrance panel
F
Fig. 3
28
1200 SERIES ENTRANCE PANEL
®
AUDIO/VIDEO ENTRANCE PANELS SERIES Additional components for Sound System and C.A. call
systems:
1200
The entrance panel is preset for video entrance panel systems
and is to be implemented with the following articles:
- Flush-mounted back box type 9092 for entrance panels in 2
vertical modules or type 9093 for entrance panels in 3 verti-
cal modules.
- Video camera with speech unit type 559A or 559B or 560A
or speech unit type 930A or 930D (fig. 6 shows how to insert
the camera in the frame).
- Push-buttons type R200, R200/50 (R200/50 = package with
50 push-buttons R200)
- LED for lighting name-tags type R260
- Diodes type 2/994 (for “1+N wires” or without coaxial cable).
- Rainproof covers type 1P21, 1P22, 1P23, 1P24 for entrance
panels in 2 vertical modules or 1P31or 1P32 or 1P33 or
1P34 for entrance panels in 3 vertical modules
- Surface-mounted boxes with rainproof cover type 1E21,
1E22, 1E23, 1E24 for entrance panels in 2 vertical modules
or 1E31, 1E32, 1E33, 1E34 for entrance panels in 3 vertical
modules.
The same entrance panel can be preset for the sole external
speech unit; in this case remove the ring from the back of the
front plate (identified with number 1 in fig. 4); insert in its place
the cover for closing the lens (shown with number 2 in fig. 4) in
the frame “B”, install the bracket “C” (using the screws sup-
plied) for the speech unit (see fig. 10, 12, 14).
TECHNICAL FEATURES OF 1200 SERIES ENTRANCE

PANELS
- Aisi 316 (4VA) stainless steel plate of thickness 8/10 with
embossed surface
- Protection class: IP44
- Die-cast aluminium heads (that enable fixing the front plate
to the frame with a special ELVOX screw)
- Support for transparent shockproof polycarbonate buttons
- Stainless steel frame.
- Transparent polycarbonate buttons covered with stainless
steel protection
The elements of the 1200 series allow compositions of

entrance panels for the following systems:
- Audio/video door entry systems with Sound System calls
- Audio/video door entry systems with AC calls
- Elvox Two-Wire audio/video door entry systems
- Digibus audio/video door entry systems
The entrance panels are supplied with a front plate and
frame; they are to be completed according to the type of
system (Sound System, AC calls, Elvox Two-Wire, Digibus)
and the type of installation.
The elements inside the package are to be used to carry

out an entrance panel series 1200 with push-buttons for
Sound System, AC calls, Elvox Two-Wire, Digibus type
installations.
The following instructions refer only to an installation for

Sound System or AC calls systems.
For the application of the Due fili Elvox (Elvox two wires) tech-
nology refer to the following types of articles:
12F3, 12F3/3, 12F5, 12F5/3, 12F4, 12F7
For the application of the Digibus technology refer to the follo-
wing types of articles:
1283, 1283/3, 1285, 1285/3, 1284, 1287.
29
®
HEIGHT OF 2-MODULE ENTRANCE PANELS HEIGHT OF 3-MODULE ENTRANCE PANELS
BUTTON ENTRANCE PANELS FOR AUDIO SPEECH UNITS OR VIDEO CAMERA WITH SPEECH UNIT
Art. 1220 Art. 1221 Art. 1222 Art. 1223 Art. 1224 Art. 12NN Art. 122D
Art. 1230 Art. 1231 Art. 1232 Art. 1233 Art. 1234 Art. 1235 Art. 1236 Art. 1237 Art. 1238 Art. 12N1 Art. 12N2 Art. 12N3 Art. 12N4 Art. 123D
SUPPLEMENTARY PUSH-BUTTON PANELS
Art. 1251 Art. 1252 Art. 1253 Art. 1254 Art. 1255 Art. 1256 Art. 1257 Art. 1258 Art. 122N
Art. 1261 Art. 1262 Art. 1263 Art. 1264 Art. 1265 Art. 1266 Art. 1267 Art. 1268 Art. 1269 Art. 1270 Art. 1271 Art. 1272 Art. 123N
30
®
RAINPROOF COVERS
1P21 1P22 1P23 1P24
for 1 panel for 2 panels for 3 panels for 4 panels
2 modules high alta 2 moduli 2 modules high 2 modules high
295 297
124 front side 224 front side 324 front side 424 front side 39,5
120 rear side 220 rear side 320 rear side 420 rear side
1P31 1P32 1P33 1P34
3 modules high 3 modules high 3 modules high 3 modules high
410 412
124 front side 224 front side 324 front side 424 front side 39,5
SURFACE-MOUNTED BOXES WITH RAINPROOF COVER
1E21 1E22 1E23 1E24
2 modules high alta 2 moduli 2 modules high 2 modules high
295 297
124 front side 224 front side 324 front side 424 front side 74
1E31 1E22 1E23 1E24
3 modules high 3 modules high 3 modules high 3 modules high
410
412
124 front side 224 front side 324 front side 424 front side 74
31
®
COMPONENTS SUPPLIED AS STANDARD WITH ENTRANCE PANELS SERIES 1200
A C
B D
COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND TO BE ORDERED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO ASSEMBLE AN

AUDIO ENTRANCE PANEL
F G H
COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND TO BE ORDERED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO ASSEMBLE A

VIDEO ENTRANCE PANEL
I V
+T
8
7
6
5
G H
- M
A – Front plate.
B – Frame.
C – Bracket with screws for fixing the speech unit.
D – Cover for closing the lens.
E – Ring for lens.
F – Speech unit (supplied separately) Art. 930A, Art. 930B, Art. 930C, Art. 930D, Art. 930F
G – Push-buttons (supplied separately), Art. R200 or R200/50.
H – Led lighting card for name-tags (supplied separately), Art. R260.
I – Camera with speech unit (supplied separately) Art. 559A, Art. 559B, 560A for system with or without coaxial cable
32
®
COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND TO BE ORDERED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO PRESET ONE
FLUSH-MOUNTED ENTRANCE PANEL
L
M
COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND TO BE ORDERED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO PRESET ONE SUR-
FACE WALL-MOUNTED ENTRANCE PANEL
L - Flush-mounted box (supplied separately) type 9092 (for 2 vertical modules) or 9093 (for 3 vertical modules)
M - Rainproof cover for surface-mounted installation (supplied separately)
type 1P21, 1P22, 1P23, 1P24 (2 vertical modules)
type 1P31, 1P32, 1P33, 1P34 (3 vertical modules)
N - Box with rainproof cover for surface wall-mounted entrance panel installation (supplied separately)
type 1E21, 1E22, 1E23, 1E24 (2 vertical modules)
type 1E31, 1E32, 1E33, 1E34 (3 vertical modules)
33
®
FLUSH-MOUNTED PANEL INSTALLATION SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED PANEL INSTALLATION

- Install the flush-mounted box (L) on the wall at a height of - Install the surface wall-mounted box (N) on the wall at a
approx. 1.65 m from the top edge of the boxes to the floor. height of approx. 1.65 m from the top edge of the boxes to
Note: the floor.
The entrance panels of the 1200 series can only be extended Note:
horizontally with supplementary entrance panels by joining the The entrance panels of the 1200 series can only be extended
flush-mounted boxes with the hooks supplied with the boxes to horizontally with supplementary entrance panels
fasten them together (see fig. 8). - For audio door entry systems: secure the bracket (C) at the
- For audio door entry systems: secure the bracket (C) at the top of the frame (B) by means of the screws in the prear-
top of the frame (B) by means of the screws in the prear- ranged holes and fix the speech unit to the bracket (see fig.
ranged holes and fix the speech unit to the bracket (see fig. 14)
10, 12). - For video door entry systems: secure the video camera (I)
- For video door entry systems: secure the video camera (I) to the frame (B) as shown in fig. 6, 15.
to the frame (B) as shown in fig. 6, 11, 13. - Extract or cut the rubber plug (already existing in the audio
- Extract or cut the rubber plug (already existing in the audio speech units or video cameras) taking care not to cut the
speech units or video cameras) taking care not to cut the cables of the microphone (see fig. 5) and insert the micro-
cables of the microphone (see fig. 5) and insert the microphone capsule into the seat on the frame (B) closing the
phone capsule into the seat on the frame (B) closing the plug as shown in fig. 5 detail 1.
plug as shown in fig. 5 detail 1. - Secure the push-buttons (G) to the frame (B) as shown in
- Secure the push-buttons (G) to the frame (B) as shown in fig. 14, 15.
fig. 10,11, 12, 13. - Secure the frame to the surface wall-mounted box.
- Secure the LED lighting card (H) in the seat as shown in fig. - Secure the LED lighting card (H) in the seat as shown in
10,11, 12, 13. Fig. 14, 15.
- Secure any rainproof cover (M) to the flush-mounted box. - For audio door entry systems on the back of the front plate
Secure the frame to the flush-mounted box or to the rain- it is necessary to:
proof cover. remove the ring for lens “E” and insert the cover closing the
- For audio door entry systems on the back of the front plate lens “D” (see fig. 4)
it is necessary to: remove the ring for lens “E” and insert - For video door entry systems on the back of the front plate
the cover closing the lens “D” (see fig. 4) it is necessary to:
- For video door entry systems on the back of the front plate remove the cover closing the lens “D” and insert the ring
it is necessary to: remove the cover closing the lens “D” for lens “E” (see fig. 4)
and insert the ring for lens “E” (see fig. 4) - Connect the speech unit/video camera, pushbuttons and
- Connect the speech unit/video camera, pushbuttons and LEDs to the system.
LEDs to the system. - Close the entrance panel securing it to the frame by means
- Close the entrance panel securing it to the frame by means of the special wrench “P” (see fig. 7)
of the special wrench “P” (see fig. 7).
34
®
ASSEMBLING OF A MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL WITH AN

ADDITIONAL ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSH-BUTTONS
Fig. 6 Fig. 9
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
35
®
ASSEMBLING OF A FLUSH-MOUNTED AUDIO ENTRANCE ASSEMBLING OF A FLUSH-MOUNTED VIDEO ENTRANCE

PANEL PANEL
A Fig. 11
Fig. 10 A
I
F
1
B
B V
+T
8
7
6
5
- M
L H
L H G
Fig. 4 Fig. 4
D D
E E
Fig. 5 Part. 1 Fig. 5 Part. 1
36
®
ASSEMBLING OF A FLUSH-MOUNTED AUDIO ENTRANCE ASSEMBLING OF A FLUSH-MOUNTED AUDIO ENTRANCE

PANEL WITH RAINPROOF COVER PANEL WITH RAINPROOF COVER
A Fig. 13 A
Fig. 12
I
F
B
1
5
6
7
8
B - M
V
+T
M
M H
H G
G
L
L
D D
Fig. 4 Fig. 4
E E
37
®
ASSEMBLING OF A SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED ENTRAN- ASSEMBLING OF A SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED VIDEO

CE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL
Fig. 14 A Fig. 15 A
F
B
1 6
5
7
8
+T
V
- M
B
H
G
H
G
D D
Fig. 4 Fig. 4
E E
38
CAMERA AND AUDIO SPEECH UNITS
®
CAMERAS AND SPEECH UNITS

CAMERA GENERAL FEATURES
- CCD 1/4” sensor.
- 3mm or wide angle, autoiris lens, fixed focus.
- B/W CCIR standard video signal, 625 lines, 50 images; colour
82
32
standard PAL A
- 1Vpp video output voltage on 75-Ohm load.
- Operation temperature -5° + 50° C.
2
11 4
- 12V D.C. 2A supply.
Cameras are provided with removable terminal block (point A). 4
Figures show camera coverage at 1 m. distance.
A Fig. 1 Fig. 2
COVERAGE ANGLE OF VIDEOMOVING SYSTEM CAMERAS
Inclination of vertical coverage angle on cameras Arts. 558 - 571
may be electrically tilted, in order to view people of different height Fig. 3
or to obtain a full view when the entrance panel is not mounted at the
prescribed height. The diagram shows min. and max. coverage
angle of camera when this is fitted at an average height of 1.45m.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AUDIO SPEECH

UNITS
All speech units are equipped with Electret amplified loudspeaker
and microphone, with sensitivity control.
Type 930A, 930D and 930F have a microphone with an extension
lead and can be used in two-channel open voice systems or to eli-
minate possible audio disturbance caused by the "Larsen effect".
Type 930D, 930/836 and 930F have a double amplifier which
enables audio volume control of the entrance panel and the internal
interphones.
Type 930D is also equipped with an electronic call generator and
must be powered at 12V AC. The speech units can be installed on
the entrance panels in the series: 8000, 1200, 8100, 3300, PATA-
VIUM and letter box.
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Entrance panel models Type of lighting Features

Led with white
Microphone
with extension
Video output on
Video output on
telephone wire
without coaxial
With speech unit
2550/301-302
coaxial cable
Videomoving
Infrared led
Patavium
Galileo
Colour
cable
cable
3300
B/W
light
Cameras
559 (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
559A (Fig. 1) X X X X X X
559B (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
559C (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
559G (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
558 (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X X
570 (Fig. 2) X X X X X
570C (Fig. 2) X X X X X
570G (Fig. 2) X X X X X
571 (Fig. 2) X X X X X X
561 (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
561G (Fig. 1) X X X X X X X
Features
Amplified elec-
Microphone with
tret microphone
2550/301-302
Call generator
extension cable
loudspeaker
2501 - 2502
Patavium
Amplified
Galileo
3300
8100
1200
Audio speech unit

930 (Fig. 4) X X X X X X
930A (Fig. 5) X X X X X X X X X
930D (Fig. 5) X X X X X X X X X X X
930F (Fig. 5) X X X X X X X X
39
ADDITIONAL CAMERAS AND INTERCHANGEABLE LENSES
®
ADDITIONAL CAMERAS
type 5000 Additional CCD camera complete with mounting bracket for indoor installation. No lens
Camera body dimensions: supplied. Uses C-CS thread lens attachments with manual diaphragm lens article 2/...
64x60x122 mm or automatic diaphragm lens article 22/... and 22/S...
Support dimensions:: SUPPLY: 12 V D.C., CONSUMPTION: 100mA.
ø57x150 mm
type 5020 Additional compact CCD camera complete with mounting bracket for indoor installation.
Camera body dimensions: No lens supplied.
62x60x72 mm Uses C-CS thread lens attachments with manual diaphragm lens article 2/... or auto-
Support dimensions: matic diaphragm lens article 22/... and 22/S...
ø55x110 mm SUPPLY: 12 V D.C., CONSUMPTION: 100mA.
type 5A20 - 5B20 Additional compact CCD camera with fixed lens (5A20 = 3 mm, 5B20 =6 mm) comple-
Camera body dimensions: te with mounting bracket for indoor installation.
62x60x72 mm SUPPLY: 12 V D.C., CONSUMPTION: 100mA.
Support dimensions:
ø57x110 mm
type 5A10-5B10-5C10 Additional CCD camera with fixed lens (A = 3 mm, B =6 mm, C =12mm) housed in ther-
Camera body dimensions:: moplastic housing.
62x60x122 mm SUPPLY: 12 V D.C., CONSUMPTION: 100mA.
Support dimensions:
ø57x150 mm
type 5299 Painted aluminium, waterproof container with polymer cover, complete with resistor with
Camera body dimensions: thermostat heating and bracket for outdoor mounting. Compatible with all type s of
90x100x280 mm cameras.
Support dimensions: SUPPLY FOR RESISTOR WITH THERMOSTATIC HEATER: 24V A.C.
45x80x195 mm
type 5T10 Rainproof cover for outdoor cameras 5A10-5B10-5C10.
Rainproof cover
COVERAGE OF INTERCHANGEABLE LENSES

“C” LENS SPECIFICATION “CS” LENS SPECIFICATION
Lens Focus Diaphragm Width (F) Coverage Lens Focus Diaphragm Width (F) Coverage
Type length (mm) horizontal angle Type length (mm) horizontal angle
2/S03 2,8 MANUAL 1,3 88°
2/I06 6 MANUAL 1,2 43,6°
2/S04 4,0 MANUAL 1,3 64°
2/016 16 Without diaph. 1,6 20°
2/S08 8,0 MANUAL 1,4 34°
2/I16 16 MANUAL 1,4 17°
22/S03 2,8 AUTOMATIC 1,3 88°
2/025 25 MANUAL 1,4 13°
22/S04 4,0 AUTOMATIC 1,4 64°
2/050 50 MANUAL 1,3 6°
22/S08 8,0 AUTOMATIC 1,3 34°
22/003 3 AUTOMATIC 1,4 67°
22/005 5,6 AUTOMATIC 1,3 47,2° AUTOMATIC ZOOM LENS SPECIFICATION (with automatic diaphragm)
22/Z00 8,5-85 “C”-mount 1,8/360 32°-3,2°
22/006 6 AUTOMATIC 1,2 56° 22/ZS0 6,5-65 “CS”-mount 1,4/360 40°-4,2°
22/ZS1 6,5-39 “CS”-mount 1,4/360 40,5°-7°
22/012 12 AUTOMATIC 1,4 23°
MANUAL ZOOM LENS SPECIFICATION (with automatic diaphragm)
22/016 16 AUTOMATIC 1,3 20° 22/612 6-12 “C”-mount 1,4/88 43,6°-22,6°
22/308 3,5-8 “CS”-mount 1,4/88 92,9°-35,7°
22/025 25 AUTOMATIC 1,3 13°
MANUAL ZOOM LENS SPECIFICATION (with manual diaphragm)
22/050 50 AUTOMATIC 1,8 6° 2/612 6-12 “C”-mount 1,4 43,6°- 33,5°
2/308 3,5-8 “CS”-mount 1,8 70°-33,5°
Technical notes
During installation, make sure that the diaphragm for the manual lenses is fully open since the video came-
ra automatically adjusts the light on the pick-up sensor by means of an electronic device. The choice of a
lens with manual or automatic diaphragm must be made, bearing in mind the lighting conditions in which
the camera is to operate. We recommend, however, the use of lenses with automatic diaphragm series 22/...
when the camera must operate with backlighting or in environments with widely varying lighting conditions.
When selecting the focal length, proceed as follows:
1 Determine the position of the camera and measure the distance between it and the subject.
2 Consult the lens table, and select the dimension of the subject to be filmed (B=base, H=height) in accor-
dance with the distance calculated.
40
POWER SUPPLIES AND SWITCHING MODULES
®
POWER SUPPLIES
The power supplies with class V-0 copolymercase on 8-module DIN housing and protective cap for terminal blocks are equipped with double
electronic call generator (modulated and continuous). 230V 50Hz power supply with maximum absorbed power of 30VA and dissipated power
of 8.5W. Protection with PTC against short circuits and temperature variations. Dimensions: 140x115x65 mm
type 931 Power supply for audio door entry system with 1+n wire with and without conversation privacy. Must
be used with speech unit type 930/000.04 - 930A.
type 931A Power supply for audio door entry system with 1+n wire with and without conversation privacy. It is
possible to connect a 12V D.C. backup battery to the power supply. Must be used with speech unit
type 930A.
type 936 Power supply for audio door entry system or for intercommunicating systems without conversation pri-
vacy. Must be used with speech unit type 930/836.04, 930F.
type 938A Power supply for audio door entry system with intercommunicating interphones and conversation pri-
vacy between interphones and speech unit. Equipped with triple ringtone generator for calls from the
entrance panel, from outside the door and for intercommunicating calls. Switching with the speech unit
takes place automatically with the call from the entrance panel. Must be used with speech unit type
930/000.04 - 930A. Equipped with entrance panel call alert signal, if suitably connected.
type 833 Standard power supply for video entry systems with and without conversation privacy. Must be used
with cameras: type 558, 559, 559A, 559G, 559B, 559C, 570, 570G, 571, 570C and speech unit type
930/000.04 - 930A
type 836 Power supply for audio entry system switchboards type 142, 152, 162.
type 6836 Power supply for audio entry system switchboard type 153A.
Switching modules with class V-0 technopolymer case on 12-module DIN housing and protective caps for terminal blocks. Supplied with double elec-
tronic call generator (modulated and continuous). Power supply 230V 50Hz with maximum absorbed power 30VA or 60VA (for video door entry system)
and dissipated power of 8.5W. Protection with PTC against short circuits and temperature variations. Dimensions: 208x135x72 mm.
type 6837 Power supply for audio door entry system with 1+n wire, with and without conversation privacy. Must
be used with speech unit type 930/000.04 - 930A.
type 837/OCT Power supply for audio door entry system with 1+n wire with and without conversation privacy. It is
possible to connect a 12V D.C. backup battery to the power supply. Must be used with speech unit
type 930/000.04 - 930A.
type 931/OCT Power supply for audio door entry system with and without conversation privacy. It is possible to con-
nect a 12V D.C. backup battery to the power supply. Must be used with speech unit type 930/000.04
- 930A power supply for open voice audio door entry system without conversation privacy. Must be
used with speech unit type 930A
type 6450 Power supply for open voice audio door entry system without conversation privacy. Must be used with
speech unit type 930A
type 6680 Standard power supply for video door entry system with and without conversation privacy. Must be
used with cameras:type 558, 559, 559A, 559G, 559B, 559C, 570, 570G, 571, 570C and speech unit
type 930/000.04 - 930A
type 6680/V03 Power supply like type 6680 for "building complex" type systems. Must be used with cameras: type
558, 559, 559A, 559G, 559C, 559B, 570, 570G, 571, 570C and speech unit type 930/000.04 - 930A
type 6681 Standard power supply for open voice video door entry systems with and without conversation privacy,
equipped with entrance panel call. Must be used with cameras: type 559A, 559B and speech unit type
930A
type 6583 Power supply for additional video door entry systems for long lines and lines with significant voltage
drops or for simultaneous switch-on of several monitors.
type 6584 Power supply for video door entry systems on “building complexes”, to use for connecting the main
external unit
type 6582 Additional power supply for video door entry systems in 4-module DIN housing to use for simultaneous
switch-on of several monitors and for long lines or lines affected by significant voltage drop. Can power
video distributors type 5556/004, 6554 and amplifier type 5559.
Power supply 230V A.C. 50Hz.
SWITCHING MODULES
Switching module with case in copolymer on 4-module DIN housing and protective caps for terminal blocks. Must be used with power supplies
for audio and video door entry systems. Dimensions: 70x115x65 mm
type 935A For systems with intercommunicating networks, for use with: video door entry systems with power
supply type 6680 and audio door entry systems with power supplies type 931, 931A and 931/0CT.
Enables you to set up independent groups of monitors and intercommunicating interphones. Equipped
with differentiated call generator. For connection of type 935A a transformer type 832/030 is required
for every switching module.
Switching modules in technopolymer with 8-module DIN housing and protective caps for terminal blocks. Must be used with power supplies for
audio and video door entry systems with 2 or more speech units. Dimensions: 140x135x72 mm.
type 839/302 For audio door entry system with 2 speech units. Must be used with power supplies type 931, 931A,
936, 938A, 985, 931/0CT and 6450. Possibility of connecting up to 4 switching modules in series.
type 839/303 For audio door entry system with 3 speech units. Must be used with power supplies type 931, 931A,
936, 938A, 985, 931/0CT and 6450. Possibility of connecting up to 4 switching modules in series.
type 5590/001 For video door entry system with one external video unit and one audio only, must be added to type
6680, 6680/V03 and 6681.
type 5590/303 For video door entry system with one external video unit and audio only, must be added to type 6680,
6680/V03and 6681.
41
SWITCHING MODULES, TRANSFORMERS, AMPLIFIERS,
DISTRIBUTORS AND RELAYS ®
Switching modules with case in copolymer on 12-module DIN housing and protective caps for terminal blocks. Must be used with power supplies
for audio or video door entry system with 2 or more speech units. Dimensions: 208x135x72 mm.
type 839/837 For audio door entry systems with 1+n wire and 2 speech units. Must be used with power supplies
type 6837 and 837/0CT.
type 6591 For video door entry systems with 2 external video units, must be added to type 6680, or type
6680/V03, using wiring type 2/690, or type 6681 using wiring type 2/691.
type 6592 For video door entry systems with 2 external video units, must be added to type 6680, or 6680/V03,
using wiring type 2/690. It is possible to install more than two switching modules in series for con-
necting several external units: use one transformer type M832 or 832/030 for each additional swit-
ching module. Each output can be programmed for various functions: audio only, call priority etc.
For connection between switching modules use wiring type 2/591.
type 6594 For video door entry systems with 2 external video units, for “building complexes”. Must be added to
type 6680/V03.
TRANSFORMERS
Transformers with case in copolymer on 4-module DIN housing. Power supply 230V 50Hz with protection with PTC against short circuits and
temperature variations. Dimensions: 75x100x65 mm.
type 832/030 Safety transformer with B.T. 15V~ 30 VA output
Safety transformer with B.T. 12V~ 20 VA output

type M832
AMPLIFIERS
Call amplifiers with case in copolymer on 4-module DIN housing. Power supply 230V 50Hz with protection with PTC against short circuits and
temperature versions. - Dimensions: 70x115x65 mm.
type 934 Call amplifier. Used for amplifying the Sound System call signal of power supplies type 931, 931A,
936, 938A, 985, 931/0CT, 6680 and 6681. Must be used in installations with more than two interpho-
nes or monitors in parallel, up to a maximum of four devices.
type 934N Call amplifier, used for amplifying the Sound System call signal of power supplies type 6837, 837/0CT
and 6568. Must be used in installations with more than two interphones or monitors in parallel, up to
a maximum of four devices.
type 5559 Video amplifier in ABS with 4-module DIN housing, for connection lines with 75 Ohm coaxial cable
over 200 metres long, compensated up to 1000 metres. Power supply 12 - 18V D.C.. Can be powe-
red by power supply type 6582.
VIDEO DISTRIBUTORS
type 6554 Video floor distributor, 4 outputs with 75 Ohm coaxial cable. Power supply 12 to 18V D.C..
type 6669 Video floor distributor with 4 outputs without coaxial cable, maximum 10 connections on cable riser.
Power supply 12 to 20 V D.C.. Dimensions: 48x70x19mm
type 5556/004 Video signal floor distributor or for several cable risers, with 4 outputs, in copolymer with 4-module DIN
housing. Power is supplied from the monitor or from power supply type 6582. Power supply 12V D.C..
type 6670 Video distributor for several cable risers with 4 outputs without coaxial cable, in copolymer with 4-
module DIN housing. Power supply 12 to 20V D.C..
Dimensions with caps on: 75x115x50 mm
RELAYS
Relay with case in copolymer on DIN 4-module housing. - Dimensions: 70x105x65 mm.
type 170/001 Relay for switching on stair light or other system. Load to contacts 3A 230V. Power supply 12V D.C. or A.C.
type 170/002 Pair of 170/001 relays in a single container.
type 170/101 Repeater relay, for additional ringtones etc. Load to contacts 3A 230V. Power supply 12V D.C.,
12V A.C. or electronic call.
type 170/051 Relay for switching the video signal from the entrance panel camera to an additional camera.
Power supply 12V D.C. or A.C.
type 170/560 Relay with device for switching from 1st to 2nd camera and self-start with a single
push-button from the monitor. Power supply 12V D.C..
type 170T Timed relay with 2 outputs with "ON time" control. With two switchovers, load to contacts
2A 230V. Power supply 15V D.C. and VAC.
42
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
®
RINGTONES
Electronic ringtones with one, two or three notes, in ABS. Standard colour white. - Dimensions: 140x140x50 mm.
type 860A Ringtones with differentiated ringtone with 2 inputs. Power supply 230VAC
Ringtones with differentiated ringtone with 2 inputs. Power supply 15VAC

type 860B
type 860C Ringtones with differentiated ringtone with 3 inputs. Power supply 12-15V D.C. or 12-15V A.C. or 9V
battery
type 2/841
Loudspeaker / electronic call repeater for installations with Sound System call and electronic installa-
tions:mounting on rectangular box or with wall plugs. Dimensions: 120x75x30 mm.
WIRING
type 2/690 Wiring with terminal block and black 10-conductor connector. Use to facilitate connection of switching
modules type 6591 and 6592 to power supply type 6680.
type 2/591 Wiring with white 15-conductor connectors. Use to facilitate connection of switching modules type
6592 for three or more external camera units.
type 2/691 Wiring with terminal block and black 9-conductor connector. Use to facilitate connection of switching
modules type 6591 to power supply type 6681
type 2/668 Wiring with removable terminal block and black 10-conductor connector for connection from power
supply type 6568 to switching module type 6596
ACCESSORIES
type 2/567 Type 2/567 Video signal converter. Converts the signal from the 75 Ohm shielded cable into a video
signal suitable for transmission by a pair of normal conductors. Used for eliminating the coaxial cable
connecting the monitor and a camera installed in an entrance panel. Power supply 12V D.C.
type 2/994 Type 2/994 Strip of 4 diodes for mounting on GALILEO series entrance panels. Must be used in audio
door entry systems with 1+n wire and in video door entry systems without coaxial cable. Allow one
diode for each button.
type 27/005 Type 27/005 Strip of 5 diodes. Must be fitted on GALILEO-SECURITY and PATAVIUM series entran-
ce panels. Must be used in audio door entry systems with 1+n wire and in video door entry systems
without coaxial cable. Allow one diode for each button
CABLES
type 61/001 Cable for video connections in P.V.C. NPI 12-48V CEI 20-22 II CEI 20-35 CEI 20-37 I, consisting of
12 coloured conductors and one 75 Ohm coaxial cable, in 100 m rolls. For internal installation. Cable
diameter 10 mm.
type 61/001.500 Cable for video connections in P.V.C. NPI 12-48V CEI 20-22 II CEI 20-35 CEI 20-37 I, consisting of
diameter 10 mm.
type 61/002 Cable for video connections in P.V.C. NPI 12-48V CEI 20-22 II CEI 20-35 CEI 20-37 I, consisting of
diameter 8 mm.
type 61/002.500 Cable for video connections in P.V.C. NPI 12-48V CEI 20-22 II CEI 20-35 CEI 20-37 I, consisting of
diameter 8 mm.
type 61/003 Cable for video connections in special ABS 12-48V CEI 20-22 CEI 20-37, consisting
of 12 coloured conductors and one 75 Ohm coaxial cable, in 100 m rolls. For underground installation
protected with piping. Cable diameter 10.5 mm.
type 2/060 Cable for video in P.V.C. NPI CEI 20-22 II CEI 20-35 CEI 20-37 I, with 75 Ohm coaxial cable (type
RG174), in rolls of 200 m. Cable diameter 3 mm.
43
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CHECKS
®
Monitor switched OFF:

Check voltage across terminals - and + (15-20 V D.C.). Check that the power supply generates the elec-
tronic call notes; connect a loudspeaker of 50÷100 Ohm between terminals - and CH (6E and 8) of the
monitor and make a call from the entrance panel.
Screen with horizontal lines:

adjust horizontal frequency
Vertical shift:
adjust vertical frequency
Monitor switched ON without image:

detach coaxial cable from camera and check it with a tester; it should measure 75 Ohms relative to load
resistor placed in last monitor. Check whether camera is powered (terminals +T, -; power 11-13V D.C.)
Black bars:
check voltage between terminals - and + (5 and 6) (should not be less than 15V D.C.)
Voltage between terminals +T, - of camera should not be less than 11V D.C.
Distorted or doubled image:

check if 75-Ohm load resistor is inserted in last monitor, or in case of coaxial cable systems, if terminal
V3 is short-circuited on terminal M.
Whistling sounds in the audio section:

if, when the monitor interphone is lifted, a whistling in sound can be heard (Larsen effect), turn down the
speech unit volume by adjusting the potentiometer In the power supply. If the problem persists, replace
speech unit with type 930A or type 930D. When using a video outdoor station replace the camera with
type 559A or 559B, which is equipped with a microphone with long cable to be installed far from the
loudspeaker.
44
®
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR

DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEMS WITH
SOUND SYSTEM CALL
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM (mm2)
a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, AS, S1

2 2 2
C1, C2, C3, P1, P2 0,5 mm 0,75 mm 1,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
b Other 0,25 mm 0,5 mm 1 mm
45
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 931
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Use power supply type 931, which features a dual electronic tone generator which replaces the traditional alternating current
call on a buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones (on terminals C1-C2), enabling users to immediately identify
which point is calling (C1 for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loud-
speaker built into the phone itself to produce the sound. 8-module container in class V - 0 copolymer suitable for DIN rail
assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall plugs. Use power supply type 931A with "entrance panel call" func-
tion for signalling on the speech unit that a call has been made; type 931/0CT can be fitted with a 12 V backup battery.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
When a caller presses a call push-button on the external entrance panel an acoustic signal is emitted, at which point, the user
can pick up the internal interphone and speak to the caller for as long as required. Conversation privacy is not available with this
system
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram ref. c5324, c5175R2)

Diagram
Ref. Type Name Quantity
A 6200 Interphone n
B 8875 - 8872 Interphone n
C Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 1
D 930 - 930A Speech unit 1
E - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
F - Additional push-button for lock 1
G 931 - 931A or 931/0CT Power supply 1
H - Landing call push-button 1
n - Number of users n
CONNECTIONS TO POWER SUPPLY TERMINALS
PRI: Supply 230V~ +6% -10%

50-60Hz 30VA protected by PTC
4[+1]+(n-2) B
5[+1]
1: Interphone receiver
3: Common line for interphone receiver and microphone
2
6: Receiver and microphone common wire for speech unit A 4[+1]+(n-1)
7: Speech unit microphone H
5[+1]
8: Speech unit loudspeaker
C1: Call generator output with modulated tone.

C2: Call generator output with continuous tone. 2
H 4[+1]+n
0-15: Output 15V~ 1A (on intermittent operation)
protected by PTC
G
ITALY
0-AS: Output 15V rectified 1A (on intermittent operation)

protected by PTC
Maximum power 30VA

Dissipated power 8,5W
7+n
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do not connect
loads of over 0.25A.
2
Lighting of entrance panel:
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs F
Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs; C+D
Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. Note: The value in
square bracket is to
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit (PTC) removes the be added in case of R
mains voltage until the fault is rectified. After eliminating the short-circuit, outdoor call.
it is necessary to wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the protecti-
ve device, so that the power supply may start normal operation again. 2
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do E

this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the
various system components, on pages 108 to 116. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1214
46
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY AND WITH
POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931
®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 931
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE
type 8875
type 8872
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8
A
F
INTERPHONE
type 6200 L1
3
7 4
AU 5 D
1 6
2 7
3 8
5
R
6E
A 6
B
C 6P C
6S F
A- Audio entrance panel series 3300, 8000,

PATAVIUM, 8100, 1200, letter box
B- Additional push-button for lock
C- Electric lock 12V~
1 2 3 C2 S CH D- Speech unit type 930 - 930A
F- Landing call push-button
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
10x24V 3W with type M832
16x24V 3W with type 832/030
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connected to the
lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5324
47
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY AND WITH
POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931 AND INTERPHONE SERIES 6600 ®
RELAY
Mains Mains TYPE 170/001
PRI PRI
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY

TYPE 6582 TYPE 931
- +U +I A B C D 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 O 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5
13
12
INTERPHONE 11
Type 6600/AU 10 F
9
Type 660A/AU 8
Type 6700/AU 7
6
5
4
3 A
2
1
L1
INTERPHONE 3
Type 8875 4
Type 8872
5 D
6
7
B 8
1
R
2
3
B
4/5 C
6
7
8
INTERPHONE A- Audio entrance panel series 3300, 8000,

Type 6200 F PATAVIUM, 8100, 1200, letter box
7 C- Electric lock 12V~
AU D- Speech unit type 930 - 930A
1
2
3 L1- Panel bulb
5 (3x24V 3W max.)
6E
A 6
C 6P 16x24V 3W with type 832/030
6S F
1 2 3 C2 S CH
N.B.
lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5175R2
48
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931, CONVERSATION
PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
call on a buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones enabling users to immediately identify which point is calling (C1
for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the
phone itself to produce the sound.
8-module container in class V - 0 copolymer suitable for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall
plugs. Use power supply type 931A with the "entrance panel call" function which signals on the speech unit that a call has been
made; type 931/0CT can be fitted with a 12 V backup battery.
This type of system enables simple communication between internal units and the external entrance panel. Only the user cal-
led is enabled to converse with the caller while the other internal units remain disabled. The lock release function is always
enabled, even in absence of call.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. C5253)

Diagram
A 6200 Interphone n
B 8875 - 8872 Interphone n
C Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 1
G 931 - 931A or 931/0CT Power supply 1
When using continuous duty 0-15 and

0-AS outputs, do not connect loads of
B 4[+1]+(n-3)
over 0.25A. 5
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3
W bulbs 2
4[+1]+(n-2)
Transformer type M832 powers a maxi- A+A1
mum of 10 24V 3W bulbs; H 5[+1]
Transformer type M832/030 powers a
maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs.
4[+1]+(n-1) 2
A+A1
In the event of a short-circuit, the pro-
tection circuit (PTC) removes the mains 5[+1]
H
voltage until the fault is rectified. After
eliminating the short-circuit, it is neces-
sary to wait for a few minutes to allow 2
cooling of the protective device, so that 4[+1]+n
the power supply may start normal ope- H
ration again.
G
ITALY
Note: The value in

be added in case of 7+n
outdoor call.
2
F C+D
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other ser-

vices. To do this, consult the variations on the standard 2
connection for the various system components, on pages
108 to 116. E BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1215
49
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931, CONVERSA-
TION PRIVACY AND LOCK RELEASE ALWAYS ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 931
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE
type 8878
1
2
3
6
6E
* 7
8
A
F
INTERPHONE
type 6200 + type 6155 L1
3
7 4
AU AU 5 D
1 1 6
2 2 7
3 E 3 8
5 6E
R
6E
A 6
B
C 6P C
6S F
*N.B.
On interphone type 8878 leave
the jumper on terminals " C-AS ".
Art.8878
1 2 3 C2 S CH
AC
C
AS
BL
BI
RO
A- Audio entrance panel series 3300, 8000, A+
A-
8100, 1200 or PATAVIUM
D- Speech unit type 930 - 930A
E- Card for conversation privacy type 6155
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connected
to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5323
50
TION PRIVACY INTERPHONE SERIE 6600 AND LOCK RELEASE ALWAYS ®
RELAY
Rete Rete TYPE 170/001
PRI PRI

TYPE 6582 TYPE 931
- +U +I A B C D 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 O 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5
13
12
INTERPHONE 11
Type 6600/AU 10
9
Type 660A/AU 8
Type 6700/AU 7
6
5
4
3 A
2
1
L1
F
INTERPHONE 3
Type 8878 * 4
5 D
6
1 7
2 8
3
R
6
6E
B
7 C
8
*N.B.
F
INTERPHONE On interphone type 8878 leave
Type 6200 + Type 6155 the jumper on terminals " C-AS ".
7
AU AU
1 1
Art.8878
2 2
3 E 3 C
AC
AS
5 6E BL
BI
6E RO
A+
C 6 A-
A 6P
6S F
1 2 3 C2 S CH
A- Audio entrance panel series 3300, 8000,
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire con-
nected to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5322
51
TION PRIVACY AND LOCK RELEASE AFTER THE CALL ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
call on a buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones enabling users to immediately identify which point is calling (C1
for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the inter-
phone itself to produce the sound.
8-module container in class V - 0 copolymer suitable for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall
plugs. Use power supply type 931A with the "entrance panel call" function which signals on the speech unit that a call has been
made; type 931/0CT can be fitted with a 12 V backup battery.
This type of system enables simple communication between internal units and the external entrance panel.
Only called user is enabled to communicate with speech unit and open the door, therefore all other internal units are exclu-
ded.

Diagram
A 6200 Interphone n
A1 6155 Card for conversation privacy n
B 8878 Interphone n
C 931 - 931A or 931/0CT Power supply 1
D Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 1
E 930 - 930A Speech unit 1
F - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
G - Additional push-button for lock 1
I 170/101 Relay 1
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0- B 4[+1]+(n-3)

AS outputs, do not connect loads of over 5[+1]
0.25A.
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 2
4[+1]+(n-2)
W bulbs A+A1
Transformer type M832 powers a maxi- H 5[+1]
mum of 10 24V 3W bulbs;
Transformer type M832/030 powers a
2
4[+1]+(n-1)
A+A1 H
In the event of a short-circuit, the protec-
tion circuit (PTC) removes the mains vol- 5[+1]
tage until the fault is rectified. After elimi-
nating the short-circuit, it is necessary to
2 4+n
wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of H
the protective device, so that the power
supply may start normal operation again.
I
ITALY
Note: The value in

C
square bracket is to 7+n
be added in case of
outdoor call.
2
G D+E
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other servi-

ces. To do this, consult the variations on the standard con- 2
nection for the various system components, on pages 108
to 116. F BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1216
52
Mains
PRI RELAY
POWER SUPPLY type 170/001
type 931
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5
INTERPHONE
type 8878
1
2
3
6
6E
7
8
A
INTERPHONE F
type 6200 + type 6155
+ type 6152 L1
3
7 4
AU AU 5 D
1 E 1 6
2 2 7
3 3 8
5 CN1 6E
R
6E
A 6
B
C 6P C
6S F
4
8 On interphone type 8878 leave the
jumper on terminals " C-AC ".
1 2 3 C2 S CH AC
C
AS
BL
BI
RO
A+
A-
A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8000, 8100,

1200, PATAVIUM, letter box
D- Speech unit type 930, 930A
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connected
to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c3318r3
53
RELAY
Mains Mains type 170/001
PRI PRI
TYPE 6582 TYPE 931
- +U +I A B C D 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5
13
12
INTERPHONE 11
Type 6600/AU 10
9
Type 660A/AU 8
Type 6700/AU 7
6
5
4
3 A
2
1
L1
F
INTERPHONE 3
Type 8878 4
5 D
6
1 7
2 8
3
R
6
6E
B
7 C
8
Art.8878
7
AU AU AC
C
1 E 1 AS
BL
2 2 BI
RO
3 3 A+
5 CN1 6E A-
6E
A 6
C 6P
6S F
4 On interphone type 8878 leave the
8 jumper on terminals " C-AC ".
INTERPHONE
Type 6200+Type 6155+Type 6152
N.B.
1 2 3 C2 S CH If a humming sound is detected on
the phonic line reconnect the wire
connected to the lock by terminal 15
A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8100, 8000, to terminal AS inside the power
1200, PATAVIUM, letter box supply.
D- Speech unit type 930, 930A
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
16x24V 3W with type 832/030 DIAGRAM N° c5332
54
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH AMPLIFIED SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930F AND
POWER SUPPLY TYPE 936 ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supply used is type 936 for audio door entry systems with speech unit, or intercommunicating devices without audio
door entry system. Equipped with a double electronic ringtone generator (Sound System) which replaces the conventional AC
call on buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones, allowing immediate identification of the point
from which the call is made. The sound is emitted by a single loudspeaker inside the interphone.
8-module power supply with housing in class V - 0 copolymer, suitable for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or
wall-mounted with expansion plugs.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a key is pressed on the entrance panel the interphone emits an acoustic signal; by lifting the interphone, it is possible to
converse with the visitor without any time limit. The system can only be set up without conversation privacy between user and
user. This system is an alternative to the system created with power supply type 931.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. C2117R4)

Diagram
ref. Type Name Quantity
A 6200 Interphone 1÷n
B 8875 - 8872 Interphone 1÷n
C series 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 1
D 930F Speech unit 1
F 936 Power supply 1
H - Landing call push-button 1÷n
n - Number of users 1÷n
CONNECTIONS TO TERMINALS OF POWER SUPPLY:
PRI: Supply 230V~ +6% -10%

50-60Hz 30VA protected by PTC 4[+1]+(n-2) B
+: Amplified door entrance panel supply
5[+1]
-: 9V c.c. 0,4A
+J: Sound circuit supply 4[+1]+(n-1) 2

-: Intercommunicating A
C1: Call generator output with modulated tone. 5 H
C2: Call generator output with continuous tone.
0-15: Output 15V~ 1A (on intermittent operation) 2

protected by PTC
0-AS: Output 15V rectified 1A (on intermittent operation)

H
Eliminates buzzing during conversations. Protected by
PTC SIEMENS C945 or PTC PHILIPS 2322 644 51721
F
ITALY
Maximum power: 30VA

Dissipated power: 8,5W 4[+1]+n
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do not connect Note: The value in
loads of over 0.25A. square bracket is to 5[+1]
Lighting of entrance panel: be added in case of
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs outdoor call.
Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs;
Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs.
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit (PTC) removes the

C+D
mains voltage until the fault is rectified. After eliminating the short-cir-
cuit, it is necessary to wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the pro- 2
G
tective device, so that the power supply may start normal operation R
again.
2
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To
do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the E
various system components, on pages 108 to 116. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1217
55
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH AMPLIFIED SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930F
AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 936 ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 936
INTERPHONE
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
type 8875
type 8872
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8
F
INTERPHONE
A
type 6200
7 L1
AU
1
6
2
5
3 D
4
5
3
6E
2
A 6
1
C 6P B R
6S F
CH C2 3 2 1 S

1200, PATAVIUM, letter box
D- Speech unit type 930F
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c2117R4
56
SYSTEMS WITH POWER SUPPLIES TYPE 931
AND SWITCHING MODULE FOR MORE THAN ONE SPEECH UNIT ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supplies used are: type 931, 936. These power supplies are equipped with double or triple electronic tone genera-
tor (Sound System), which replaces the conventional AC call on a buzzer or bell. The acoustic signal has two or three differen-
tiated tones (on terminals C1-C2-C3) allowing immediate identification of the point from which the call is made (C1 for the main
entrance, C2 for the outdoor call, C3 for intercommunicating call push-button); the sound is amplified by a single loudspeaker
built into the interphone.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a visitor presses a push-button on one of the entrance panels, the audio line and lock of the speech unit from which the
call was made are automatically enabled; the operation of the other entrance panels is thus disabled. The last call has priority
over the previous calls.
N.B. For configurations with more than three entrance panels, connect the switching modules in series as shown in the diagrams
on the pages that follow.
Do not connect more than 2 switching modules in series
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. C2328, C5338)

Diagram
ref. type Denomination Quantity
A 931, 936 Power supply 1
B 839/302-839/303 Switching module 1÷n
C Serie 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200 or PATAVIUM Series entrance panel 1
D 930 or 930A (with type 931)
930F (with type 936) Speech unit 1
E - Electric lock 12V AC 1

4+n
With the standard power supply, connect a maximum of 3
24V 3 W bulbs
With transformer type M832 connect a maximum of 10 24V
A
ITALY
3W bulbs;
With transformer type M832/030 connect a maximum of 16
24V 3W bulbs.
B
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices (PTC) ITALY
switch off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has been
eliminated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protection devi-
ce to cool down so that the unit can return to normal opera- 8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936)
tion. 7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931)
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other ser-

vices. To do this, consult the variations on the standard C+D C+D C+D
connection relating to the various components of the
system, on pages 108 to 116. R R R
2 2 2
E E E
BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1225
4+n
A
ITALY
B B
ITALY ITALY
8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936) 8+n(Art. 936)
7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931) 7+n(Art. 931)
C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D

R R R R R
2 2 2 2 2
E E E E E
57
WIRING DIAGRAM OF AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO OR THREE
SPEECH UNITS AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931
®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING MODULE
TYPE 931 TYPE 839/302
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
INTERPHONE
type 8875
type 8872
B A
1
2
3
4/5 L1
6
7 3
8 4
5 D
6
INTERPHONE E 7
8
type 6200 R
B
7 C
AU
1
2
3
5
6E A
A 6
C 6P
6S E
L1
3
4
5 D
6
7
1 2 3 C2 S CH 8
R
B
C
A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8100
8000, 1200, PATAVIUM, letter box
D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connected to the lock
by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c2328
58
Rete
PRI
COMMUTATORE COMMUTATORE
ALIMENTATORE TYPE 839/302, 839/303 TYPE 839/302, 839/303
TYPE 931
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9 P3 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
CITOFONO
Type 8875
Type 8872
B
1
2 A A
3
4/5
6
7 L1 L1
8
3 3
4 4
CITOFONO F 5 D 5 D
6 6
Type 6200 7 7
8 8
R R
7
AU
1
B B
C C
2
MODULE AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931
3
5
6E
A 6
C 6P A A
6S F
L1 L1
3 3
4 4
5 D 5 D
WIRING DIAGRAM OF AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SWITCHING
1 2 3 C2 S CH 6 6
7 7
8 8
R R
A- Entrance panel series 3300,

8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM, letter box B B
C C
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
10x24V 3W with type M832 N.B.
16x24V 3W with type 832/030 If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire con-
®
nected to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5338
59
WIRING DIAGRAM OF AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT CONVERSATION
PRIVACY WITH TWO OR THREE SPEECH UNITS AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 936
®
Mains
PRI

type 936 type 839/302
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
INTERPHONE
type 8875
type 8872
B
1
2
3
4/5 A
6
7
8
L1
INTERPHONE E 6
5
type 6200 4 D
3
2
7 1
AU
R
1
2
B
3 C
5
6E
A 6
C 6P
6S E
A
L1
1 2 3 S C2 CH 6
5
4 D
3
2
1
R
B
C
A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8100
8000, 1200, PATAVIUM, letter box
D- Speech unit type Type 930F
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N.B.
by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c2313
60
Mains
PRI
SWITCHING MODULE SWITCHING MODULE
POWER SUPPLY TYPE 839/302
TYPE 839/303
TYPE 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9 P3 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
INTERPHONE
Type 8875
Type 8872
B
1
2
3
4/5 A A
6
7
8
L1 L1
INTERPHONE F 6 6
5 5
Type 6200 4 D 4 D
3 3
2 2
7 1 1
R R
AU
1
2
3
B B
C C
5
6E
A 6
C 6P
6S F
A A
PRIVACY WITH TWO SWITCHING MODULE AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 936
WIRING DIAGRAM OF AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT CONVERSATION
L1 L1
1 2 3 S C2 CH 6 6
5 5
4 D 4 D
A- Entrance panel 3 3
series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, 2 2
1 1
R R
PATAVIUM, letter box

B- Additional push-button for lock B B
C- Electric lock 12V~ C C
D- Speech unit type 930F
L1- Panel bulb N.B.
(3x24V 3W max.) If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire con-
®
10x24V 3W with type M832 nected to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° c5342
61
“1+N WIRE” AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 6837 ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
call on a buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones, enabling users to immediately identify which point is calling
(C1 for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the
interphone itself to produce the sound. This power supply is ideal for installation in restructured systems and for the conversion
of existing doorbell systems to door entry systems.
wall-mounted with expansion plugs. Power supply type 837/0CT may be used instead with the same characteristics plus option
of connecting a 12V back-up battery.
When a caller presses a call push-button on the external entrance panel an acoustic signal is emitted, then the user can pick up
the interphone and speak to the caller for as long as required. This installation does not allow conversation privacy.

Diagram ref. Type Name Quantity
A 6201 Interphone n
B 8877 Interphone n
C series 3300, 8100, 1200
8000, PATAVIUM and letter box Entrance panel 1
E 27/005 - 2/994 Diode strip n
H 6837 - 837/0CT Power supply 1
I - Landing call push-button 1
CONNECTIONS TO TERMINALS OF POWER SUPPLY:

PRI: Supply 230V~ +6% -10% B
50-60Hz 30VA protected by PTC 1[+1]+(n-2)
2[+1]
3: Interphone common
P2: Call generator output with continuous tone. (landing call com-
mon). 2
2: Audio polarization A 1[+1]+(n-1)
5-8: Speech unit loudspeaker 2 I
6-7: Speech unit microinterphone
P1: Call generator output with modulated tone. (entrance panel
call common)
S1: Lock supply
2
0-15: Output 15V~ 1A (on intermittent operation) protected by PTC 1[+1]+n
I
Maximum power: 30VA
Dissipated power: 8,5W
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do not connect H
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs 9+n
Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. 2
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit (PTC) removes the G
mains voltage until the fault is rectified. After eliminating the short-cir-
cuit, it is necessary to wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the
C+D+E
protective device, so that the power supply may start normal opera-
tion again.
Note: The value in
R

be added in case of
do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the
outdoor call. 2
various system components, on pages 108 to 116.
E
62
TYPE 6837 ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
type 6837
3 P2 2 5 6 7 8 P1 S1 15 0
INTERPHONE
type 8877
1
3
4/5
6
F
INTERPHONE
type 6201
A
CN4
1
E
SR
2 L1
3
SD
4
C 3
5
A 4
6
F 5 D
6
7
8
R
B
3 P2 CH C
A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8000,

8100, 1200, PATAVIUM and letter box
E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994 - R027
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
ADJUSTMENTS
P1- Adjustment of lock activation point (preset
during manufacturing)
P2- Volume adjustment of speech unit
P3- Adjustment of lock operation time
DIAGRAM N° c1975R3
63
"1+n-WIRE" AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE
6837 AND TWO SPEECH UNITS WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(P1 for the main entrance, P2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the
interphone itself to produce the sound.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a caller presses a call push-button on an entrance panel, the audio and the door lock release functions of the calling panel
are enabled. The operation of the other entrance panel is excluded and the last call has the priority over all preceding calls. It is
possible to lift the handset and to speak without any time limits. This installation is without conversation privacy; all the system
characteristics in relation to the basic diagram remain unchanged.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram ref. C2813)

Diagram
A 8877 Interphone n
B 6201 Interphone n
C series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 2
E 27/005, 2/994, R027 Diode strip n
F 6837 o 837/0CT Power supply 1
H 839/837 Switching module 1
I - Electric lock 12V A.C. 2
- - Landing call push-button 2
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do

1[+1]+(n-2) A not connect loads of over 0.25A.
2 Lighting of entrance panel:
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V
2 3W bulbs;
B 1[+1]+(n-1) Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16
24V 3W bulbs.
2
L
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit
2 (PTC) removes the mains voltage until the fault is recti-
fied. After eliminating the short-circuit, it is necessary to
L 1[+1]+n
wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the protective
device, so that the power supply may start normal ope-
ration again.
F
ITALY
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other

services. To do this, consult the variations on the
standard connection for the various system compo-
nents, on pages 108 to 116.
H ITALY
Note: The value in

9+n 9+n square bracket is to
be added in case of
2 2 outdoor call.
G G
C+D+E C+D+E
R R
2 2
I I BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1220
64
6837 AND TWO OUTDOOR UNITS WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
Mains
PRI
type 6837 type 839/837
3 P2 2 5 6 7 8 P1 S1 15 0 2 5 6 8 - P1 S1 15 0 2 5 6 8 - P2 S1 15 0
INTERPHONE
type 8877
1
3
4/5
6 A
F
E
L1
INTERPHONE 3
4
type 6201 5 D
6
7
CN4
8
1
R
2
SR
3
SD B
C
4 C
5
A
6
F
E
3 P2 CH L1
3
4
5 D
6
7
8 R
B
C
1200, PATAVIUM and letter box
D- Speech unit type 930 o 930A
E- Diode strip type 27/005, 2/994, R027
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
DIAGRAM N° c2813R4
65
TYPE 6837 WITH CONVERSATION PRIVACY
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(P1 for the main entrance, P2 for the outdoor call.). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the
interphone itself to produce the sound. This power supply is ideal for installation in restructured systems and for the conversion
of existing doorbell systems to door entry systems. 8-module power supply with housing in class V - 0 copolymer, suitable for
DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or wall-mounted with expansion plugs. Power supply type 837/0CT may be
used instead with the same characteristics plus option of connecting a 12V back-up battery.
When a caller presses a call push-button on the external entrance panel an acoustic signal is emitted, then the user can pick up
the interphone and speak to the caller for as long as required. The installation is equipped with conversation privacy: only the
called user is enabled to the conversation with the speech unit, while the other internal users remain excluded.

Diagram
A 6201 + 7155 Interphone n
B 8873 Interphone n
C series 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200, PATAVIUM and letter box Entrance panel 1
H 6837 - 837/0CT Power supply 1
B
1[+1]+(n-2)
2[+1]
2
A 1[+1]+(n-1)
2 I
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do not connect
type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs 2
1[+1]+n
Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. I
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit (PTC) removes the
mains voltage until the fault is rectified. After eliminating the short-circuit,
it is necessary to wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the protecti- H
ve device, so that the power supply may start normal operation again.
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do 9+n

2
Note: The value in

G
square bracket is to C+D+E
be added in case of
outdoor call.
2
E
66
TYPE 6837 WITH CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
On interphone type 6201 remove jumper "A" of

connector "CN3" and fit card type 7155.
With card type 7155:
- Direct opening of lock: position the connector
in position "SD". Mains
- Opening of lock after call: move the connector
PRI
from "SD" to "SR" in the interphone POWER SUPPLY
Interphone type 8873 always opens the lock. type 6837
3 P2 2 5 6 7 8 P1 S1 15 0
INTERPHONE
type 8873
1
3
4/5
6
F
INTERPHONE
type 6201 + type 7155
A
CN4
1
E
SR
2 L1
3
SD
4
C 3
5
A 4
6
F 5 D
6
7
8
R
3 P2 CH B
C
A- Entrance panel
series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200,
PATAVIUM and letter box
E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.) ADJUSTMENTS
P1- Adjustment of lock activation point (preset
during manufacturing)
P2- Volume adjustment of speech unit
P3- Adjustment of lock operation time DIAGRAM N° c4458R1
67
6837 AND TWO OUTDOOR UNITS AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(C1 for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call). This solution also makes it possible to use a single loudspeaker built into the
interphone itself to produce the sound.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a caller presses a call push-button on an entrance panel, the audio and the door lock release functions of the calling panel
are enabled. The operation of the other entrance panel is excluded and the last call has the priority over all preceding calls. It is
possible to lift the handset and to speak without any time limits. This installation is without conversation privacy; all the system
characteristics in relation to the basic diagram remain unchanged.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram ref. C4513R4)

Diagram
A 8873 Interphone n
B 6201 + 7155 Interphone n
C series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
PATAVIUM or letter box Entrance panel 2
F 6837 or 837/0CT Power supply 1
H 839/837 Switching module 1
L . Landing call push-button 2
When using continuous duty 0-15 and 0-AS outputs, do

not connect loads of over 0.25A.
1[+1]+(n-2) A Lighting of entrance panel:
2 type 931 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V
3W bulbs;
2
1[+1]+(n-1) Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16
B 24V 3W bulbs.
2
L
In the event of a short-circuit, the protection circuit
2 (PTC) removes the mains voltage until the fault is recti-
fied. After eliminating the short-circuit, it is necessary to
L 1[+1]+n wait for a few minutes to allow cooling of the protective
device, so that the power supply may start normal ope-
ration again.
F
ITALY

H ITALY
Note: The value in

9+n 9+n square bracket is to
be added in case of
2 2 outdoor call.
G G
C+D+E C+D+E
R R
2 2
I I
68
6837 AND TWO SPEECH UNITS AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
Mains
PRI
TYPE 6837 TYPE 839/837
3 P2 2 5 6 7 8 P1 S1 15 0 2 5 6 8 - P1 S1 15 0 2 5 6 8 - P2 S1 15 0
INTERPHONE
type 8873
1
3
4/5
6 A
F
E
L1
3
4
INTERPHONE 5 D
6
type 6201 +7155 7
8 R
CN4
1
B
SR
2 C
3
SD
4
C
5
A
6
F
E
3 P2 CH L1
3
4
5 D
6
7
8 R
B
C

1200, PATAVIUM and letter box On interphone type 6201 remove jumper "A"
B- Additional push-button for lock of connector "CN3" and fit card type 7155.
C- Electric lock 12V~ With card type 7155:
D- Speech unit type 930 o 930A - Direct opening of lock: position the con-
E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994 nector in position "SD".
F- Landing call push-button - Opening of lock after call: move the con-
L1- Panel bulb nector from "SD" to "SR" in the interphone
(3x24V 3W max.) Interphone type 8873 always opens the lock.
DIAGRAM N° c4513R4
69
“1+n-WIRE” AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
WITH SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D, WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This type of system uses the speech unit type 930D, and is capable of generating a modulated electronic tone for the call from
the speech unit: the interphones are equipped with a loudspeaker for amplifying the sound.
The power supply for the whole system is provided by means of a simple transformer.
The system is ideal for redevelopment or conversion of systems from a simple bell to an interphone because the connection of
the cable riser is made with a single common wire, plus a return wire for each device. 4-module container in copolymer suitable
for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall plugs.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a push-button is pressed on the entrance panel, the interphone emits an acoustic signal: the user indoors can lift the inter-
phone and converse without any time limit. This type of system does not allow conversation privacy. The activation time of the
lock can be adjusted from 1 to 4 seconds by means of the trimmer (P1).

Diagram
A M832 Transformer 1
B 930D Speech unit 1
D 27/005, 2/994, R027 Diode strip n
E 6201 Interphone n
F 8877 Interphone n
G - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
H - Additional push-button for lock 1
1+(n-2)
F
2
ITALY
A
1+(n-1)
E
2
2
1+n
B+C+D
2
R
H
2
N.B. Lighting of entrance panel:
With transformer type M832 connect a maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs; In
the event of a short circuit, the protection device (PTC)
G
switches off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has been eliminated,
wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that
the unit can return to normal operation. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1219
70
WITH SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D, WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
Mains
INTERPHONE
type 8877 PRI
TRANSFORMER
TYPE M832
0 12
1
3
4/5
6
INTERPHONE
type 6201 E
CN4
1 A
2
SR
3
SD
4
C
5
A
6 L1
1
* 2
3
4 D R
5
6
B
C
CH 3
type 930D
P3
P2
P1
A- Entrance panel
series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM
or letter box
SETTINGS C- Electric lock 12V~
P1- Lock timing setting D- Speech unit type 930/037
(accessible from rear) E- Diode strip type 27/005, 2/994, R027
P2- External volume L1- Panel bulb
P3- Internal volume 10x24V 3W with type M832
*All conections related to terminal "3" must be carried out directly

on terminal "3".
DIAGRAM N° c2946
71
WITH SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This type of unit makes use of the new speech unit (type 930D) which can generate a modulated electronic signal for a call
from the outdoor unit; in this case, the interphones used are supplied with a loudspeaker for the transmission of the sound.
The overall connections are made using a simple transformer which supplies the whole system.
This type of system is particularly suitable for conversions of systems with a simple door bell to interphone since connection of
the cable riser is made with a single common wire plus a return wire for each device. 4-module container in copolymer suitable
for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall plugs.
When a visitor presses a push-button on the entrance panel, a sound signal is emitted on the interphone; the user within the buil-
ding can lift the interphone and speak to the visitor without any time limit. This type of system allow conversation privacy. The
period the lock is to be activated can be set at anything between 1 and 4 seconds using the special trimmer (P1).

Diagram
A M832 Transformer 1
B 930D Speech unit 1
D 27/005, 2/994, R027 Diode strip n
E 6201 Interphone n
F 8873 Interphone n
H - Additional push-button for lock 1
1+(n-2)
F
2
ITALY
A
1+(n-1)
E
2
2
1+n
B+C+D
2
R
N.B. Lighting of entrance panel: H

With transformer type M832 connect a maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs; In 2
the event of a short circuit, the protection device (PTC)
switches off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has been eliminated,
wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that
G
the unit can return to normal operation. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1219
72
WITH SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
On interphone type 6201 remove jumper "A" of

connector "CN3" and fit card type 7155.
With card type 7155:
- Direct opening of lock: position the connector
in position "SD".
- Opening of lock after call: move the connector
from "SD" to "SR" in the interphone
Interphone type 8873 always opens the lock.
Mains
PRI
INTERPHONE TRANSFORMER
type 8873 TYPE M832
0 12
1
3
4/5
6
INTERPHONE
type 6201 + type 7155 E
F
CN4
1
2 A
SR
3
SD
4
C
A
5 L1
6
1
2
3
4 D
5
6 R
B
C
CH 3
type 930D
A- Entrance panel
P3 series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATA-
VIUM or letter box
P2 D- Speech unit type 930/037
P1 E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994
F- Card for conversation privacy type 7155
L1- Panel bulb
SETTINGS
P1- Lock timing setting
(accessible from rear)
P2- External volume
P3- Internal volume
DIAGRAM N° c4459
73
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PETRARCA SERIES
INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES AND POER SUPPLY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supply used is type 938A, for intercommunicating systems with single or multiple residence speech unit. It is equip-
ped with a triple electronic ringtone generator (Sound System) which replaces the conventional AC call on a buzzer or bell. The
sound signal has 3 different tones, allowing immediate identification of the point from which the call is made (C1 call from speech
unit, C2 landing call, C3 intercommunicating calls). The sound is emitted by a single loudspeaker inside the interphone. 8-modu-
le container in class V - 0 copolymer suitable for DIN rail assembly on electric panels (omega rails) or fixing with wall plugs.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When the external ringtone sounds, lift the interphone and communicate directly with the speech unit. About 9 minutes after the
start of the conversation, an electronic device restores the interphones to the internal position and it is therefore necessary to
make a second call to converse again with the speech unit. To hold an internal conversation, first lift the interphone and then
press the push-button for the interphone with which you want to communicate; the speech unit thus remains disconnected. If,
during the course of an external conversation, you want to make a call to an internal user, simply press the push-button for the
internal unit; the speech unit is thus disabled. If an external ringtone is received during a conversation between internal inter-
phones, to communicate with the external unit it is necessary to replace both interphones and then pick up your interphone.
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. C3028)

Diagram
A 6200 + 6152 Interphone 2÷8
B 938A Power supply 1
C 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200, PATAVIUM
or letter box series Entrance panel 1
D 930 or 930A Speech unit 1
G - Landing call push-button 1
m - Number of intercommunicating interphones 2÷8
n - Number of calls from entrance panel 1÷8
CONNECTIONS TO THE TERMINALS OF THE POWER SUPPLY:

PRI: power supply 230V~ +6% -10%
50-60Hz 30VA protected by PTC A 6[+1]+m+(n-3)
1: Interphone receiver 6[+1]+m
3-: Common interphone receiver and microphone 2
6: Common speech unit microphone/loudspeaker 6[+1]+m+(n-2) A
7: Microphone for speech unit G 6[+1]+m
8: Speech unit loudspeaker
AA: Self-start of speech unit
C1: Call tone generator output with modulated tone. 2
A 6[+1]+m+(n-1)
C2: Call tone generator with continuous tone.
6[+1]+m
G
C3: Call tone generator output with intermittent tone.
CT: Call signal on speech unit
0-15: 15V~ 1A output (with intermittent service) 2
protected by PTC 5[+1]+n
0-AS: Output 15V rectified 1A (with intermittent service) protected by PTC G
Maximum power 30VA B
Dissipated power 8.5W
Outputs 0-15 or 0-AS do not support loads with continuous absorption of more
than 0.25 A. 9+n
With power supply type 931, connect a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
2
With transformer type M832 connect a maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs;
With transformer type M832/030 connect a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. F
C+D
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices (PTC) Note: The value
switch off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has been eliminated, wait- in square bracket
for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that the unit
R
is to be added in
can return to normal operation. case of outdoor 2
call. E
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do this,
consult the variations on the basic connection relating to the various
components of the system, on pages 108 to 116. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1221
74
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PETRARCA SERIES
INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES ®
Mains
PRI A- Entrance panel series 8000,
POWER SUPPLY 8100, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM
TYPE 938A and letter box
C3 1 2 3- AA CT 6 7 8 C2 0 15 AS 3- C1 C- Electric lock 12V~
D- Speech unit type 930 o 930A
E- Landing call push-button
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
INTERPHONE SETTING
TYPE 6200 + 6152
L1
3
4
7 7
5 D
6
AU
7
1 1
8
2 2 R
3 3
5
6E 6E B
A 6 6 C
C 6P 6P
6S
4 4C
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8
AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
10 10
E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
4 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
11 11 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
4
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
12 12
6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
4 8 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
13 13 9 9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
4
11 11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
14 14
12 12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
4 13 13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
15 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
Before connecting the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 INTERPHONE

Fig. 1 system, fit the buttons type 6200 +
INTERPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS
type 6152 in their seat in type 6152
the interphone. Connect
the jumpers as shown in
the diagram. Then distri- N.B.
bute the keys in the inter- If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the
phone housing, removing wire connected to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the
the plastic that holds them power supply.
as shown in figure 1.
CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS
The wiring diagram indicates the connections required for the maximum number of interphones. If you do not wish to connect all
the interphones, follow the instructions indicated below. To connect three interphones, use units Art 6200 supplied with 4 buttons,
two of which control the supplementary functions. The first push-button (terminal 7) controls the door lock release function.
The second push-button (terminal 8) controls the auxiliary services. The two supplementary buttons are connected to terminals
9-10 and control intercommunicating calls. It is therefore necessary to connect terminals 1 to 10 on the first three terminal boards.
75
76
A- Entrance panel
Fig. 1 Before connecting the
system, fit the buttons
series 3300, 1200, 8100, 8000
type 6152 in their seat in or PATAVIUM
the interphone. Connect B- Electric lock 12V~
SWITCHING MODULE
the jumpers as shown in C- Additional push-button for lock
TYPE 839/302
the diagram. Then distri- D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A
bute the keys in the inter- E- Landing call push-button
phone housing, removing L1- Panel bulb
the plastic that holds
Mains (3x24V 3W max.)
them as shown in figure
1. 10x24V 3W with type M832
PRI 16x24V 3W with type 832/030
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 938A
C3 1 2 3- AA CT 6 7 8 C2 0 15 AS 3- C1 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
L1
7 7 3
AU 4
1 1 5 D
2 2 INTERPHONE 6
3 3 7
5 TYPE 6200+6152 8
R
6E 6E
A 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
C 6P 6 AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU
6S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B
C
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4C
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8 8
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4 F 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
9 9 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S A
4
10 10
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
SATION PRIVACY WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 938A
4 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES WITHOUT CONVER-
11 11 8 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 L1
9 9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
4
10 10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11 3
12 12
11 11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12 4
4 12 12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13 5 D
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14 6
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15 7
4
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6 8
R
14 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
15 15
INTERPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS B
C
N.B.
If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connec-
®
DIAGRAM N° c3757R4
ted to the lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply.
N.B.
Before connecting the system, fit
the buttons type 6152 in their seat If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line
in the interphone. Connect the reconnect the wire connected to the lock by terminal 15
jumpers as shown in the diagram. to terminal AS inside the power supply.
Then distribute the keys in the
interphone housing, removing the SWITCHING MODULE
plastic that holds them as shown TYPE 839/302
in figure 1.
Fig. 1
Mains
PRI
TYPE 938A TYPE 839/302 - 839/303
C3 1 2 3- AA CT 6 7 8 C2 0 15 AS 3- C1 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9 P3 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
A- Entrance panel
series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200,
PATAVIUM, letter box
B- Electric lock 12V~
C- Additional push-button for lock
E- Landing call push-button INTERPHONE
L1- Panel bulb TYPE 6200+6152
(3x24V 3W max.)
L1 L1
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 D 5 D
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 6
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7
F 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 8 8
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C C C
6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
B B
TION PRIVACY WITH TWO SWITCHING MODULE AND POWER SUPPLY TYPE 938A
8 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES WITHOUT CONVERSA-
9 9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
11 11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
13 13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
L1 L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 3
INTERPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS 4 4
5 D 5 D
6 6
7 7
8 8
N° c5362
C C
®
DIAGRAM
B B
77
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH INDEPENDENT INTERCOMMUNICATING
NETWORKS WITH PETRARCA SERIES INTERPHONES ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supply used is type 931; it is equipped with a double electronic tone generator (Sound System) which replaces the
conventional AC call on a buzzer or bell. The acoustic signal has two different tones for immediate identification of the point from
which the call is made (C1 for the main entrance, C2 for the outdoor call.); the sound is emitted by a single loudspeaker built into
the interphone. In each apartment it is possible to add a switching module type 935A, which serves to maintain conversation pri-
vacy towards users in other apartments with networks of intercommunicating or non-intercommunicating interphones.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When the external ringtone sounds, lift the interphone and communicate directly with the speech unit. After about 60'' from the
start of the conversation, an electronic device restores the interphones to the internal position and it is therefore necessary to
make a second call to converse again. To hold an internal conversation, first lift the interphone and then press the push-button
for the interphone with which you want to communicate; the speech unit thus remains disconnected. If, during the course of an
external conversation, you want to make a call to an internal user, simply press the push-button for the internal unit. The diagram
shows the connection of several intercommunicating networks in the same system: each user can thus intercommunicate freely
with the devices in their own apartment, while maintaining absolute conversation privacy both towards the speech unit and the
users in the other households. Several intercommunicating conversations can take place simultaneously in different apartments
or, while intercommunicating conversations are in progress, other users in the same building can communicate without interfe-
rence with the speech unit.
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (diagram ref. CI3244)

Diagram
A 8875, 6200, 8872 Non-intercommunicating interphone 1÷n
A1 6200 + 6152 intercommunicating interphone 2÷8
B 931 power supply 1
C 935A Switching module 1
D 832/030 Transformer 1
E 3300, 8100, 1200,
8000 and PATAVIUM, letter box Entrance panel 1
F 930 - 930A Speech unit 1
I - Electric lock 12V AC 1
H- - Landing call push-button 1
m - Number of calls from entrance panel n
n - Number of intercommunicating interphones 2÷8
Outputs 0-15 or 0-AS do not support loads with 5[+1]+(m-4)

continuous absorption of more than 0.25 A. A
Lighting of entrance panel: 5[+1]
With power supply type 931 connect a maxi-
mum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs 2
D
With transformer type M832 connect a maxi- H A1 A1 A1
mum of 10 24V 3W bulbs; 2
5[+1]+(m-3) 6[+1] 6[+1] 6[+1]+n 6+n 6+n
With transformer type M832/030 connect a C
5[+1]+(m-2) 2
A
In the event of a short circuit, the protection 5[+1] H
devices (PTC) switch off the mains voltage. D
Once the short circuit has been eliminated, 2
5[+1]+(m-1) 2
A1 A1 A1
wait for a few minutes to allow the protection H 6[+1] 6[+1]+n
6[+1] 6+n 6+n
device to cool down so that the unit can return C
to normal operation.
2
5[+1]+n
N. B. The system can be completed by H
adding other services. To do this, consult
B
ITALY
the variations on the standard connection

relating to the various components of the 7+m
system, on pages 108 to 116.
2
G
E+F
Note:
The value in squa-
re bracket is to be R
added in case of 2
outdoor call.
I BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1224
78
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH INDEPENDENT INTERCOMMUNICATING
NETWORKS WITH PETRARCA SERIES INTERPHONES ®
Mains A- Entrance panel series 3300,

PRI
1200, 8000, 8100, PATAVIUM
POWER SUPPLY and letter box
TYPE 931 B- Additional push-button for lock
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max.)
type 6200 10x24V 3W with type M832
7 16x24V 3W with type 832/030
AU
1
2
3
5
6E
C 6
A 6P A
6S F
L1
INTERPHONE
3
type 8875 4
type 8872 5 D
SWITCHING 6
7
B
MODULE 8
1 TYPE 935A
2 R
3
4/5
B C
6
7
8 Mains Mains
PRI PRI
F
TRANSFORMER
TYPE 832/030
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 7 8 15 0 0 15
INTERPHONES
type 6200 + 6152
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
INTERPHONE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
SETTING 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
TYPE 6200 + 6152 F 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 6 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 6 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 6 12 12 12
SWITCHING 13 13 13 13 13 13 6 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 14
MODULE 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
7 7 TYPE 935A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AU
1 1
2 2
3 3
5
6E 6E Mains Mains
C 6 6
A 6P 6P PRI PRI
6S 6S
TRANSFORMER
4 4C
8 8 TYPE 832/030
4 CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 7 8 15 0 0 15
9 9
INTERPHONES
4
10 10 type 6200 + 6152
4
11 11 7 7 7 7
4 AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1
CONDUCTOR
12 12
2 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 3
13 13 5 5 5 5
COLOUR
4 6E 6E 6E 6E
14 14 6P 6P 6P 6P
F 6S 6S 6S 6S
4 4C 4C 4C 4C
15 15 6 8 9 10
8 6 8 8
9 9 6 9
10 10 10 6
1 2 3 C2 C1 S CH
Before connecting the WIRING INSTRUCTIONS

system, fit the buttons Fig. 1 Wiring diagram shows the maximum number of interphones connec-
type 6152 in their seat in
the interphone. Connect tions.
the jumpers To connect fewer interphones, proceed as it follows: with 4 interphones
as shown in the diagram. use type 6200 with 4 push-buttons: push-button 1 (corresponding to ter-
Then distribute the keys minal 7) operates door lock; the other three push-buttons (8-9-10) are
in the interphone hou- used for intercommunicating calls. Connect then the first three terminal
sing, removing the plastic blocks (terminal 1 to 10).
that holds them as shown
in figure 1.
N.B. If a humming sound is detected on the phonic line reconnect the wire connected to the DIAGRAM N° ci3244
lock by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply.
79
INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT
CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supply used is type 936. It is possible to execute systems with a network of interphones intercommunicating with
each other. In this type of system one of the two electronic tones at the disposal of the power supply is used for intercommu-
nicating calls: terminal C1 or C2.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
To call another interphone, lift the interphone and then press the push-button for the interphone with which you want to commu-
nicate.
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. ci3029)

Diagram
A 6200+6152 Interphone 2÷8
B 936 Power supply 1
C - Landing call 1
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices (PTC) switch off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has been elimi-
nated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that the unit can return to normal
operation.
N.B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do this, consult the variations on the standard wiring
diagram relating to the various components of the system, on pages 108 to 116.
A A A A
3[+1] 3[+1]+n 3+n 3+n
B
ITALY
Note: The value in

be added in case of
outdoor call.
80
SYSTEM WITH PETRARCA INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES
WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
A- Landing call
TYPE 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE
type 6200 + n. 6152
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
A 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
11 11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
13 13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INTERPHONE SETTING
Fig. 1 Before connecting the type 6200 + 6152
type 6152 in their seat in 7
AU
the interphone. Connect
1
the jumpers 2 2
as shown in the diagram. 3
Then distribute the keys 5 5
in the interphone hou- 6E
sing, removing the pla- C 6 6
A 6P
stic that holds them as
6S
shown in figure 1.
4 4C
8 8
4
CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS 9 9
The diagram illustrates the connection of 8 interphones, which is the maxi- 4
mum number allowed in a system of this type . 10 10
To connect a smaller number of interphones, proceed as described below: 4
With four interphones, uses devices with three buttons (6200 plus 3 additio- 11 11
nal buttons). Terminals 1, 5, 2 and 4C are for the common connections
4
from the power supply. Terminal 6 is the ringtone (loudspeaker) and termi- 12 12
nals 8, 9, and 10 are the 3 call buttons.
4
Connect the terminals from 1 to 10 as shown in the diagram.
13 13
Type 6200 is supplied as standard with a door lock control button.
In this system, this push-button is not used. 4
14 14
4
15 15
DIAGRAM N° ci3029
81
SYSTEM WITH PETRARCA INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES WITHOUT CONVER-
SATION PRIVACY, ONE MASTER INTERPHONE AND SUBMASTER INTERPHONES ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
A- Landing call
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 INTERPHONE
AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU type 6200 + 6152
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
A
CONDUCTOR COLOUR
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
INTERPHONE SETTING
type 6200 + n. 6152
Before connecting the 7

Fig. 1
AU
1
type 6152 in their seat 2 2
in the interphone. 3
Connect the jumpers as 5 5
shown in the diagram. 6E 6E
C 6 6
Then distribute the keys
A 6P
in the interphone hou- 6S
sing, removing the pla-
stic that holds them as
4 4C
shown in figure 1. 8 8
4
9 9
4
CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS 10 10
The diagram illustrates the connection of a master interphone with 8 submaster inter-
4
phones. To connect a smaller number of interphones, proceed as described below: 11 11
With three submaster interphones, use the master device with three buttons (6200 plus
4
3 additional buttons) and the secondary devices with one push-button (6200 plus one
12 12
additional button). Terminals 1, 5, 2 and 4C are for the common connections from the
power supply. Terminal 6 is for the ringtone (loudspeaker) and terminals 8, 9, 10 4
13 13
are for the three call buttons.
Connect the terminals as shown in the diagram, from 1 to 10. 4
14 14
type 6200 is supplied as standard with a door lock control button.
In this system, this push-button is not used. 4
15 15
DIAGRAM N° ci3755
82
PAIR OF INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES
®
The devices must be connected as shown in the diagram.
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE INTERPHONE
type 6200 7 7 type 6200
AU AU
1 1
2 2
3 3
5 5
6E 6E
C 6 6 C
A 6P 6P A
6S 6S
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 936
INTERPHONE INTERPHONE
type 8875 - + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
type 8875
1 1
2 2
3 3
4/5 4/5
6 6
7 7
8 8
On the two interphones type 8875, pull out (or cut) the red wire connecting the interphone to the interphone circuit.
DIAGRAM N° ci3131-1
83
VARIATION ON CONNECTION OF RELAY TYPE 170/101 WITH PAR OF
INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES TYPE 6200 AND TYPE 8875 ®
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
Art. 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
PHONE PHONE
Art. 6200 Art. 6200
7 7
AU AU
1 1
RELAY 2 2
RELAY
3 3
Art. 170/101 5 5 Art. 170/101
6E 6E
C 6 6 C
A 6P 6P A
6S 6S
+ +
- 4 4 -
8 8
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5 C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
MAX LOAD.
MAX LOAD. 3A 230V
3A 230V
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
Art. 936
PHONE - + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS PHONE
RELAY Art. 8875 Art. 8875 RELÈ
Art. 170/101 Art. 170/101
1 1
2 2
3 3
4/5 4/5
+ 6 6 +
- 7 7 -
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5 8 8 C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
MAX LOAD.
3A 230V
MAX LOAD.
3A 230V
DIAGRAM N° si531
84
VARIATION ON CONNECTION OF RELAY TYPE 170/101 FOR ADDITIONAL CHIME
WITH PAR OF INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES TYPE 6200 AND TYPE 8875 ®
Netz
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
Art. 936
- + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS
PHONE PHONE
Art. 6200 Art. 6200
7 7
AU AU
1 1
RELAY 2 2
RELAY
3 3
Art. 170/101 5 5 Art. 170/101
6E 6E
C 6 6 C
A 6P 6P A
6S 6S
+ +
- 4 4 -
8 8
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5 C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
BELL BELL
BELL BELL
SUPPLY SUPPLY
Netz
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
Art. 936
PHONE - + C1 - +J C2 0 15 AS PHONE
RELAY Art. 8875 RELAY
Art. 8875
Art. 170/101 Art. 170/101
1 1
2 2
3 3
4/5 4/5
+ 6 6 +
- 7 7 -
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5 8 8 C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
BELL BELL
BELL BELL
SUPPLY SUPPLY
DIAGRAM N° si532
85
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931
AND INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONES TYPE 6221
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Use power supply type 931, equipped with a double electronic tone generator (Sound System) which replaces the conventio-
nal AC call on a buzzer or bell. The acoustic signal has two different tones (present on terminals C1- C2) for immediate identifi-
cation of the source from which the call is made (C1 for the main entrance with external entrance panel and C2 for the outdoor
call push-button); the sound is emitted by a single loudspeaker fit inside the interphone. On the installation a switching module
type 6935/A is forseen for the conversation privacy from the internall units to the outdoor station
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When the entrance panel calls, the handset must be raised to communicate directly with the speech unit. After the conversation
time dwell (programmable up to 99 seconds) an electronic device set the interphones on internal mode again and it is therefo-
re necessary to make a second call to continue the conversation. To make an internal conversation, first lift the handset, dial the
number to call of interphone and then press the respective push-button ; the speech unit remains disconnected.
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. vc4880)

Diagram ref. type Denomination Quantity
A 6221 Intercommunicating interphone 1÷n
B 6582 * Power supply 1
C Serie 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
PATAVIUM, letter box Entrance panel 1
E 931 Power supply 1
F 6935/A Switching module 1
H - Electric lock 12V AC 1
Insert the power supply with more than 16

interphones.
A A
4+[n-1]
Outputs 0-15 or 0-AS do not support loads with
continuous absorption of more than 0.25 A.
Lighting of entrance panel: 2
With power supply type 931 connect a maxi- 2
mum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs I 2
With transformer type M832 connect a maxi-
With transformer type M832/030 connect a
4+n
maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. B
In the event of a short circuit, the protection
devices (PTC) switch off the mains voltage.
Once the short circuit has been eliminated,
wait for a few minutes to allow the protection
F E
ITALY
device to cool down so that the unit can return

to normal operation.
N. B. The system can be completed by

adding other services. To do this, consult 9+n
the variations on the standard connection Note: The value in
relating to the various components of the square bracket is to
system, on pages 108 to 116. be added in case of 2
outdoor call.
G
C+D
2
H
86
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 931AND INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONE TYPE 6221 ®
* N.B.
Connect for more then 16 interpho-
NOTE:
The jumper P1 must be cut in all interpho-
nes. nes of each group, but one.
V1 V1
M M
V2 V2
V3 V3
M M
Interphone
- - Type 6221
+ +
6S 6S
PI PI
1 1 Mains
3 3
PRI
4
5
L
4
5
L
Alimentatore
Type 6582
*
6E 6E
6P 6P - +U +I A B C D
1 2
N.B. If a humming sound is detected on

F F the phonic line reconnect the wire con-
nected to the lock by terminal 15 to ter-
minal AS inside the power supply.
Mains Mains
CH CH 1 3 4 5
PRI PRI
Switching module Alimentatore
Type 6935/A Type 931
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 O 15 AS

PATAVIUM, 8100,1200 and letter box
L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max.) A
16x24V 3W with type 832/030 L1
3
4
5 D
6
7
8
R
B
DIAGRAM N° vc4880 C
87
WIRING DIAGRAM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERPHONE SYSTEM Type 6221
®
* N.B.
Connect for more of 16 interphones.
Max. 32 interphones V1 V1 V1 V1
M M M M
V2 V2 V2 V2
V3 V3 V3 V3
M M M M
Interphone
- - - - Type 6221
+ + + +
6S 6S 6S 6S
PI PI PI PI
1 1 1 1 Mains
3 3 3 3
PRI
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 Power supply
L L L L Type 6582
6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P - +U +I A B C D
1 2 3 4
Mains
1 3 4 5
PRI
Switching module
Type 6935/A
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS
DIAGRAM N° vc4881
88
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM FOR BUILDING COMPLEX
®
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The system enables you to connect more than one building with a main speech unit. Each individual building consists of an
entrance panel with speech unit and the interphones in the apartments. The main speech unit consists of an entrance panel with
speech unit to which the users of the buildings will be connected. The switching module type 839/302, installed in each building,
selects the audio-lock connection of the entrance panel (main or secondary) which has sent the call. This makes each building
independent and enables simultaneous communication between the interphones of any apartment, with its own entrance panel.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. CE2474)

Diagram
A 6200 Interphone n
A1 8875, 8872 Interphone n
B 931 Power supply n
C 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 or PATAVIUM series Main entrance panel 1
C1 series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
or PATAVIUM series Secondary entrance panel 2÷n
D 930 or 930A Speech unit 3÷n
E - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1÷n
F 839/302 Switching module 2÷n
G 170/001 Relay 1
H - Landing call push-button 3÷n
x - Number of users 1st building n
y - Number of users 2nd building n
z - Number of users 3rd building n
w - Number of buildings 2÷n
nated,wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that the unit can return to normal operation.
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do this, consult the variations on the standard con-
nection relating to the various components of the system, on pages 108 to 116.
Note: The value in 1° building To other buildings 2° building

be added in case of
outdoor call. 4[+1]+(x-2) A1 4[+1]+(z-2) A1
5[+1] 5[+1]
5+y
2 2
4[+1]+(x-1) 4[+1]+(z-1)
A A
I 5[+1] I
5[+1]
2 2
4[+1]+x 4[+1]+z
I I
5+x 5+z
ITALY
B ITALY
F ITALY
F ITALY
B
4+w+ (x+y+z)
ITALY
B
7+x
G 7+z
6+w+(x+y+z)
2 2
2
H H
H
C1+D C+D C1+D
R R R
2 2 2
E E E
89
WIRING DIAGRAM OF AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM FOR BUILDING COMPLEX WITH AUTOMATIC
SWITCHING OF CONVERSATION AND LOCK RELEASE FUNCTIONS WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 931 ®
Mains
PRI
SWITCHING MODULE
POWER SUPPLY
type 839/302
type 931
1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS
CH P2 9 3 8 7
INTERPHONE
type 8875
type 8872
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8
F
INTERPHONE
type 6200
7
AU A
1
2
3
5 L1
6E
A 6
C 6P
3 A- Entrance panel serie 1200,
4
6S F
D 5 3300, 8000, 8100 or PATAVIUM
6
7 B- Additional push-button for lock
8
ELVOX
1 2 3 S C2 CH B
C E- Landing call push-button
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
Mains 10x24V 3W with type M832
PRI
16X24V 3W with type 832/030
SWITCHING MODULE POWER SUPPLY
type 839/302 type 931 30VA
1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9 1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS
INTERPHONE
type 8875 RELÈ
type 8872 TYPE 170/001
Mains
B
PRI
1
2 POWER SUPPLY
3
4/5 type 931 30VA
6
1 2 3- C2 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS 1 2 3 4 5
7
8
F
INTERPHONE
type 6200
7
AU A
1
2
3
5 L1
6E
A 6
3
C 6P
4
6S F
D 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
1 2 3 S C2 CH B
C
A
L1
3
4
D 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
B
C
N.B.
by terminal 15 to terminal AS inside the power supply. DIAGRAM N° ce2474
90
AUDIO DOOR-ENTRY SYSTEM WITH
SWITCHBOARD TYPE 152A-152B...152I ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The switchboard works both in installations with "Sound System" call and in installations with AC call. In order to use the switch-
board in installations with "Sound System" call, leave the jumper "S1" next to the terminal block in place; with AC call, the jum-
per must be removed.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
During the course of "internal" operation (IE key switched to I) it is possible to maintain conversation privacy between the switch-
board and the interphones, by disabling the speech unit. To communicate from the switchboard to the interphones, press the line
selector key and the CH button. To make a call from the interphones to the switchboard, lift the interphone and press the push-
button . To reply from the switchboard, press the key corresponding to the illuminated LED. The switchboard is equipped with
50Hz "line engaged" acoustic signal. An electronic device diverts all calls from the entrance panel to the internal porter switch-
board ringtone. During "external" operation (IE key set to E) the system enables communication without conversation privacy
between the interphones and the speech unit. The switchboard is excluded from the connection with the interphones and can
communicate with the speech unit. Calls from the entrance panel are sent to the respective internal users. The same porter
switchboard call push-button on the interphones operates the electric lock by means of a relay fitted in the switchboard. To open
the lock for the entrance panel from the switchboard, press the AP push-button while the switchboard is in the external position.
The switchboards with 80, 100 and N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do this, consult the
120 lines are equipped with a multi- variations on the standard connection relating to the various components of the
plier key "=x" which makes it possi- system, on pages 108 to 116.
ble to double the number of lines,
In the event of a short circuit,
thus allowing you to insert two
users for each key. 4+(n-2) A1 the protection devices
(PTC) switch off the mains vol-
To communicate with an interphone
from the switchboard: 5 tage. Once the short circuit has
been eliminated, wait for a few
- lift the interphone
minutes to allow the protection
- on the multiplier key, select the
device
LED (yellow or red according to
to cool down so that the unit
the interphone that you want to A 4+(n-1) can return to normal operation.
call);
- press the line selector key: the 5
corresponding LED thus lights up
with the same colour as the light
on the multiplier key.
To change, simply press
4+n
the multiplier key.
All the other functions remain
unchanged. 7
INSTALLING THE SWITCH-

BOARD
B H
The switchboard can be flush desk-
mounted, desk-top mounted or
F
flush wall-mounted. For surface 7+n
wall-mounted, it is necessary to
open the housing and unscrew
the screws fixing the two metal side
2
supports. Pull the supports out of
their seat and invert their position.
G
In this way, the front panel of the R
C+D
switchboard slopes like a reading-
desk, thus allowing the interphone 2
to rest naturally.
E BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1227
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. CC3697)

Diagram
A 6200 Interphone n
C 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 or
PATAVIUM series Entrance panel 1
D 930 or 930A speech unit 1
F 152A - 152B ... 152I Porter switchboard 1
G - Additional door lock push-button 1
H 2/831 Call generator 1
n- - Number of users n
91
SWITCHBOARD TYPE 152A-152B...152I
®
1 CALL
2 GENERATOR
3 SWITCHBOARD
F Mains
type 2/831
4 type 152A, 152B ... 152I
5 *
6
7
* PRI
POWER SUPPLY
* 8
9 S1
type 836
Insert the jumper S1 1O C1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 CP S X SP P + - 1O O Y
+J + - 15 1O O O 15 CP1 CP2
INTERPHONE
type 6200
7
AU A- Entrance panel series 3300, 8000,
1 8100, 1200 or PATAVIUM
2 B- Additional push-button for lock
3 C- Electric lock 12V~
5
6E
C 6
E- Diode 1N4004
A 6P L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max.)
6S 10x24V 3W with type M832
INTERPHONE
type 8875 - 8872
1
2 A
3
4/5
6
7
8 E L1
3
4
1 2 3 4
5 D
6
7
8
R
B C
SWITCHBOARD TERMINALS
C1 Input for common ringtone line (Sound system or AC call)
1 Negative
2 Microphone
3 Common audio line
4 Porter call (switchboard in "INTERNAL" position) or open door lock (switchboard
in "EXTERNAL" position)
6,7,8 Speech unit
CP Buttons for common entrance panel line
S Door lock
X Monitor OFF
SP, P Connection for additional external ringtone. The ringtone is activated by means of
calls from the entrance panel with the switchboard in the "INTERNAL" position.
F Voice and interphone call lines
+, - Power supply in direct voltage
0, 10 Power supply in alternating voltage
Y Not used DIAGRAM N° cc3697
92
SWITCHBOARD TYPE 152A-152B...152I WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The switchboard works both in installations with "Sound System" call and in installations with AC call. In order to use the switch-
board in installations with "Sound System" call, leave the jumper "S1" next to the terminal block in place; with AC call, the jum-
per must be removed.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
During the course of "internal" operation (IE key switched to I) it is possible to maintain conversation privacy between the switch-
board and the interphones, by disabling the speech unit. To communicate from the switchboard to the interphones, press the line
selector key and the CH button. To make a call from the interphones to the switchboard, lift the interphone and press the push-
button . To reply from the switchboard, press the key corresponding to the illuminated LED. The switchboard is equipped with
50Hz "line engaged" acoustic signal. An electronic device diverts all calls from the entrance panel to the internal porter switch-
board ringtone. During "external" operation (IE key set to E) the system enables communication without conversation privacy
between the interphones and the speech unit. The switchboard is excluded from the connection with the interphones and can
communicate with the speech unit. Calls from the entrance panel are sent to the respective internal users. The same porter
switchboard call push-button on the interphones operates the electric lock by means of a relay fitted in the switchboard. To open
the lock for the entrance panel from the switchboard, press the AP push-button while the switchboard is in the external position.
The switchboards with 80, 100 and N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do this, consult the
120 lines are equipped with a multi- variations on the standard connection relating to the various components of the
plier key "=x" which makes it possi- system, on pages 108 to 116.
ble to double the number of lines, In the event of a short circuit,
thus allowing you to insert two
4+(n-2) A1 the protection devices
users for each key. (PTC) switch off the mains vol-
To communicate with an interphone 5
tage. Once the short circuit has
from the switchboard: been eliminated, wait for a few
- lift the interphone minutes to allow the protection
- on the multiplier key, select the A 4+(n-1) device
LED (yellow or red according to to cool down so that the unit
the interphone that you want to 5
can return to normal operation.
call);
- press the line selector key: the
4+n
corresponding LED thus lights up
with the same colour as the light
on the multiplier key.
To change, simply press
7
the multiplier key.
All the other functions remain
unchanged.
B H
F
INSTALLING THE SWITCH-
BOARD
I
The switchboard can be flush desk-
mounted, desk-top mounted or
flush wall-mounted. For surface 7+n 7+n
wall-mounted, it is necessary to
open the housing and unscrew
the screws fixing the two metal side 2 2
supports. Pull the supports out of G G
their seat and invert their position. R
C+D R
C+D
In this way, the front panel of the
2 2
switchboard slopes like a reading-
desk, thus allowing the interphone E E
to rest naturally. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1228
Diagram
A 6200 Interphone n
C 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200
or PATAVIUM series Entrance panel 1
F 152A - 152B ... 152I Porter switchboard 1
I 839/302 Switching module 1
93
SWITCHBOARD TYPE 152A-152B...152I WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS
®
1 POWER SUPPLY CALL TRANSFORMER

2
3 type 836 GENERATOR type M832
F SWITCHBOARD
* 4
5
* type 152A, 152B ... 152I PRI
type 2/831
PRI
6
Insert the jumper S1 7 Mains SWITCHING MODULE
Mains
8 type 839/302
9 S1
10 C1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 CP S X SP P + - 10 0 Y
+J + - 15 10 0 0 15 CP1 CP2 0 12 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
INTERPHONE
A
type 6200
7
AU
1
2 L1
3
5 3
6E 4
C 6 D 5
A 6P 6
6S 7
R
8
INTERPHONE
type 8875, 8872 B
C
1
2
3
4/5 A
6
7
8 E
L1
3
4
D 5
6
1 2 3 4 7
R
8
B
C

E- Diode 1N4004 (type R027)
L1- Panel bulb
C1 Input for common ringtone line (Sound system or AC call)
(3x24V 3W max.)
1 Negative 10x24V 3W with type M832
2 Microphone 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
3 Common audio line
4 Porter call (switchboard in "INTERNAL" position) or open door lock (switchboard
in "EXTERNAL" position)
6,7,8 Speech unit
CP Buttons for common entrance panel line
S Door lock
X Monitor OFF
SP, P Connection for additional external ringtone. The ringtone is activated by means of
calls from the entrance panel with the switchboard in the "INTERNAL" position.
F Voice and interphone call lines
+, - Power supply in direct voltage
0, 10 Power supply in alternating voltage
Y Not used DIAGRAM N° cc3789
94
SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD type 142A-142B ... 142I
WITH INTERPHONE FOR NIGHT SERVICE AND ENTRANCE PANEL ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The 142 switchboard for hotel or porter use can send and receive calls from any user, switch calls from interphones to the inter-
phone for night service and bring the night service interphone into communication with the speech unit.
OPERATION FOR SWITCHBOARD type 142A, 142B, ...., 142I

During "Daytime" operation (GN key set to G) private conversation is possible between the switchboard and the interphones. To
communicate from the switchboard to the interphones, lift the interphone of the switchboard, activate the line selector key and
press the CH button.
To make a call from the interphones to the switchboard, simply lift the interphone of the interphone; the switchboard will signal
the call by lighting up the LED for the interphone and activating the internal electronic ringtone. When you lift the switchboard
interphone, the ringtone is switched off. To enter into communication with the interphone, simply activate the relevant line selec-
tor key and speak. At the end of the conversation, disactivate the line selector key and replace the interphones. For "Night" ope-
ration (GN key set to N), the switchboard interphone has to be hung up and all the line selector keys must be disactivated. In
this operating state, all calls from the interphones are diverted to the night interphone, which is able to communicate with the
interphones without conversation privacy. On receipt of a call from the entrance panel, the night interphone can communicate
with the speech unit by holding the push-button down. To open the door lock from the night interphone, simply press the push-
button .
Switchboards with 80, 100 and 120 lines are equipped with a multiplier key "=x" which enables you to double the number of lines,
thus making it possible to insert two users separately for each key. To communicate with an interphone from the switchboard
during Daytime operation:
- lift the interphone;
- on the multiplier key select the LED (yellow "x" or red "=" according to the interphone that you want to call);
- press the line selector key: the corresponding LED thus illuminates with the same colour as that of the multiplier key.
During Night service, a call sent from the entrance panel activates only the ringtone of the night service interphone type 149A.
If you need to activate calls from the entrance panel both during the day and at night, use a call repeater type 2/841 or the ring-
tone type 860A, connected as shown in the variations of the standard diagram.
During "Daytime" operation, the night interphone operates as a normal interphone, on which the line selector key is "CN".
If one or more line selector keys remain activated and the interphones of the switchboard and the night interphone are in the rest
state, the internal electronic ringtone of the switchboard will activate (with the GN key set to G). With the GN key set to N, the
night interphone ringtone will sound intermittently, until the pressed keys are disactivated.
CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS (diagram cc3049-2)

Three type s of switchboard connection are possible:
1) Connection of the interphones only.
Connection line: one common wire and one wire for each interphone. None of the other connections must be made.
2) Connection of the interphones and the night interphone.
Connection line: make the connections shown in the diagram except for those shown with broken lines.
3) Connection of the interphones, the night interphone and the speech unit.
Connection line: make all the connections shown in the diagram.
Important: the diodes supplied with the switchboard are used only in the case of connection with an AC call system.
INSTALLING THE SWITCHBOARD

The switchboard can be flush desk-mounted, desk-top mounted or flush wall-mounted. For surface wall-mounted, follow the
instructions below: open the housing and unscrew the screws fixing the two metal side supports. Pull them out of their seat and
invert their position. In this way the front panel of the switchboard slopes like a reading-desk, allowing the interphone to rest natu-
rally.
Key for communicating

with the night interphone
type 149A
Day-Night Selector keypad

switching-
Door release push-button key CN 21 31
22 32
G N 23 33
24 34
= X 25 35
26 36
Key for communicating CH 27 37
28 38
with the speech unit
29 39
30 40
Multiplier key
Call push-button
95
PORTER SWITCHBOARD type 162A 162B ... 162I WITH INTERPHONE FOR NIGHT
SERVICE, ENTRANCE PANEL AND TELEPHONE LINE ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The 162 series switchboard for hotel or porter use can send and receive calls from any user, switch calls from the interphones to the night ser-
vice interphone, communicate from the night service interphone to the speech unit, connect an interphone to a telephone line and bring 2 inter-
phones into communication with each other.
OPERATION FOR SWITCHBOARD TYPE 162A, 162B, ...., 162I

During "Daytime" operation (GN key set to G) private conversation is possible between the switchboard and the interphones.
To communicate from the switchboard to the interphones, lift the interphone of the switchboard, activate the line selector key and press the CH
button. To make calls from the interphones to the switchboard, simply lift the interphone of the interphone; the switchboard will signal the call by
lighting up the relevant LED on the interphone and activating the internal electronic ringtone. When the interphone is lifted, the ringtone switches
off. To enter into communication with the interphone, simply activate the relevant line selector key and speak.
At the end of the conversation, disactivate the line selector key and replace the interphones.
For "Night" operation (GN key set to N), the switchboard interphone has to be hung up and all the line selector keys must be disactivated. In this
operating state, all calls from the interphones are diverted to the night interphone, which is able to communicate with the interphones without
conversation privacy. On receipt of a call from the entrance panel, the night interphone can communicate with the speech unit by holding the
push-button down. To open the door lock from the night interphone, simply press the push-button .
During Night Service, a call sent from the entrance panel activates only the ringtone of the night service interphone type 149A. (diagram cc3944),
or the Sound System call repeater type 2/841 (diagram cc3940). For Sound System without call repeater, only the 149A sounds in night servi-
ce. If you need to activate calls from the entrance panel both during the day and at night, use a call repeater type 2/841 or ringtone type 860A,
connected as shown in the variations of the standard diagram. During "Daytime" operation, the night interphone operates as a normal interpho-
ne, on which the line selector key is "CN".
The switchboard is equipped with the "==" key to bring two interphones into communication with each other or one interphone into communica-
tion with the telephone line connected between the terminals LL. These services are activated only during daytime operation (GN key set to G).
- To bring two interphones into communication with each other, call the two interphones and then simply leave the two line selector keys cor-
responding to the 2 interphones ON, press the "==" key and replace the switchboard interphone. In this way, the switchboard is excluded
from the conversation but can reply to calls from other interphones. The end of the conversation is indicated by the lighting up of the two line
selector keys and intermittent activation of the internal ringtone of the switchboard. It is important in this phase that the switchboard inter-
phone is in the rest position. Then disactivate the two selector keys and the "=="key.
- If, during the intercommunicating conversation between the two interphones, the switchboard receives a call from a third interphone, the
switchboard operator can answer the call simply by lifting the interphone without activating the line key. If the intercommunicating conversa-
tion between the two interphones ends before the conversation between the switchboard and the third interphone, the latter will be interrup-
ted without any alert signal. To restore communication, disactivate the "==" key, disactivate the line selector keys of the two interphones and
activate the selector key for the third interphone.
- To use the switchboard with a telephone line it is necessary to use type 149/162. This device is a telephone switching module with which it
is possible to switch the telephone line between switchboard and telephone. By means of switching module 149/162 and the intercommuni-
cating function, the switchboard operator can bring the interphones into communication with the telephone line and vice versa. The switching
module has two positions: telephone line switched to telephone (red key pressed), telephone line switched to switchboard (black key pres-
sed).
- Calls originating from the telephone line can be received on the telephone connected to 149/162 (with the red key pressed). To bring an inter-
phone into communication with the telephone line, activate the line selector key of the interphone you want, press the "CH" key, wait for the
reply, press the "==" key, replace the switchboard interphone and press the black key on switching module 149/162. In this way, the switch-
board is excluded from the conversation but can reply to calls from other interphones. The end of the conversation is indicated by the ligh-
ting up of the line selector key for the interphone and intermittent activation of the internal ringtone of the switchboard; it is important in this
phase that the switchboard interphone is in the rest position. Disactivate the line key and the "==" key, and press the red key on type 149/162.
- If, during conversation between an interphone and the telephone line, the switchboard receives a call from another interphone, operation is
the same as for an intercommunicating conversation between two interphones.
N.B. Note that the "==" key must not be pressed down and the LEDs must be OFF, so that the switchboard can communicate with the inter-
phones with conversation privacy. If one or more line selector keys remains ON and the interphones of the switchboard and the night interpho-
ne are in the rest position, the internal electronic ringtone of the switchboard will sound (with GN key set to G). With the GN key set to N, the
ringtone of the night interphone will sound intermittently, until the pressed keys are released.
CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS (diagram cc3049-2)
Three type s of switchboard connection are possible:
1) Connection of the interphones only.
Connection line: one common wire and one wire for each interphone. None of the other connections must be made.
2) Connection of the interphones and the night interphone
Connection line: make the connections shown in the diagram except for those shown with broken lines.
3) Connection of the interphones, the night interphone and the speech unit.
Connection line: make all the connections shown in the diagram.
INSTALLING THE SWITCHBOARD

The switchboard can be flush desk-mounted, desk-top mounted or flush wall-mounted. For surface wall-mounted, follow the instructions below:
open the housing and unscrew the screws fixing the two metal side supports. Pull them out of their seat and invert their position. In this way, the
front panel of the switchboard slopes like a reading-desk, allowing the interphone to rest naturally.
Important: the diodes supplied with the switchboard are used only in the case of connection with an AC call system.
INSTALLING THE TELEPHONE SWITCHING MODULE
In order to be able to connect the switchboard to the urban telephone line, it is necessary to use type 149/162 supplied separately from the
switchboard. For connection procedures, refer to the diagrams. Key for communicating
with the night interphone
type 149A
Door lock release push-button

CN
Day-Night
switching-
G N
Selector
key CH
keypad
Key for communicating
with the speech unit = =
Key for Call push-

intercom- button
munication
96
SYSTEM WITH 142 AND 162 SERIES PORTER SWITCHBOARD WITH INTERPHONE
FOR NIGHT SERVICE, ENTRANCE PANEL AND TELEPHONE LINE ®
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. CC3940-2)

Diagram
A 6201 Interphone n
A1 8877 Interphone n
C 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200 or PATAVIUM series Entrance panel 1
F 142A - 142B ... 142I or (162A - 162B ... 162I) Porter switchboard 1
I 832/030 Power supply transformer 1
L 149A Night service interphone 1
M 149/162 (Only with 162 series switchboards) Telephone switching module 1
Connection diagram N. cc3940-2 can be used both for 142 series and 162 series switchboards.
The latter are connected differently only if the external telephone line is used. For use, see the instructions
on the previous pages.
1+(n-2) A1
2
A 1+(n-1)
2
2 2 To telephone line
To telephone
M
R
1+n 2
5(9) 5
B H I
L F
(7)
G
C+D
R
2
E
nated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that the unit can return to normal operation.
nection relating to the various components of the system,on pages 108 to 116.
97
SYSTEM WITH 142 AND 162 SERIES PORTER SWITCHBOARD WITH INTERPHO-
NE FOR NIGHT SERVICE, ENTRANCE PANEL AND TELEPHONE LINE ®
Version with switchboard

type 162A - 162B, ... 162I Telephone switching module
for activation of the type 149/162
telephone line
F 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2 L Telephone
3 L
4
5 Switchboard
6 Telephone line
type 142A - 142B, ... 142I
7
8 type 162A - 162B, ... 162I
9
1O
Interphone Transformer
C1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6E 7E 8E S P 1O + -
type 6201
type
CN4
type 2/831
1
E 832/030
CN3
2
PRI +J + - 15 1O O 15 0 CP1 CP2 PRI 15 O
3
4 Mains
5
SR 6
SD
C
A
Interphone
type 8877
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8 L1
A
3
4
3
5 D
6
7
8
ELVOX
B
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O Interphone for
night-time service
type 149A
Section of conductors A- Entrance panel with speech unit

B- Additional door lock button
Conductors Ø up to 50m Ø up to 100m Ø up to 200m
C- 12V~ electric lock
Common and lock 0,5 mm² 0,75 mm² 1,5 mm² E- Power supply type 836
Others 0,25 mm² 0,5 mm² 1 mm²
DIAGRAM N° cc3940-2
98
SYSTEM WITH 142 AND 162 SERIES PORTER SWITCHBOARD WITH INTERPHONE
FOR NIGHT SERVICE, ENTRANCE PANEL, TELEPHONE LINE AND 2 SPEECH UNITS ®

Diagram
A 6201 Interphone n
A1 8877 Interphone n
C 3300, 8000,
8100, PATAVIUM series Entrance panel 1
D 930 or 930A Speech unit 2
F 142A - 142B ... 142I or (162A - 162B ... 162I) Porter switchboard 1
I 832/030 Power supply transformer 1
L 149A Night service interphone 1
M 149/162 (Only with 162 series switchboards) Telephone switching module 1
N 839/302 Switching module 1
Wiring diagram N. cc3941 can be used both for 142 series and 162 series switchboards. The latter are connected differently only
if the external telephone line is used. For use, see the instructions on the previous pages.
1+(n-2) A1
2
A 1+(n-1)
2
2
2
To telephone line
1+n To telephone
M R
2
5(9) 10
B H I
L F
8 8
2 2
G G
C+D C+D
R R
2 2
E E
nated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protection device to cool down so that the unit can return to normal operation.
nection relating to the various components of the system, on pages 108 to 116.
SYSTEM WITH 142 AND 162 SERIES PORTER SWITCHBOARD WITH INTERPHONE FOR
NIGHT SERVICE, ENTRANCE PANEL, TELEPHONE LINE AND 2 SPEECH UNITS ®
Variation with switchboard

type 162A - 162B, ... 162I Telephone switching module
for activation of the telephone type 149/162
line
F 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
L
2
3 L
Telephone
4 Switchboard
5
6 type 142A. 142B, ...142I Telephone line
7
8 type 162A. 162B, ...162I
9
Interphone 1O
type 6201
C1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6E 7E 8E S P 1O + -
CN4
type 2/831 type 832/030 type 839/302

1
CN3
2
3
4
5 E
SR 6
SD PRI +J + - 15 1O O 15 0 CP1 CP2 PRI 15 O 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
C
A
Mains Mains
Interphone
type 8877
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8
A L1
3 3
4
D 5
6
A- Entrance panel with speech unit 7
8
B- Additional door lock button ELVOX
C- 12V~ electric lock B

C
D- Speech unit type 930 -930A
E- Power supply type 836
A L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O Interphone for
3
night-time service 4
type 149A D 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
B
C
WIRING DIAGRAM N° cc3941

Variation A - Diagram for the connection of additional ringtones
F
During Night service, calls from the 1
entrance panel activate only the ringto- 3
5
Switchboard series
ne of the interphone for night service 6
142 o 162
7
type 2/831 type 832/030
type 149A. If you need to activate calls 8
from the entrance panel both with 1O

type 836
Daytime service and with Night service, type 2/841 C1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 S P 6E 7E 8E + - PRI +J + - 15 10 0 15 0 CP1 CP2 PRI 15 O
2
use a call repeater type 2/841, or ring- 3
5
Mains Mains
tone type 860A, or a repeater relay 6
type 170/101 which activates a

mechanical doorbell supplied by the
mains. These call indication systems type 860A
must be connected as shown in this 15
4 L1 A
version. 5
3
7
4
8
PRI
Mechanical
type 170/101 doorbell
5
4 Doorbell
3
RC power supply
15
1
C
100
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The porter switchboard is available in a desk-top version in black thermoplastic. You can connect up to a maximum of
120 interphones type s 887G (887E, 887F) to it. It can also be connected to a "DIGI-BUS" series entrance panel or to a stan-
dard entrance panel with a single button.
Three main type s of system can be set up:
A) Switchboard with up to 120 internal users with "DIGI-BUS" entrance panel (diagram cc4347).
The switchboard can call or be called by all the users.
The users can converse with each other after first calling the
switchboard. The switchboard can be called, can converse with
the entrance panel and activate the electric lock. All the users can
be called and converse with the entrance panel and activate the
electric lock, if programmed to do so.
type 170/001 + type 6836
INSTALLING the devices is simple. The switchboard is con-
nected to a plug, which must be plugged into a terminal
type 887G board, to which the whole system is connected.
type 8942+8D83 (type 887E) The supply unit can be installed in a cabinet with DIN modu-
(type 887F) les. Fit a bipolar switch for disconnection of the system from
the mains power in the event of maintenance. The lock con-
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
trol relay is housed in the same cabinet.
4
GHI
7
PQRS
5
JKL
8
TUV
6
MNO
9
WXYZ
CANC
The entrance panel must be installed at the entrance. The
R 0.,;
type 153A interphones are all suitable for wall-mounted.

Connection is matrix type and envisages 12 cable riser
Electric lock output terminals (decades) and 10 line output terminals.
12V AC In total, 22 wires (terminals) can connect up to 120 users
(12 decades x 10 lines).
B) Standard switchboard for up to 120 internal users with A suitable sized junction box should be installed for each
entrance panel with a single push-button (diagram cc4350). floor, holding the terminal boards for the leads (10 for the
The switchboard can call or be called by all the users. The users lines and 1 or more for the decades). These junction boxes
can converse with each other after first calling the switchboard. will receive the cables from the switchboard or other floors
The switchboard only can be called and can converse with an and will route the twisted pairs, one for each interphone.
entrance panel and activate the electric lock. Other terminals are connected to the power supply, the
relay and the entrance panel. (Refer to attached diagrams).
type 170/001 type 6836
Once you have made all the electrical connections (make
certain that all the interphones are correctly replaced: hung
type 887G on the base) power the system up.
type 153A (type 887E) If possible use a twisted telephone cable for the electrical
(type 887F) connection of the devices.
With sections of 0.25 mm2, which equates to a diameter of
6/10, the maximum length of the connection cables is 100
m. Where possible, use shielded cable connected to switch-
board terminal "-".
type 88T1 +
type 930D Electric lock
12V AC
C) Standard switchboard for up to 120 internal users (dia- SYSTEM OPERATING PRINCIPLE
gram cc4355). The audio door entry system consists of a group of inter-
The switchboard can call or be called by all the users. phones relating to one building cable riser, connected to an
The users can converse with each other after first calling the- analogue door entry switchboard for communication via an
switchboard. analogue twisted pair line. The switchboard can be connec-
type 6836 ted to an entrance panel. Selection of a single interphone on
the cable riser uses the principle of matrices: for each level
it is possible to select one of the "n" interphones on that
type 887G level.The switchboard periodically checks the state of the
(type 887E) interphones, by measuring their impedance:
(type 887F) 1) Interphone in place (impedance rest status);
2) Interphone released (impedance activated).
type 153A
101
AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A
®
Description of switchboard type Numerical keypad

153A Function keypad
Analogue, desk-top device controlled by
a microcontroller, and consisting of inter-
phone, alphanumeric display for displa-
ying the functions, indicator LED, nume-
rical keypad for dialling, keypad for
keying the functions. Equipped with 2.2
m. of cable with terminal block and
removable plug.
Switchboard
Description of function keys
The key can recall in sequence all unanswered calls

(with a progressive index, in which the greatest value The enable key allows the operator to intercept all
indicates the most recent call). vocal communication (between two interphones or
between an interphone and an entrance panel).
The key retrieves the previously selected call from the When the key is pressed again the switchboard is
memory, and enables you to make the call directly excluded from the conversation in progress.
by means of the key . This key enables communication between two inter-
phones: the user requesting communication with
This key activates the lock control circuit (closes a con- another calls the switchboard, which sets the first
tact which activates a control relay for the electric door interphone to standby and by means of the selection
lock).
sequence (numerical selection + ) calls the
The push-button allows the switchboard deactivation second user, who on consent is put in communica-
(through digiting a proper code, which can be dialled
from the parameter menu) operation in "Disabled" tion with the first user by means of the key in que-
mode, so that all pad keys apart from this one are dis- stion.
abled: the switchboard can route automatically any call
coming from the external digital door station (DigiBus) or Numerical keypad (for dialling user numbers maximum 4
analogical type speech unit (930D) entrance panel: an digits, and relative call).
engaged tone on the entrance panel loudspeaker will be
routed to the interphone selected by the digital entrance 1-2….9-0 Numerical keys for dialling the number of the user.
panel or to an internal interphone with switchboard func-
tions or in case of analogical entrance panel (without Key for sending the call to the selected interphone.
switchboard in switching mode. If the key is pressed
again, the switchboard returns to the "Enabled" status:
switchboard active, carrying out the access code digiting The key cancels the previous selection.
with modes analogue to the previously mentioned Notes: pressing the R key also enables immediate cancella-
tion of a call in progress;
On request from an external call from the entrance
panel to an interphone on the cable riser, the operator LED indicators on keypad
selects directly the desired internal number (numerical The keyboard is fitted with four indicator LEDs to show spe-
cific statuses of the switchboard when activated and con-
nected to the cable riser and entrance panel.
selection + ), and on consent from the selected
Display is as follows:
user, by means of the key , the switchboard ena-
bles communication between the interphone and the MEMORY LED 1 when lit indicates the presence of
entrance panel. one or more unanswered calls.
In case of external call during a conversation between

two interphones, the push-button allows communication EXTERNAL LED 2 Activation of communication with
with the entrance panel making the call request and external entrance panel if switchboard is active to outside.
activates in advance the communication with the
entrance panel. When the key is pressed again, the
panel is set to the standby tone to enable the switch- INTERC. LED 3 When lit, indicates intercommunica-
tion active between two interphones.
board operator, by means of the enable key , to
intercept the communication between two
interphones and request interruption, and when the key
is pressed again communication with the panel is ena- LED 4 LINE When lit indicates the presence of voice
bled. During a conversation between the switchboard communication between switchboard and an interphone on
and an interphone, the push-button allows you to the cable riser;
answer a call from the entrance panel: i.e. during a con-
versation with an interphone by pressing the push-but-
ton you disconnect the interphone and establish the
communication between the switchboard and the
entrance panel.
102
SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A
®
Analogue switchboard/interphone system technical specifications

Switchboard:
Power supply: 13 Vdc
Max. current absorption: 200 mA
Max.number of connectable interphones: N. 120
The maximum distance of connections possible between switchboard and all interphones is 200 metres, with a section of 0.5
mm2. The maximum distance between the switchboard and external entrance panel is 100 metres.
Reference to terminal board of switchboard-cable riser connection boss with 30 terminals:

N. 10 line terminals (L1.....L10)
N. 12 decade terminals (D0.....D11)
N. 2 power terminals (+ / -)
N. 2 external panel voice terminals (A)
N. 1 digital signal terminal (TX)
N. 1 lock relay control terminal (S)
N. 1 single button external panel call terminal (CH)
N. 1 terminal used for the call signal
The switchboard is designed to operate with interphone bi / white CN1

B
blu / blue
Attention:
types: art. 887E with call speaker; 1
ro / red
2
remove posible
Caution: CA CN2 jumpers
CS
3 A
position the handset ALT
A
B 4/5
wires according to the ALT. 6
7 B Attention:
specified colour coding.
B 1 2 3 4/5 6 7 8 8 remove posible
jumpers
art. 887F with buzzer and call on earpiece;
bi / white CN1
B
blu / blue 1
Attention:
Caution: ro / red 2 remove posible
position the handset A
3 A jumpers
4/5
wires according to the B
6
specified colour coding. 7 B Attention:
B 1 2 3 4/5 6 7 8 8 remove posible
jumpers
type 887G (old type) with call on the handset.
bi / white CN1
B Attention:
blu / blue 1
Caution: 2 remove posible
ro / red
position the handset 3 A jumpers
A
wires according to the B 4/5
6 Attention:
specified colour coding. 7 B
remove posible
B 1 2 3 4/5 6 7 8 8
jumpers
type 887G with call on the handset new interphone
Caution: bi / white CN1

blu / blue
position the handset ro / red
2
wires according to the 3
specified colour coding. 4/5
7
2 3 4/5 7
type 887G call at the bottom

Caution:
of the handset
position the handset wires according to
bi / white CN1
the specified colour coding. blu / blue
Cut the red handset wire in correspon- ro / red

dence to the external sheath.
2 3 4/5 7
Fix the plastic loudspeaker support at the interphone
base and connect the wires on the vertical contacts at Accessory R889
the loudspeaker output (as indicated in figura). (plastic support + loudspeaker)
103
SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A
®
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH

PORTER SWITCHBOARD type 153A WITH TYPE "C" SERVICE
Method for connection of single inter-

phone to cable riser
Example: system with 120 interphones Power supply 6836 TO INTERPHONE CABLE RISER
(max. limit 130), connection of interphone D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 F1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O
N.114. In this case wire as follows:
- Connect wire of interphone terminal 3 to
terminal D11 of the switchboard boss PRI 15 10 0 +J + -
corresponding to decade 11.
- Connect the wire of terminal 2 of the
interphone to terminal L4 of the switch-
board boss corresponding to line 4.
In the same way interphone N.118 is
connected to decade D11 but to line L8.
Using the same wiring principle, inter-
phone N.5 is connected via the cable
riser to the boss as follows:
- Connect wire of interphone terminal 3 to
terminal D0 of the switchboard boss cor-
responding to decade 0. DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 D12 F1 - + CH S TX A L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1O
- Connect the wire of interphone terminal
Switchboard 153A
2 to terminal L5 of the switchboard boss
corresponding to line 5.
DIAGRAM N° cc4471R2
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A AND
SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D
TO INTERPHONE CABLE RISER
Relay 170/001 Power supply 6836
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 F1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O
PRI 15 10 0 +J + -
1 2 3 4 5
Entrance panel
and
Speech unit
type 930D
L1
A 1
B 2
3
4
5
R
6
DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 D12 F1 - + CH S TX A L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1O
Switchboard 153A
Electric lock 12 VAC DIAGRAM N° cc4470R2
104
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCH-
BOARD type 153A AND SPEECH UNIT WITH DIGI-BUS ENTRANCE PANEL ®
D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 F1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O
To interphone riser
D2 F1 - L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 - F1 D3
Interphone B B
Interphone
type 887G (887E, 887F)
1
L3 L3
1 type 887G
2 2
User number 3 3 (887E, 887F)
4/5 4/5
User number
23 6
7
6
7
8 8
33
Interphone B B Interphone
1 1
type 887G (887E, 887F) 2
L2 L2
2 type 887G
User number 3 3
4/5 4/5
(887E, 887F)
22 6
7
6
7
User number
8 8 32
Interphone B B
Interphone
1 1
type 887G (887E, 887F) 2
L1 L1
2 type 887G
3 3
User number 4/5 4/5 (887E, 887F)
21 6
7
6
7 User number
8 8
31
D0 F1 - L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 - F1 D1
Interphone
B B
Interphone 1 1
type 887G
L3 L3
type 887G (887E, 887F) 2 2 (887E, 887F)
3 3
User number 4/5 4/5 User number
6 6
03 7 7 13
8 8
B B
Interphone
Interphone 1 1 type 887G
L2 L2
type 887G (887E, 887F) 2 2
3 3 (887E, 887F)
User number 4/5 4/5
User number
6 6
02 7 7
12
8 8
B B
Interphone 1 1
Interphone
L1 L1
type 887G (887E, 887F) 2 2 type 887G
3 3
User number 4/5 4/5 (887E, 887F)
6 6
01 7 7
User number
8 8
11
Power supply
Art. 6836
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 F1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 C0 – External audio entrance
panel with keypad and dis-
Relay 170/001 play type 8844 – 8844/…
C - External audio entrance
panel type 8843 – 8843/…
P - Door lock additional push-
1 2 3 4 5 PRI 15 10 0 +J + - button
Mains L - 12V A.C. electric lock
E1 - Terminal block
E2 - Electronic unit
E3 - Additional module series 80..
CN1
CN1
M M
V
E2 V
1 1 1 1
3 3 J1 3 3 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D1O D11 D12 F1 - + CH S TX A L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1O
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6
Switchboard 153A
8 8
V1
E3 V1
CO E2 E1 M1
C E1 M1
V2 V2
SR SR
E3
POWER LINE
+I +I
1 2 3
CH CH
M Interc
In/Out 4 5 6
Interc2 7 8 9
VL VL Line2
R
0
88888888
4 4
P
R
1 3
F1 F1
2
J1
4 5 6
*
F2 F2
7 8 9
R 0 C
+L +L
L N° sc397
105
AUDIO ENTRANCE PANEL SYSTEM WITH LODGE SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A AND TWO
EXTERNAL ENTRANCE PANELS WITH SPEECH UNIT TYPE 930D.
®
To interphone riser
Relay 170/001
Power supply
Art. 6836
Mains
Switchboard 153A
Relay 170/001 Relay 170/001
Power supply
Art. 6836
56 Ohm 2W
56 Ohm 2W
Transformer
Art. 832/030
Mains Mains
Transformer
Art. 832/030
Supply voltage Supply voltage
cable separated cable separated
from the remai- from the remai-
ning conductors. ning conductors.
A- Secondary audio entrance panel

F- Speech unit Art. 930D
P- Additional push-button for lock
L- Electric lock 12V
L1- Panel bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
N° sc06052
106
AUDIO ENTRANCE PANEL SYSTEM WITH TWO ENTRANCE PANELS CONNECTED IN
PARALLEL, POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6836 AND LODGE SWITCHBOARD TYPE 153A.
®
To interphone riser
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Telephone Telephone
Art. 887E Art. 887E
Art. 887F Art. 887F
Art. 887C Art. 887C
Power supply Power supply

Art. 6836 Art. 6836
Relay 170/001 Relay 170/001
Mains Mains
Switchboard 153A
For the current generator deactivation

cut the metallic jumper “J1” placed on
the rear (bottom on the right hand
side) of the electronic unit.
C- External audio entrance panel with keypad and display type 8844 – 8844/…
E1 - Terminal block
E2 - Electronic unit
L- 12V electric lock N° sc06247
107
®
VARIATION 1 (si386) VARIATION 2
Wiring diagram of call repeater type 2/841. Wiring diagram of call repeater type 2/841.
Loudspeaker module type 2/841 repeats the interphone call Loudspeaker module type 2/841 repeats the interphone call
signal without changing its tone. signal without changing its tone.
Interphone
type 8875 Interphone
type 8872 type 6201
type 8878 2
3 1
B 5 2
1 6 3
2 Call repeater SR 4 2
3 SD 5 3
4/5
type 2/841 C 6 5
6 A 6
7 Call repeater
8
type 2/841
Interphone
type 8873
Interphone
type 8877
type 6200
2
3
7 5
AU 1
6 3 2
1 Call repeater
2 4/5 3
3
type 2/841 6 5
5 6
6E Call repeater
C 6 type 2/841
A 6P
6S
Note: In this configura- VARIATION 2B

tion the outdoor call does
not activate the additio-
nal chime. Connection of a push-button for the selfactivation of
the speech unit.
13 2
12 3 To communicate with the speech unit from the interphone press
11 5
Interphone 10 6
Art. 6600/AU 9
the push-button . This function allows you to continue a con-
Art. 6700/AU 8
Call repeater versation with the speech unit when the conversation time dwell
Art. 660A/AU 7 type 2/841 expires (nearly 9 minutes).
6
5
4
3
2
1 POWER SUPPLY
Type 938A
Power supply
A- Outdoor call push-button
C2 B- DIODO 1N4004, ART. R027
INTERPHONE
Type 6200 + n° 1 Type 6152
AA 1
13 2
12 BA 3
11
Interphone 4
10 BA 8
Art. 6600/AU 9
Art. 6700/AU 8
Art. 660A/AU 7 2
6 3
5 5
4 6
3
2 Call repeater
1 type 2/841
108
®
Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type
860A. 860A.
N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A features a two or three- N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A features a two or three-
note ringtone which is selected by connection to the corre- note ringtone which is selected by connection to the corre-
sponding terminal (7 or 8). The ringtone is powered by the sponding terminal (7 or 8). The ringtone is powered by the
mains voltage. mains voltage.
Additional Additional
ringtone ringtone
Interphone type 860A type 860A
type 6200
PRI 4 5 7 8
7 Mains Interphone
AU
1 type 6201
2
3
1
5
6E 2
C 6
PRI 8 7 5 4
3
A 6P
6S SR 4 Rete
SD 5
C 6
A
Additional
Interphone ringtone
type 8875 type 860A
type 8872
type 8878 PRI 4 5 7 8
Mains
B
1
2
3
4/5
6
7
8 Additional
ringtone
type 860A
Additional
Interphone
ringtone
type 8873
type 860A
type 8877
PRI 4 5 7 8
PRI 8 7 5 4
Mains
13 Mains
Interphone 12
1
11
Art. 6600/AU 10 3
Art. 6700/AU 9 4/5
8
Art. 660A/AU 7 Note: In this configura- 6
6 tion the outdoor call does
5
4
not activate the additio-
3 nal chime.
2
1
Additional
ringtone
A- Outdoor call push-button. type 860A
B- DIODO 1N4004, ART. R027
PRI 4 5 7 8
C2 Mains
AA BB BB
13
Interphone 12
Art. 6600/AU 11
10
Art. 6700/AU 9
8
Art. 660A/AU 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
109
®
Wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells. Wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells.
You can connect additional doorbells operating at 12V AC or You can connect additional doorbells operating at 12V AC or
mains AC, using relay type 170/101, by connecting them as mains AC, using relay type 170/101, by connecting them as
shown in the diagram. shown in the diagram.
Relay Relay
Art. 170/101 Art. 170/101
Interphone
Art. 8875
Art. 8872
Art. 8878
+
-
B Interphone
1
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5 Mechanical
Art. 6201
2 doorbell
3 1 C 2 3 4 RC 5 15
1
4/5 2
6 3
7 SR 4 Mechanical
8 SD 5 doorbell
Doorbell C 6
A
supply
Relay
Art. 170/101
Doorbell
Interphone
supply
Art. 6200
+ Relay
7 -
AU
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
Art. 170/101
1
Mechanical
2 doorbell
3
5
6E
C 6 Interphone
A 6P Art. 8873
6S
Doorbell Art. 8877
supply
1 C 2 3 4 RC 5 15
Note: In this configuration 1

3 Mechanical
the outdoor call does not Relay 4/5
activate the additional type 170/101 6 doorbell
chime.
13 +
12 -
Interphone 11 Mechanical
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
Art. 6600/AU 10
9 doorbell Doorbell
Art. 6700/AU 8 supply
Art. 660A/AU 7
6
5
4
3
2
Doorbell
1 supply
Power supply Relay

type 170/101
C2
+
-
A C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
13 Mechanical
12 B
Interphone 11
doorbell
Art. 6600/AU 10
9
Art. 6700/AU 8
Art. 660A/AU 7
6
5 Doorbell
4
supply
3
2
1
A- Outdoor call push-button.
A- DIODO 1N4004, ART. R027
110
®
Wiring diagram of landing call with power supplies type , Wiring diagram of landing call with power supplies type
931, 931A, 936, 938A and 931/0CT (from terminal C2). 6837 and 837/0TC (from terminal P2).
When the landing call push-button is pressed, the interphone When the landing call push-button is pressed, the interphone
emits a different tone from the tone emitted by a call from the emits a different tone from the tone emitted by a call from the
entrance panel. entrance panel.
Interphone
7 type 6201
AU
1
2
1
3 Landing call 2 Landing call
5 push-button push-button
6E
3
C 6 SR 4
Interphone A 6P SD 5
Art. 6200 6S
Power supply C 6
A
C2
Power supply
P2
B
1 Landing call Interphone
2 type 8873
3
push-button
4/5 type 8877
6
7
8
Interphone
Art. 8875 1 Landing call
Art. 8872 3 push-button
Art. 8878 4/5
6
Landing call
push-button
13
Interphone 12
11
Art. 6600/AU 10
Art. 6700/AU 9
8
Art. 660A/AU 7 DESCRIPTION OF MODULE TYPE 6153
6 On interphones with PETRARCA series call loudspeaker type
5
4 6200 - 6201 the switching module type 6153 enables you to
3
2
control the ringtone volume or disable it. The device is also
1 equipped with two LEDs, one for indicating ringtone disabled
(red indicator) and one for "lock open" (green indicator); the
use of these two devices requires additional connections as
shown in the wiring diagrams.
VARIATION 9
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with 6200 series interphones, INSTALLATION ON PETRARCA SERIES 6200 - 6201 INTER-
without LEDs. PHONES
1
- Open the interphone
2 - Snap off the plastic lamina by exerting pressure on it
Interphone 3 - Insert the card in its seat and fix it with the screw supplied
type 6200 S
- Disconnect the loudspeaker wire from "A" on the interphone.
CH
CH - Insert the removed wire onto the pin (CN2) on the card type
7 To power supplies 6153.
AU type 931-936-938A - Insert the wire pre-connected to terminal n° 6 of type 6153,
1 on pin "A" of the interphone
2
,931A, 931/0CT
3
N.B. On terminal n° 7 of card type 6153, there is a wire to be
5 used for visual indication that the ringtone is disabled.
6E
C 6
Left 0 1 2 3 Right
A 6P
Call tone level selection
6S
6
CN2 DL1
Position "0": ringtone OFF
7
8 Position "1": minimum volume
DL2 9 Position "2": medium volume
10
Position "3": maximum volume
N.B. In position "0" (ringtone OFF) terminals 7 - 10 are short-

circuited, thus enabling the red LED to light.
1 2 3 S CH
111
®
VARIATION 10
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with interphone type 6200 and ringtone OFF indicator module (red LED)
and lock open indicator module (green LED).
Mains
PRI By means of switch for type 6153, it is pos-
Power supply sible to set call intensity to one of three levels
type 6582 or disable the ringtone with visual indication
- +U +I A B C D
by means of a LED.
Furthermore, by connecting a lock equipped
with a normally open contact, it is possible to
type 931, 936, 938A

1 indicate the "lock open" state.
To power supplies
2
3
931A, 931/0CT
S IMPORTANT
The connection to terminal 9 of type 6153,
Interphone CH
CH
(cable riser "C"), activates the "lock open"
type 6200 + 6153 indicator.
The connection to terminal 10 of type 6153,
7 (cable riser "+U"), activates the "ringtone
AU
1 OFF" indicator.
2
Lock with normally
3 open contact
5 For switching on the indicator diodes, the
6E 15/AS
C 6
power supply used in the diagram is type
A 6P 6582. This allows switch-on of 25 LEDs
6S S/S1 simultaneously. For larger quantities, it is
6 necessary to use further additional power
CN2 DL1 7
8 supplies.
DL2 9
A 10
DL1 - Green LED: Lock open.
DL2 - Red LED: Call tone OFF.
1 2 3 S C +U CH
Mains
PRI
Power supply
type 6582
- +U +I A B C D
type 931, 936, 938A
1
To power supplies
2
3
931A, 931/0CT
CH
CH
13
12
Interphone 11
Art. 6600/AU 10
15/AS
9 Lock with normally
Art. 6700/AU 8 open contact
Art. 660A/AU 7
S/S1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 S - + C CH
112
®
VARIATION 11
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with interphone type 6200 and ringtone OFF indicator module (red LED)
and "lock open" indicator module (green LED).
Mains
PRI By means of switch type 6153 it is possible
Power supply to set call intensity to one of three levels or
type 6583 disable the ringtone with visual indication by
means of a LED.
- +U +I A B C D Furthermore, by connecting a lock equip-
ped with a normally open contact, it is pos-
sible to indicate the "lock open" state.
type 931, 936, 938A

1
To power supplies
2
3 IMPORTANT
931A, 931/0CT
Interphone S The connection to terminal 9 of type 6153,
type 6200 + 6153 (cable riser "C"), activates the "lock open"
CH indicator.
CH The connection to terminal 10 of type 6153,
7
AU
(cable riser "+U"), activates the "ringtone
1 OFF" indicator.
2 For switching on the indicator diodes, the
3 power supply used in the diagram is type
5
6E
6583. This allows switch-on of 180 LEDs
15/AS simultaneously. For
C 6
A 6P larger quantities, it is necessary to use fur-
6S S/S1 ther additional power supplies
6
CN2 DL1 7 DL1 - Green LED: Lock open.
8 DL2 - Red LED: Ringtone OFF.
DL2 9
10
Lock with normally

open contact
1 2 3 S C +U CH
Mains
PRI
Power supply
type 6583
- +U +I A B C D
type 931, 936, 938A
1
To power supplies
2
931A, 931/0CT
3
S
CH
CH
13
12
Interphone
11
Art. 6600/AU 10
15/AS
Art. 6700/AU 9
8
Art. 660A/AU 7
S/S1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 S - + C CH
Lock with normally
open contact
113
®
VARIATION 12 VARIATION 13
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with interphone type 6201
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with 6201 series interphones. and ringtone OFF indicator module (red LED) and "lock
open" indicator module (green LED).
By means of switch type 6153 it is possible to set the ringtone Mains
intensity to one of three levels or disable the ringtone. PRI
Power supply
3 type 6582
Interphone CH
type 6201 + 6153 CH - +U +I A B C D
type 6837 e 837/0TC

CN4
To power supplies
To power supplies
1 type 6837 e 837/0TC
2
3
3
4 Interphone CH
SR
5 type 6201 + 6153 CH
6
SD 1
CN3
C 2
A 3
4
5
SR
6
6 SD
C
For switching on the indi-
CN2 DL1 7 A cator diodes, in the dia-
8
DL2 9 gram, the power supply
10 6 used is type 6582. This
CN2 DL1 7
8
unit enables switch-on of
DL2 9 25 LEDs simultaneously.
10
For larger quantities, it is
necessary to use other
3 CH additional power sup-
plies.
3 +U CH
VARIATION 14
Wiring diagram of type 6153 with interphone type 6201 and ringtone OFF indicator module (red LED) and "lock open"
indicator module (green LED).
C By means of switch type 6153 it is possible to set

B Power supply call intensity to one of three levels or disable the
A type 6583 ringtone with visual indication by means of a LED.
Furthermore, by connecting a lock equipped with
PRI 15 O +I C +U -
a normally open contact, it is possible to indicate
Mains
the "lock open" state.
type 6837 e 837/0TC
To power supplies
IMPORTANT
3
The connection to terminal 9 of type 6153, (cable
riser "C"), activates the "lock open" indicator.
Interphone CH The connection to terminal 10 of type 6153,
type 6201 + 6153 CH (cable riser "+U"), activates the "ringtone OFF"
1
indicator.
CN3
2
3 For switching on the indicator diodes, the power
4 supply used in the diagram is type 6583 With this
5
SR unit it is possible to switch on 180 LEDs simulta-
6
SD neously. For larger quantities, it is necessary to
C
use further additional power supplies.
A
15/AS
6 S/S1
CN2 DL1 7
8
A 9
10
Lock with
normally open contact
3 C +U CH DL1 - Green LED visual indicator: Lock open.

DL2 - Red LED visual indicator: ringtone OFF
114
®
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF RINGTONE TYPE 6150

- Two-tone sound signal - power supply: 13.5 ÷ 18Vc.c. - Consumption 75mA
Description
DING-DONG ringtone card for installation in interphones type 6200 - 6201 in the PETRARCA series.
Once installed, the card enables the interphone to be used in systems with AC call or, if fitted in SOUND
SYSTEM installations, converts the sound of the interphone from modulated to two-tone (DING-DONG).
RINGTONE ASSEMBLY
1) Open the interphone by separating the cover from the base.
2) Insert the electronic card in its seat and fix with the screw supplied.
3) Remove the 2 loudspeaker conductors (Faston type ) from the standard interphone card and insert
them (without taking account of polarisation) in the two pins (denominated "A-A") of ringtone type
6150.
4) Make the connection as shown in the diagrams attached.
VARIATION 15
Wiring diagram of interphone type 6200 with "SOUND SYSTEM" call and ringtone type 6150.
+ 3 The ringtone with electronic two-tone sound

Interphone type 6150 must be inserted in interphone
Loudspeaker type 6200 + 6150
CN1
type 6200 to change the modulated sound

7
AU generated by the power supply.
1
2
3
5
A 6E
C 6
6P
6S Power supply Mains
+
type 6582
A PRI
CH PRI Power supply
A
-
C A Mains type 931, 931A,
936, 938A, 833,
CH + 3 1 2 3- 6 7 8 C1 O 15 AS
931/OTC
Loudspeaker
L1
Art. 6
15O
3
+ CH A A
-
VARIATION 15A
Wiring diagram of interphone type 6201 with ringtone type 6150 and power supply type 6837.
Interphone The ringtone with electronic two-tone sound

Loudspeaker type 6201 + 6150 + 3 type 6150 must be inserted in interphone
type 6201 to change the modulated sound
CN4
1
generated by the power supply.
2
SR 3
SD 4
C 5
A 6
+
A
CH
A
SR - type 6582 type 6837 and 837/0TC
SD C
A PRI PRI
CH + 3 Mains
Mains
3 P2 2 5 6 7 8 P1 S1 15 O
Loudspeaker
Art. 6
15O
L1
+ CH A A
-
3
115
®
VARIATION 16 (si391)
Wiring diagram for the stair light switching on or other services through relay type 170/001.
Power supply
15
Relais
7 Art. 170/001
AU
1
2
3
Interphone 5
6E
1 2 3 4 5
Push-buttons (for stair lighting
Art. 6200 A 6
C 6P
or other services)
6S
4
Auxiliary service.
8 MAX - 3A 230V
Power supply
15
Relais
Art. 170/001
B
Interphone 1
Art. 8875 2
3
Art. 8872 4/5 Push-buttons (for stair lighting
1 2 3 4 5
Art. 8878 6 or other services)
7
8
Auxiliary service.
MAX - 3A 230V
Relais
Art. 170/001
13
12
Interphone 11
Art. 6600/AU 10
9
Art. 6700/AU 1 2 3 4 5 Push-buttons (for stair lighting or
8
Art. 660A/AU 7 other services)
6
5
4 Auxiliary service.
Push-button “ ” 3 MAX - 3A 230V
2
1
Relais
Art. 170/001
13
Interphone 12
11
Art. 6600/AU 10
Art. 6700/AU 9
1 2 3 4 5
8
Art. 660A/AU 7
6 Push-buttons (for stair lighting or
5 other services)
4
3
2
Auxiliary service.
Push-button “ ” 1 MAX - 3A 230V
116
®
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

SYSTEMS WITH
SOUND SYSTEM CALL

SYSTEM AND TWO-CHANNEL VARIATION WITH COAXIAL CABLE (in mm2)
a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, +, AS, S1

2 2 2
C1, C2, C3, P1, P2, +T 1 mm 1,5 mm 2,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
117
"SOUND SYSTEM" SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 ®
OPERATION
The video door entry installation consists of one camera entrance panel with speech unit, one power supply and one or more
monitors. The system can operate with monitors and B/W or colour cameras and with or without conversation privacy.
The power supply is not equipped with intercommunicating section; nevertheless it is possible to set up a monitor and/or inter-
communicating interphones network using switching module type 935A in conjunction with the basic power supply.
When an entrance panel push-button is pressed, the ringtone rings in the corresponding apartment. Almost immediately the
image of the caller appears on the monitor. The coverage area is illuminated by built-in infrared leds when using B/W camera,
or by a built-in white light when using a colour camera.
If desired, the user may simply raise the interphone, communicate with the caller and, if appropriate, activate the door-opener.
In this case, door-opening time may be varied from 1 to 30 seconds using the potentiometer P3.
The system turns itself off automatically after a preset time, adjustable from 30 to 90 seconds using potentiometer P1 inside the
power supply. If the caller presses another user’s push-button, the previously called monitor is automatically disactivated without
waiting for the end of the preset time. When testing the installed system, use trimmer P2 to adjust the optimal volume of the
speech unit. For simultaneous activation of two or more monitors one extra power supply type 6582 must be installed for each
additional monitor or type 6583 for more monitors. A blocking circuit cuts off power to monitors if the line is overloaded or short-
circuited. The power supply is also equipped with a specific device to eliminate any buzzing on the voice circuit caused by the
use of wires that are too long and/or too thin only in installations with “SOUND SYSTEM” call. Push-buttons with name-tags are
illuminated through output 0-15 on power supply. Up to a maximum number of three 24V 3W bulbs can be connected. An addi-
tional transformer, type M832 or 832/030 is required for entrance panels with more bulbs.
Technical specifications of power supply type 6680 - (6680/V03)

Type 6680 is the basic power supply for all video door entry systems with SOUND SYSTEM call and is equipped with an elec-
tronic double tone generator, which replaces conventional alternative calling with a buzzer or bell. The sound is emitted with two
different tones (present on terminals C1-C2) thereby allowing the user to immediately identify the source of the call (main entran-
ce, gate, garage, etc.). This feature provides economic and practical advantages since the use of several conventional sound
emitting systems is no longer required; the signal is emitted from a single loudspeaker in the interphone. In some cases, savings
can be made on the cable routing work requirements for additional bell systems. Manufactured in copolymer class V-0 housing;
preset for mounting on cases with 12-Module DIN support or with expanding plugs with screws.
- 230V A.C. 50Hz supply (other voltages on request)

- 60VA maximum absorbed power.
- 18V D.C. 0.8A monitor supply.
- 13V D.C. 0.3A camera supply.
- 15V rectified voltage 0.25A continuous duty output for push- push-button illumination (3x24V 3W max)
- 15V A.C. 1A door lock output; intermittent service.
- Amplified audio door entry system.
- Timer and automatic disconnection device of monitor previously activated.
- Interchangeable cards for quick maintenance.
- Removable terminal blocks.
POWER SUPPLY OPERATING MODES

- Selector set A-B:
- “A” Position: operating with sound system call, to be used in case of humming noises (caused by power supply, door lock or
lamps) dectected on the interphone line.
- “B” Position: normal operation with Sound System call, switching module in “A” position only in case of humming noises on the
audio line.
- “B” Position: operating with 15V A.C. call only. In this case power supply 6680 completely replaces power supply type 6580.
PROTECTION OF POWER SUPPLY:

- Primary coil of transformer by PTC
- 1st. secondary coil for internal electronic supply by F 3,15A 250V (F1) fuse. Selector A-B
- 2nd. secondary coil for lock supply by PTC
- Electronic protection against short-circuits and overloads on
monitor cable riser.
- Electronic protection against overloads to speech unit.
ADJUSTMENTS
P1 - Activation time adjustment for monitor and camera.
P2 - Volume adjustment of speech unit.
P3 - Activation time adjustment for electric lock.
N.B.: The electric door lock must operate by way of an intermittent cycle so that one Removable terminal blocks
operating period corresponds to 5 rest periods, thereby preventing the protection
device from overheating (one period corresponds to the door lock activation time).
Dimensions type 6680 - 6680/V03: 208x135x72 - Weight: 1.4 Kgs.
118
"SOUND SYSTEM" SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 ®
TERMINALS FOR MONITOR type 6300, 6301, 6303, 6500, 6501, 6401 TERMINALS FOR MONITOR TYPE 6000, 6003
1: Interphone receiver V1: Input for connection of 75 Ohm video cable in systems
2: Interphone microphone with coax cable; input for connection of video signal V1
in systems without coax cable.
3: Common audio line V2: Output for connection of 75 Ohm video cable or 75 Ohm
resistor in last monitor in systems with coax cable.
4: Button for auxiliary services V3: Input for connection of video signal V2 in systems
5: Power supply negative without coax cable.
6: Power supply positive (minimum input voltage 15V D.C.) N.B. Terminal V3 must be shorted to terminal M in
systems with coax cable.
7: Not connected. M: Earth for terminals V1, V2 and V3.
8: Call from entrance panel +A: Not used
9: Lock push-button +: Power supply (positive), minimum input voltage 15 V d.c.
-: Power supply (negative), minimum input voltage 15 V d.c.
10: 12V D.C. output for video distributor +D: +12 V d.c. output for video distributor
11: Landing call CH: Monitor activation call
CN2: Monitor interface connector
12: System self-start push-button
13: Green LED supply voltage TERMINALS FOR MONITOR TYPE 6600
V1: For systems with coaxial cable, input for connection of 1: Interphone receiver
the 75 Ohm video cable. For systems without coaxial 3: Common audio line
cable, input for connection of the V1 signal.
V2: For systems with coaxial cable, output for connection of 4: Button for auxiliary services (related to terminal 5)
the 75 Ohm video cable or connection of the load resi- 5: Power supply negative
stance of 75 Ohm in the last monitor of the cable riser. 6: Power supply positive (minimum input voltage 15V D.C.)
V3: For systems without coaxial cable, input for connection
of the V2 signal. 7: Second auxiliary function or self-start (its operation
M: Ground for terminals V1, V2, V3. is controlled by the microswitch placed on the monitor
N.B. The monitors type 6300, 6500 have a microswitch rear side).
on the back for setting the connection "coaxial 8: Call from entrance panel
cable/without coaxial cable" and one for the setting “con- 9: Lock push-button
versation privacy/without conversation privacy” (type 10: 12V D.C. output for video distributor
6300,6303,6500). 11: Landing call
INTERPHONE 6200
CN1: Monitor interface connector 12: Push-button for the audio activation (or self-start with
7: Lock release push-button switch in “A” position)
AU: Monitor self-start control 13: Green LED supply voltage (18V D.C. (max) positive voltage
1: Interphone receiver imput)
V: For systems with coaxial cable, input for connection of
2: Interphone microinterphone the 75 Ohm video cable.
3: Phonic common M: Ground for terminals V.
6E: Entrance panel call NOTE: Monitor type 6600 dispose on the rear of a micro-
6: Intercommunicating call switch for the switching of the "auxiliary (position A)/self-
6P: Apartment landing call
6S: Ringtone activation output start (position B)" function of push-button .
POWER SUPPLY TERMINALS SUGGESTED CONDUCTOR COLOUR

(Ref. Cable type 61/001)
1: Interphone receiver SKY BLUE

2: Interphone microphone WHITE CONNECTIONS TO
3: Common interphone line PINK MONITORS +
-: Negative terminal of monitor supply voltage BLACK SECT. 1mm
INTERPHONES
+: Positive terminal of 18V D.C. 0.8A monitor supply RED SECT. 1mm
S: Control of lock relay BROWN
M: Block of coaxial cable shield

V1-V2: Block of video signal (on coax cable) COAXIAL CABLE
6: Common interphone line for speech unit PINK

7: Speech unit microphone WHITE
8: Speech unit loudspeaker SKY BLUE
+T: 13V D.C. 0.3A camera supply voltage ORANGE
-: Negative line for camera supply voltage BLACK SECT. 1mm
CONNECTION TO
AM: Short-circuited to negative line, blocks monitor activation
0: 0V (with reference to terminal 16) BROWN CAMERA ENTRANCE
15: 15V rectified voltage (selector in “A” position).or 250mA RED SECT. 1mm PANEL
alternated (selector in “B” position on continuous
operation)
S1: Wiring to electric lock BLUE SECT. 1mm
C1: Speech unit electronic call GREEN
C2: Electronic call outside apartment landing call WHITE/GREEN
119
"SOUND SYSTEM" SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 AND WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. VC4306) WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY

Diag. ref. type Denomination Quantity
A 6000 + 6200 + 6145, 6003 + 6200 + 6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6321, 6500, 6501, 6401, 6303, 6600, 6700 Monitor n
C Serie 3300, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter box 2550 Entrance panel 1
D 559, 559A,559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571
or 559C and 570C Camera 1
F - Electric lock 12V AC 1
G - Additional door lock button 1
n - Number of calls from entrance panel n
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices (PTC) Lighting of entrance panel:
switch off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has type 6680 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
been eliminated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protec- Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V
tion device to cool down so that the unit can return to nor- 3W bulbs;
mal operation. Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16
24V 3W bulbs.
Note: The value in

be added in case of
outdoor call.
A COAX 6[+1]+( n-4 )

A
COAX
7[+1] 7[+1]
2 2
H 6+(n-2) H
B COAX
COAX B
7[+1] 7[+1]
2 2
COAX
H 6[+1]+n H
9+n+COAX
G
C+D
ELVOX
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other 2

standard connection for the various components of F
the system, on pages 157 to 178. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1229
120
WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 AND WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY
®
B/W
type
MONITOR
6000 +
MONITOR CABLE RISER
CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
*
Connect 75 Ohm resistor (sup-
type 6200 +
type 6145
plied) to the last monitor, between
* V1
M
terminals V2-M.
V2
M
V3
**
CN1
+A
+
-
N.B.
COLOUR +D The monitors have a microswitch
CH
MONITOR on the back, set it to “without con-
CN2
type 6003 + versation privacy”.

type 6200 +
CN1
type 6145 7
AU
1
2
3
5
***
N.B.
6E The monitors have a microswitch
C 6
B/W MONITOR A 6P on the back, set it to “without con-
6S E
type 6300 versation privacy” (position B).
type 6301
type
type
type
6320
6321
6401
** V2
V1
M
V3 CABLE
type 6500 13
type 61/001
type 6501 12 N.B.
11 type 61/003
COLOUR MONITOR 10 E The monitors have a microswitch
9
type 6303 8 on the back (or underneath) for
7
6
connection "with coaxial/without
5 coaxial"; set the microswitch to
4
3 "coaxial".
2
1
*** M
V
13
12
N.B.
11
10 E In the event of buzzing on the
9
8 audio line, move the switching
COLOUR MONITOR 7
6 module "A-B" located under the
type 6600 5
4 cover to position "A".
type 660A 3 Mains
type 6700 2
1 PRI
A
POWER SUPPLY
B type 6680
CH CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
CABLE
type 61/001
type 61/003
A- Video entrance panel, 8000, 8100, 3300

PATAVIUM and letter box 2550/301-302 series
D- Camera with speech unit L1
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, A

3
570G, 571, 559C and 570C+930A 4
6
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb 7
8
(3x24V 3W max.) CT
10x24V 3W with type M832 D +T
V
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 M
ELVOX
B
C
DIAGRAM N° vc4306R1
121
"SOUND SYSTEM" SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER
SUPPLY TYPE 6680, WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY WITH CAMERA TYPE 559A E 559B
®
MONITOR CABLE RISER

CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
*
* V1
M
V2
M
terminals V2-M.
MONITOR B/N V3
Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
Type 6145
CN1
+A
+
-
+D
**
N.B.
CH
The monitors have a microswitch
CN2
on the back, set it to “without con-

versation privacy”.
CN1
7
COLOUR MONITOR AU
1
Type 6003 +
Type 6200 +
Type 6145
2
3
5
6E
***
N.B.
C 6
A 6P
6S E on the back, set it to “without con-
versation privacy” (position B).
V2
MONITOR B/N
Type 6300
Type 6301
** V1
M
V3
CABLE
Type 61/001
13
Type 6320 12
Type 61/003
Type 6321 11 N.B.
10 E
Type 6401 9 The monitors have a microswitch
8 on the back (or underneath) for
Type 6500 7
Type 6501 6 connection "with coaxial/without
5
COLOUR MONITOR 4 coaxial"; set the microswitch to
3
Type 6303 2
"coaxial".
1
*** V
13
12
11 N.B.
10 E
9 In the event of buzzing on the
8 audio line, move the switching
7
6 module "A-B" located under the
COLOUR MONITOR 5
4 cover to position "A".
Type 6600 3
Type 660A 2
1
Type 6700 Mains
PRI
A
POWER SUPPLY
B Type 6680
CH CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
CABLE
Type 61/001
Type 61/003
A- Video entrance panel, 8000, 8100, 3300

PATAVIUM and letter box 2550/301-302 series L1
B- Additional door lock button A
C- 12V~ electric lock 5
6
D- Camera with speech unit 7
8
type 559A, 559B +T
D
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb V
M
(3x24V 3W max.) -
10x24V 3W with type M832 ELVOX
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 B DIAGRAM N° vc5110R1

C
122
WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY
®
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. VC4306) WITH CONVERSATION PRIVACY

Diag. ref. type Denomination Quantity
A 6000 + 6200 + 6155 + 6145, 6003 + 6200 + 6155 + 6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6320, 6500, 6600 o 6303 Monitor n
C Serie 8000, 8100, 3300, 1200
PATAVIUM or letter box 2550 Entrance panel 1
D 559, 559A,559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571
or 559C and 570C Camera 1
F - Electric lock 12V AC 1
G - Additional door lock button 1
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices (PTC) Lighting of entrance panel:
switch off the mains voltage. Once the short circuit has type 6680 powers a maximum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
been eliminated, wait for a few minutes to allow the protec- Transformer type M832 powers a maximum of 10 24V
tion device to cool down so that the unit can return to nor- 3W bulbs;
mal operation. Transformer type M832/030 powers a maximum of 16
24V 3W bulbs.
Note: The value in

be added in case of
outdoor call.
A COAX 6[+1]+( n-4 )

A
COAX
7[+1] 7[+1]
2 2
H 6+(n-2) H
B COAX
COAX B
7[+1] 7[+1]
2 2
COAX
H 6[+1]+n H
9+n+COAX
G
C+D
ELVOX
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other 2

standard connection for the various components of F
the system, on pages 157 to 178. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1229
123
WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 AND CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
MONITOR CABLE RISER

B/W
type
MONITOR
6000 +
CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
*
type
type
6200 +
6145 +
* V1
M
terminals V2-M.
type 6155 V2
M
V3
COLOUR MONITOR
type 6003 +
type 6200 +
CN1
+A
+
-
+D
**
N.B.
type 6145 + CH
CN2
type 6155
on the back, set it to “witht con-
CN1
7
AU AU
1 1
2 2
C
3
5
6E
6
3
6E
E
***
N.B.
A 6P
6S F The monitors have a microswitch
on the back, set it to “with conver-
** V2
V1
M CABLE
sation privacy” (position A).
V3 type 61/001
13
B/W MONITOR 12 type 61/003
11
type 6300 10 F N.B.
9
type 6320 8 The monitors have a microswitch
type 6500 7
6 on the back (or underneath) for
5
COLOUR MONITOR 4 connection "with coaxial/without
3
type 6303 2
coaxial"; set the microswitch to
1 "coaxial".
*** M
V
13
12
N.B.
11 In the event of buzzing on
10 F the audio line, move the
9
8
7
switching module "A-B"
6 located under the cover to
COLOUR MONITOR 5
4 position "A".
type 6600 3 Mains
type 660A 2
1 PRI
type 6700 A
POWER SUPPLY
B type 6680
CH CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
CABLE
type 61/001
type 61/003
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000 and 8100 series L1

B- Additional door lock button A
4
7
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 8
CT
570G, 571, 559C and 570C+930A D +T
V
E- Card for conversation privacy type 6155 M
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb ELVOX
(3x24V 3W max.) B
10x24V 3W with type M832 C
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 DIAGRAM N° vc4476R2
"SOUND SYSTEM" SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH
POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6680 CONVERSATION PRIVACY WITH CAMERA 559A AND 559B ®
MONITOR CABLE RISER

CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V
*
* V1
M
V2
M
terminals V2-M.
MONITOR B/N V3
Type 6000 +
CN1
+A
Type 6200 + +
Type 6145
-
+D
CH
CN2
**
N.B.
on the back, set it to “witht con-
CN1
7 versation privacy”.
MONITOR COLORI AU AU
1 1
Type 6003 + 2 2
3 3
Type 6200 +
Type 6145
C
A
5
6E
6
6P
6E
E ***
N.B.
6S F
on the back, set it to “with conver-
V2 sation privacy” (position A).
** V1
M
V3
13
CABLE
12 Type 61/001
11
MONITOR B/N 10 F Type 61/003
Type 6300 9 N.B.
8
Type 6320 7 The monitors have a microswitch
Type 6500 6
on the back (or underneath) for
5
4 connection "with coaxial/without
COLOUR MONITOR 3
Type 6303 2 coaxial"; set the microswitch to
1
"coaxial".
M N.B.
V
** * 13
12
11
10 F
In the event of buzzing on
the audio line, move the
switching module "A-B"
9
8 located under the cover to
7
COLOUR MONITOR 6
position "A".
5
Type 6600 4
Type 660A 3
2
Type 6700 1
Mains
PRI
CH CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 V POWER SUPPLY
A
B Type 6680
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
CABLE
Type 61/001
Type 61/003
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000

and 8100, PATAVIUM series
B- Additional door lock button L1
C- 12V~ electric lock A
6
type 559A, 559B 7
8
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb +T
D
(3x24V 3W max.) V
M
10x24V 3W with type M832 -
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 ELVOX
B
C DIAGRAM N° vc5388
125
INTERCOMMUNICATING VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH
SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Use power supply type 6680, which features a dual electronic tone generator which replaces the traditional alternating current call
on a buzzer or bell. The sound signal has two different tones (on terminals C1-C2), enabling users to immediately identify which
point is calling (C1 for the main entrance panel, C2 for outdoor call push-button). This solution also makes it possible to use a sin-
gle loudspeaker built into the monitor itself to produce the sound. Power supply in extinguishing ABS housing; preset for mounting
on cases with 8-DIN module support or with expanding plugs with screws. The system is fitted with a changeover switch to main-
tain conversation privacy in relation to speech unit.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The video door entry system consists of one camera entrance panel, one power supply and one or more monitors. When a push-
button of entrance panel is pressed, the ringtone rings in the corresponding apartment. Almost immediately the image of the cal-
ler appears on the monitor. A number of built-in infrared LEDs lights the coverage area when using a B/W camera, or LED with
white light when using a colour camera. If desired, the user may simply raise the interphone, communicate with the caller and, if
appropriate, activate the door lock release. In this case the the door-opening time may be varied from 1 to 30 seconds using poten-
tiomenter P3. The system turns itself off automatically after a preset time, adjustable from 30 to 90 seconds using potentiometer
P1 inside the power supply.
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS:
When the external call signal is heard, pick up the interphone to directly communicate outside. 60 seconds after the start of the
conversation an electronic device within the switching module type 935A switches communication to internal only, and so to con-
tinue the conversation it is necessary to call again from the entrance panel.
IINTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Lift interphone and press push-button corresponding to desired interphone. Speech unit is automatically excluded.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. vc3242-vc4354)

Diagram
A 6000+6200+6145+6152, 6003+6200+6145+6152, Monitor 2÷8
C 6200 + 6152 Interphone 1÷7
D Series 3300, 8100, 1200
8000, PATAVIUM or letter box 2550/301 Entrance panel 1
E 559, 559A,559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571,
559C and 570C Camera 1
F 935A Switching module 1
n - Number of intercommunicating monitor and/or interphones 1÷8
WIRING AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The wiring diagram illustrates a system including one monitor, six intercom-
municating interphones and one speech unit. Depending on requirements, C C A
fewer or more monitors or interphones may be installed, provided they do
not collectively exceed the seven units corresponding to the interphone
push-buttons. When fewer than 7 units are installed, only connect the termi- 2
nal blocks of the intercom units used and not the call wires of surplus units.
9[+1]+COAX
Example: in a 3-unit intercommunicating installation (one monitor and two 6+n 6+n I
interphones), only connect terminals 1 to 11 as shown in the following dia-
gram.
The monitors and interphones are fitted with a loudspeaker designed to
receive differentiated electronic calls from both the landing unit and other B
intercommunicating units. Entrance panel (C1) and outdoor (C2) calls are
F
generated by power supply type 6680, while intercommunicating (C3) calls 10+COAX
are routed by switch type 935A.
In the event of a short circuit, the Note: The value in
Lighting of entrance panel: 2
protection devices (PTC) square bracket is to
type 6680 powers a maximum of
switch off the mains voltage. Once be added in case of
3 24V 3 W bulbs
the short circuit has been eliminated, outdoor call. D+E
Transformer type M832 powers a H
wait for a few minutes to allow the maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs;
protection device to cool down so Transformer type M832/030
that the unit can return to normal powers a maximum of 16 24V 3W
operation. bulbs. ELVOX
2
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do
G
various components of the system, on pages 157 to 178. BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1230
126
INTERCOMMUNICATING VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM FOR SINGLE RESIDEN-
CE WITH POWER SUPPLY 6680 AND SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®

* plied) to the last monitor, bet-
ween terminals V2-M. B/W MONITOR COLOUR MONITOR A- Video entrance panel
type 6000 + type 6003 + 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200
INTERPHONE SETTING type 6200 + type 6200 + PATAVIUM and letter box series
type 6200 + 6152 FOR MONITOR type 6145 + type 6145 + B- Additional door lock button
type 6152 type 6152
V
V1
M
D- Camera with speech unit
V2 type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
75 Ohm M
V3 570G, 571, 559C and 570C+930A
7 7
* +A E- Landing call push-button
CN1
+ +
AU
- - L1- entrance panel illumination bulb
1 1
+D
2 2
CH
(3x24V 3W max.)
3 3
5 10x24V 3W with type M832
CN 2
6E 6E
C 6 6 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
A 6P
CN2
6S
S 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
4 4A AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
COLOUR CONDUCTOR
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4C
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 9
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4 CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
10 10 C2 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
4 E 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A
11 11
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
4 C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
12 12 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
4
10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
INTERPHONE
13 13
11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12 type
4 12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
14 14 13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14 6200+6152
4 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INTERPHONE SETTING
N.B.
type 6200 + 6152
In the event of buz-
SECONDARY
zing on the audio
line, move the swit-
ching module "A-B"
SWITCHING
located under the
MODULE
CABLE cover to position "A".
7 7
type 935A Mains
type 61/001
AU
1 type 61/003 PRI
1 POWER SUPPLY
2 2 A
3 3 B type 6680
5
6E CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 8 7 0 15 M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
6E
C 6 6
A 6P
6S
4
8
4 4C
9 9
4
10 10
4
11 11
4
12 12
4
13 13
4
CABLE
14 14 type 61/001
4 type 61/003
15 15
N.B.
Before connecting the
Fig. 1 The monitors have
system, fit the buttons L1
a microswitch on
type 6152 in their seat in
the back for con- A
the interphone. Connect 3
nection "with 4
the jumpers 6
coaxial/without 7
as shown in the diagram. 8
coaxial"; set the CT
Then distribute the keys in
microswitch to D +T
the interphone housing, V
"coaxial". M
removing the plastic that
ELVOX
holds them as shown in

B
figure 1. C
DIAGRAM N° vc3242
127
EXAMPLES OF WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITORS AND INTERPHONES FOR
SINGLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®
Fig. 1 - Two monitors and seven intercommunicating interphones.

75ohm
V1 V1 MONITOR B/W
V
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
* Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
Type 6145 +
V3 V3
Type 6152
CN1
+A +A
+ + + COLOUR MONITOR
- - -
+D +D Type 6003 +
CH CH Type 6200 +
Type 6145 +
CN2
CN2
Type 6152
CN1
CN1
S 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 INTERPHONE
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Type 6200 +6152
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connect 75 Ohm resistor (supplied) to

Fig. 2
* the last monitor, between terminals V2-
M.
Three monitors and five intercommunicating interphones.
75ohm
V1 V1 V1 MONITOR B/W
V
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
* Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
V3 V3 V3 Type 6145 +
CN1
Type 6152
+A +A +A
+ + + +
- COLOUR MONITOR
- - -
+D +D +D Type 6003 +
CH CH CH Type 6200 +
CN2
CN2
CN2
Type 6145 +
Type 6152
CN1
CN1
CN1
S 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 INTERPHONE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Type 6200 + 6152
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER SUPPLY
Type 6582
- +U +I A B C D PRI
Mains
DIAGRAM N° vc4354-1
128
EXAMPLES OF WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITORS AND INTERPHONES FOR
SINGLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A
®
Fig. 3 75ohm MONITOR B/W

Four monitors and four V1 V1 V1 V1
intercommunicating inter-
phones.
V
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
M
V2
M
* Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
Type 6145 +
V3 V3 V3 V3
Type 6152
CN1
+A +A +A +A
+ + + + + COLOUR
- - - - - MONITOR
+D +D +D +D
CH CH CH CH Type 6003 +
Type 6200 +
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
Type 6145 +
Type 6152
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
S 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 6 11 11 11 11 11
11 11 11 6 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 6 13 13 13
13 13 13 13 13 6 14 14
14 14 14 14 14 14 6 15
Connect 75 Ohm resistor 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
* (supplied) to the last monitor,

between terminals V2-M.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Mains
PRI 15 O +I C +U - - +U +I
CALL
POWER SUPPLY REPEATER
Type 6583 Type 934
A B C PRI
Fig. 4 Mains
Five monitors and three intercommunicating interphones.
Notes: 75ohm MONITOR B/W
These wiring diagrams
refer to a single residen- V
V1
M
V2
M
V1
M
V2
M
V1
M
V2
M
V1
M
V2
M
V1
M
V2
M
* Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
Type 6145 +
ce installation. Call line V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
Type 6152
CN1
(monitor terminal no. +A +A +A +A +A

+
COLOUR
6E) allows simultaneous + + + + +
MONITOR
- - - - - -
activation of all applian- +D +D +D +D +D
Type 6003 +
CH CH CH CH CH
ces. On installations for Type 6200 +
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
several intercommuni- Type 6145 +

cating apartments, ter- Type 6152
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
minal no. 6E of each S 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

monitor will be connec- AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ted to entrance panel 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
corresponding push- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
button. For a simulta- CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
neous activation of 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
several monitors use an 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
additional power supply C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
type 6582 for each 9 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
monitor starting from the 10 10 6 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 6 11 11 11 11
3rd one or power supply 12 12 12 12 6 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 6 13 13
type 6583 for two (or 14 14 14 14 14 14 6 14
max three monitors) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 6
operating simulta- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
neously according to
Mains
shown wiring dia-
grams.If all interphones PRI 15 O +I C +U - - +U +I
CALL
and monitors should REPEATER
receive a call from the Type 934
A B C PRI
entrance panel (terminal
POWER SUPPLY Mains
no. 6E-8), it is neces-
sary to install one or Type 6583
more call repeaters type
934 (see variation). DIAGRAM N° vc4354-1
129
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM FOR SINGLE RESIDENCE WITH POWER SUPPLY 6680
AND INTERCOMMUNICATING PHONES Type 6221
®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
which point is calling (C1 for the main entrance panel, C2 for outdoor call push-button). This solution also makes it possible to
use a single loudspeaker built into the monitor itself to produce the sound. Power supply in extinguishing ABS housing; preset
for mounting on cases with 8-DIN module support or with expanding plugs with screws. The system is fitted with a changeover
switch to maintain conversation privacy in relation to speech unit.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When the entrance panel calls, the handset must be raised to communicate directly with the speech unit. After the conversation
time dwell (programmable up to 99 seconds) an electronic device set the interphones on internal mode again and it is therefo-
re necessary to make a second call to continue the conversation. To make an internal conversation, first lift the handset, dial the
number to call of interphone and then press the respective push-button ; the speech unit remains disconnected.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. vc4880)

Diagram ref. Type Denominazione Quantità
A 6221 + 6000 + 6145, 6221 + 6003 + 6145 Intercommunicating monitor 1÷n
C Series 3300
8000, PATAVIUM, 8100, 1200 Entrance panel 1
F 6935/A Switching module 1
H - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
L 6582 * Power supply 1
* IInsert the power supply with more than 16 interphones.
Outputs 0-15 or 0-AS do not support loads A A

with continuous absorption of more than 0.25 6+(n-1)+coax
A.
With power supply type 931 connect a maxi- 2
mum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs 2
With transformer type M832 connect a maxi- I 2
With transformer type M832/030 connect a
maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. 6+n+coax
In the event of a short circuit, the protection

L
devices (PTC) switch off the mains voltage.
Once the short circuit has been eliminated,
wait for a few minutes to allow the protection
device to cool down so that the unit can
return to normal operation.
F E
ITALY ITALY
N. B. The system can be completed by

adding other services. To do this, consult
the variations on the standard connection Note: 9+n+coax
relating to the various components of the The value in squa-
system, on pages 108 to 116. re bracket is to be
2
added in case of
outdoor call.
G
C+D
2
H
130
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH SEVERAL INTERCOMMUNICATING
NETWORKS AND SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®
Monitor Monitor
Type 6000 + Type 6003 +
NOTE:
Type 6145 + Type 6145 +
The jumper P1 must be cut in all inter-
Type 6221 Type 6221
* V1
M
V1
M
phones of each group, but one
V2 V2
V3 75 Ohm V3
M M
TO MONITOR
- -
+ +
6S 6S
PI PI
1 1 Mains
3 3
PRI
4 4
5
L
6E
5
L
6E
Power supply
Type 6582 *
N.B.
6P 6P - +U +I A B C D
Connect for more than 16
1 2 interphones
F F
N.B.
In the event of buzzing on the
audio line, move the switching
module "A-B" located under the
cover to position "A"
Mains Mains
CH CH V + - 5 4 3 1
PRI PRI
Switching module Power supply
A
Type 6935/A Type 6680
B
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
A- Video entrance panel

3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM
and letter box series
L1
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, A
570G, 571, 559C and 570C 3
4
F- Landing call push-button 6
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb 7
8
(3x24V 3W max.) CT
10x24V 3W with type M832 D +T
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 V
M
ELVOX
B
C N° vc4815R1
131
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH SEVERAL INTERCOMMUNICATING
NETWORKS AND SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The power supply used is type 6680; it is equipped with a double electronic tone generator which replaces the conventional AC
call on a buzzer or bell. The acoustic signal has two different tones (present at terminals C1-C2), thus allowing immediate iden-
tification of the point from which the call is made (main entrance, gate, garage, etc.); the sound is emitted by a single loudspea-
ker built into the monitor. Each network of intercommunicating monitors and interphones uses a switching module type 935A,
powered by a transformer type 832/030, which serves to maintain conversation privacy towards users in other apartments with
intercommunicating or non-intercommunicating networks. The floor distributor transmits the video signal from the camera to the
monitor. The distributor is powered by the monitor switched on by the external call.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The video door entry system is made up of an entrance panel with camera and speech unit, a power supply and one or more
monitors. When a visitor presses a push-button on the entrance panel, an acoustic signal is emitted in the corresponding apart-
ment; the image of the person who made the call appears almost instantaneously on the monitor. A number of infrared LEDs for
B/W filming, or white light LEDs for colour filming, built into the entrance panel, light the viewing series of the camera. Infrared
lighting is not visible to the human eye. The user, if he wants, can communicate with the outside by lifting the interphone and, if
he sees fit, can operate the door lock release button: the energisation time of the lock can be changed from 1 to 30 seconds with
the potentiometer P3.
After a pre-set time, which can be programmed to between 30 and 90 seconds with the potentiometer P1 located in the power
supply, the system.switches off automatically. If the visitor presses the push-button of another user, the monitor called previously
switches off automatically without waiting for the time-out. The diagram shows the connection of several intercommunicating net-
works belonging to the same system: each user can thus intercommunicate freely with the devices in his own
apartment, with conversation privacy both towards the speech unit and towards the users in the other apartments.
Several intercommunicating conversations can take place simultaneously in the apartments or, while intercommunicating con-
versations are in progress, other users in the same building can communicate without interference with the speech unit.
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS:
When the external call signal is heard, pick up the interphone to communicate with outside. 60 seconds after the start of the con-
versation an electronic device within the switching module type 935A switches communication to internal mode only, and so to
continue the conversation it is necessary to press one of the above buttons again.
INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Lift interphone and press push-button corresponding to desired interphone. Speech unit is automatically excluded.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. vc4374)

Diagram Ref. Type Name Quantity
A 6000+6200+6145+6152, 6003+6200+6145+6152 Monitor n
B 6200 + 6152 Interphone m
C 6680 Power supply 1
D 832/030 Transformer n
E Series 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200 or PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
F 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571,
G 935A Switching module 1÷n
H 5556/004 - 6554 Video distributor n
L - Landing call push-button 1
m - Number of intercommunicating monitors or interphones m
n - Number of entrance panel calls n
WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
The basic wiring diagram shows a system comprising one monitor and D
3 interphones intercommunicating between each other and a speech 2
6+m
9[+1]+COAX 10[+1]+COAX 6+m
unit.
In each apartment more intercommunicating monitors and/or interpho- 2 G
A B
nes may be installed provided they do not exceed collectively the 8
M
units. See wiring diagram page 83 N. VC4354. 8[+1]+(n-2)+COAX D
Should the interphone number be lower than 8, connect only terminal
9[+1]+COAX 2
6+m 6+m
blocks of the only intercommunicating interphones concerned, exclu- 10[+1]+COAX
ding the call conductors of the exceeding numbers. H

2 G
For example: with three intercommunicating interphones (one monitor 8[+1]+n+COAX A B
M
and two interphones)only connect terminal 1 to 11 as shown in the basic
wiring diagram. C
The monitors and the interphones are fitted with a loudspeaker desi- Note:
9+n+COAX
gned to receive differentiated electronic calls from both the speech unit The value in squa-
and other intercommunicating units. Entrance panel (C1) and landing re bracket is to be
2
(C2) calls are generated by power supply type 6680, while intercom- added in case of
municating calls (C3) are supplied by switching module type 935A. L outdoor call.
E+F
do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the ELVOX
various components of the system, on pages 157 to 178. 2

I
132
VIDEO DOOR ENTRYSYSTEM WITH INDEPENDENT INTERCOMMUNICATING LINES AND
SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 935A ®
Fig. 1
MONITOR CABLE RISER
CH S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 AU +D V
MAINS
PRI
Switching
module
MAINS
PRI
75 Ohm
V1
M
V2
M
* B/W MONITOR
type 6000 +
type 6200 +
type 935A V3
type 6145 +
type 6152
CN1
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 7 8 15 0 0 15 +A
+
Transformer - COLOUR MONITOR
+D
type 832/030 CH
type 6003 +
V type 6200 +
CN2
6
5
type 6145 +
+D type 6152
CN1
S 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 Before connecting the
3 3 3 3 3 system, fit the buttons type
5 5 5 5
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 6152 in their seat in the
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E interphone. Connect the
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P
jumpers as shown in the
E 6S
8
6S
8
6S
8
6S
8 diagram. Then distribute the
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 9 9
keys in the interphone hou-
9 6 10 10 sing, removing the plastic
10 10 6 11
11 11 11 6
that holds them as shown in
figure 1.
1 2 3 4 INTERPHONE
type 6200+6152
INTERPHONE
MAINS MAINS B/W MONITOR SETTING
PRI
Switching
module
PRI
75 Ohm
V1
M
V2
M
* type 6000 +
type 6200 +
type 6145 +
Type 6200 +
6152
type 935A V3
type 6152
CN1
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 7 8 15 0 0 15 +A 7 7
+ AU
Transformer -
COLOUR MONITOR 1 1
type 832/030 +D type 6003 + 2 2
CH 3 3
V type 6200 + 5
CN2
6 type 6145 + 6E 6E
5 A 6 6
+D type 6152 C 6P 6P
CN1
6S 6S
S 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU 4 4A
1 1 1 1 1 8
2 2 2 2 2
4 4C
3 3 3 3 3
9 9
5 5 5 5
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E 10 10
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P
4
6S 6S 6S 6S
E 8 8 8 8
11 11
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4
6 9 9 9 12 12
9 6 10 10
4
10 10 6 11
13 13
11 11 11 6
4
1 2 3 4 INTERPHONE 14 14
type 6200+6152 4
15 15
DISTRIBUTOR N.B.
type 5556/004 In the event of buzzing MAINS
75ohm V4
V3 type 6554 on the audio line, move PRI
V2 A POWER SUPPLY
V1 the switching module B type 6680
75ohm V
V "A-B" located under the M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
-
+ cover to position "A"
CABLE
type 61/001
type 61/003
Connect 75 Ohm resi-
* stor (supplied) to the
3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 and letter box
2550/301-302 series
last monitor, between B- Additional door lock button
terminals V2-M. C- 12V~ electric lock L1
A
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 3
4
570G, 571, 559C and 570C 6
7
E- Landing call push-button 8
CT
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb D +T
V
(3x24V 3W max.) M
DIAGRAM N° vc4374 16X24V 3W with type 832/030 B

C
133
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO OR THREE SPEECH UNITS, ONE
VIDEO ONLY WITH SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5590/001 OR 5590/303 ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
which point is calling (C1 for the main entrance with panel, C2 for the outdoor call push-button). This solution also makes it pos-
sible to use a single loudspeaker built in the interphone itself to produce the sound.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When a caller presses a call push-button on an external entrance panel, the audio/video function and door lock release are auto-
matically activated for that entrance panel while the other entrance panels remain disabled. The last call made is given priority
over all preceding calls.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC3031-VC2193)

Diagram
A 6000+6200+6145, 6003+6200+6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6303, 6401, 6500 e 6501 Monitor n
D 6600 Monitor n
D 5590/001, 5590/303 Switching module 1
F Series 3300, 8100, 1200
8000, PATAVIUM or letter box 2550/301-302 Video entrance panel 1
G 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571,
559C e 570C (colour) Camera 1
H Series 3300, 8100, 8000 or PATAVIUM Audio entrance panel 1÷2
I 930, 930A Speech unit 1÷2
L - Additional push-button for lock 1
M - Electric lock 12V A.C. 2÷3
N - Landing call push-button 2÷3
n - entrance panel calls number 2÷3
In the event of a short cir- Lighting of entrance panel: COAX 7[+1]

cuit, the protection devices type 6680 powers a maxi-
(PTC) mum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs
switch off the mains voltage. Transformer type M832 C 2
Once the short circuit has powers a maximum of 10
been eliminated, wait for a 24V 3W bulbs; N 6[+1]+(n-2)
few minutes to allow the Transformer type M832/030 COAX
7
protection device to cool powers a maximum of 16
down so that the unit can 24V 3W bulbs.
return to normal operation. 2
A COAX
N 7[+1]+(n-1)
COAX 7[+1]
Note:
2 COAX
The value in squa- B
re bracket is to be 6[+1]+n
added in case of N
outdoor call.
E
D
ATTENTION 7+n 9+n+COAX 7+n
The installation can also operate with conversation privacy.
When using interphone type 6200 add circuit board type 6155.
Monitors type 6300, 6320, 6303 and 6500 are enabled by means 2 2 2
of a microswitch located on the back.
L L L
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do
this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the R
H+I ELVOX
F+G R
H+I
various components of the system, on pages 157 to 178. 2 2 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1237 M M M
134
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS, ONE VIDEO ONLY AND WITH
SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5590/001
®
N.B.
* In the event of buzzing on the
Connect 75 Ohm resistor module "A-B" located under the
(supplied) to the last cover to position "A"
MAINS
monitor, between termi-
PRI
nals V2-M. A
B type 6680 type 5590/001
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 0 C1 7 8 S - AM 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2
N.B.
The monitors have a
microswitch on the
back for connection
"with coaxial/without
coaxial"; set the micro-
switch to "coaxial".
1 2 3 - + S V CH CH CH CH C2
M
V
13
MONITOR 12
type 6600 11
10 F L1
type 660A 9
type 6700 8
7 A 3
6
4
5
6
4
7
3
8
2
CT
1
+T
D V
MONITOR
M
type 6300
type 6301 V2
ELVOX
type 6320 V1 B
M C
type 6321 V3
type 6401 13
12
type 6303 11
type 6500 10 F
9
type 6501 8
7
6
5
A1
4
3
L1
2
1 3
4
E 5
6
7
*
V1
M
ELVOX
8
V2 B
M C
V3
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, PATA-
CN1
+A
+ VIUM, 8100, 1200 and letter box
-
+D 2550/301-302 series
CH
A1- Audio entrance panel 3300, 8000, PATA-
CN2
VIUM, 8100, 1200 and letter box

2550/301-302 series
CN1
7
ATTENTION: B- Additional door lock button
AU
1
The installation can also C- 12V~ electric lock
2
3 operate with conversation D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A
5
6E privacy. E- Camera with speech unit
A 6 type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
C 6P When using interphone type
6S F 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
6200 add circuit board type
6155. F- Landing call push-button
COLOUR MONITOR 1 2 3 - + S V CH C2 Monitors type 6300, 6320, L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
type 6003 + 6303 and 6500 are enabled (3x24V 3W max.)
type 6200 + type 6145 MONITOR CABLE RISER
by means of a microswitch 10x24V 3W with type M832
located on the back. 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
B/W MONITOR
type 6000 +
type 6200 + type 6145 DIAGRAM N° vc3031
135
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS, ONE VIDEO ONLY AND WITH SWIT-
CHING MODULE TYPE 5590/001 WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES ®
75ohm MONITOR B/W

A- Video entrance panel 3300, 1200, 8000,
V1
M
V1
M Type 6000 + PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box
V V2
M
V2
M
Type 6200 + Type 6145 2550/301-302 series
V3 V3 A1- Audio entrance panel 3300, 1200, 8000,
+A +A COLOUR MONITOR PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box
CN1
+ + + Type 6003 +
- - - 2550/301-302 series
+D +D Type 6200 + Type 6145
CH CH B- Additional door lock button
CN2
CN2
CN1 D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A
CN1
S 7 7 7 7 7
E- Camera with speech unit
AU AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1 1 1
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
2 2 2 2 2 2 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
3 3 3 3 3 3
F
5
6E
5
6E
5
6E
5
6E
5
6E
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
INTERPHONE (3x24V 3W max.)
8 8 8 8 8
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
Type 6200 10x24V 3W with type M832
6 9 9 9 9
CH 9 6 10 10 10 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
10 10 6 11 11
11 11 11 6 12
12 12 12 12 6
1 2 3 4 5
N.B.
SWITCHING In the event of buzzing
MODULE on the audio line, move
the switching module "A-
B" located under the
RETE
PRI
V S 6 5 3 2 1 C2 AU C3 CH POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING MODULE
Type 935A A
B Type 6680 Type 5590/001
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 8 7 0 15 M1 V1 M2 V2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 0 C1 7 8 S - AM 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2
A L1
3
4
6
7
8
CT
+T
D V
M
ELVOX
B
C
A1
L1
3
4
E 5
6
7
ELVOX
8
B DIAGRAM N° vc5047
C
136
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS, ONE VIDEO ONLY AND WITH SWITCHING MODULE
TYPE 5590/001 WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES WITH SWITCHING MODULE Type 6935/A
®
V1
M
75 Ohm
V1
M
* V1
M
V1
M
V1
M
INTERPHONE
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 Type 6221
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
TO MONITOR
M M M M M
- - - - -
+ + + + +
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
PI PI PI PI PI
1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
L L L L L
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P Mains
F PRI
1 2 3 4 5 POWER SUPPLY
MONITOR B/W COLOUR MONITOR Type 6582
Type 6000 + Type 6003 + - +U +I A B C D
Connect for more of
Type 6221 + Type 6145 Type 6221 + Type 6145 16 interphones
N.B.
In the event of buzzing
on the audio line, move
Mains Mains
CH V + - 5 4 3 1
PRI PRI
SWITCHING MODULE SWITCHING MODULE SWITCHING MODULE
A
Type 6935/A Type 6680 Type 5590/001
B
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 0 C1 7 8 S - AM 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2
A- Video entrance panel 8000, 3300, PATA-

VIUM, 8100, 1200 and letter box
2550/301-302 series
A1- Audio entrance panel 8000, 3300, 1200,
PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box
2550/301-302 series
C- 12V~ electric lock L1
D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A A 3
E- Camera with speech unit 4
6
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 7
570G, 571, 559C and 570C 8
CT
F- Landing call push-button D +T
V
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb M
(3x24V 3W max.) ELVOX
10x24V 3W with type M832 B

16X24V 3W with type 832/030 C
N.B.
*
Connect 75 Ohm resistor
The monitors have a (supplied) to the last A1
microswitch on the monitor, between termi- L1
back for connection nals V2-M. 3
"with coaxial/without 4
E 5
coaxial"; set the micro- 6
7
switch to "coaxial". 8
ELVOX
C
137
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH THREE OUTDOOR UNITS, ONE VIDEO
ONLY AND WITH SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5590/303 ®
MAINS
N.B.
PRI
In the event of buzzing A
on the audio line, move B type 6680 type 5590/303
the switching module "A- M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 7 8 S - AM 0 C1 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2 7 8 S3 P3

*
Connect 75 Ohm
resistor (supplied) to
the last monitor, bet-
ween terminals V2-M.
1 2 3 - + C2 S V CH CH CH CH
L1
M A
V 3
13 4
MONITOR 12 6
type 6600 11 7
10 F 8
type 660A 9 CT
type 6700 8
7
D +T
V
6 M
5
4 ELVOX
3
2 B
1 C
MONITOR
type 6300
type 6301 V2
V1
type 6320
type 6321
M A1
V3
type 6401 13
12 L1
type 6303 11
type 6500 10 F 3
9 4
type 6501 8 E 5
7 6
6 7
5 8
4 ELVOX
3
2
1 B
C
M
*
V1
A1
V2
M
V3 L1
CN1
+A 3
+ 4
-
E 5
+D 6
CH 7
8
CN2
ELVOX
B
CN1
7 C
AU
1
2
A- Video entrance panel 8000, 3300, 1200, 8100
3 and letter box 2550/301-302 series
5
6E A1- Audio entrance panel 8000, 3300, 1200, 8100
A 6
C 6P
ATTENTION: and letter box 2550/301-302 series
6S F B- Additional door lock button
COLOUR MONITOR The installation can
type 6003 + also operate with con- C- 12V~ electric lock
type 6200 + 1 2 3 - + C2 S V CH
versation privacy. D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A
type 6145 MONITOR CABLE RISER E- Camera with speech unit
When using interphone
B/W MONITOR type 6200 add circuit type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
type 6000 + 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
type 6200 + board type 6155.
type 6145 Monitors type 6300, F- Landing call push-button
6320, 6303 and 6500 L1- entrance panel illumination bulb
are enabled by means (3x24V 3W max.)
of a microswitch loca- 10x24V 3W with type M832
DIAGRAM N° vc2193 ted on the back. 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
138
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH THREE OUTDOOR UNITS, ONE VIDEO ONLY AND WITH
SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5590/303 WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES ®
MONITOR B/W
75ohm Type 6000 +
V1 V1
M M Type 6200 + A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, 1200,
V V2 V2
M M
Type 6145
V3 V3 PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box
+A +A COLOUR 2550/301-302 series
CN1
+ + +
- - -
MONITOR A1- Audio entrance panel 3300, 8000, 1200,
+D +D
Type 6003 +
CH CH
Type 6200 +
CN2
CN2
Type 6145 2550/301-302 series
INTERPHONE B- Additional door lock button
CN1
CN1
S 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU
Type 6200 C- 12V~ electric lock
1 1 1 1 1
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
5 5 5 5
CH 6E 6E 6E 6E E- Camera with speech unit
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P
F 6S 6S 6S 6S type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A
C3
8
4C
8
4C
8
4C
8
4C
570G, 571, 559C and 570C
6
9
9
6
9
10
9
10
10 10 6 11
11 11 11 6 L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
1 2 3 4 (3x24V 3W max.)
N.B. 10x24V 3W with type M832
In the event of buz- 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
zing on the audio
SWICHING line, move the swit-
MODULE
ching module "A-B"
located under the
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY SWICHING MODULE
Type 935A A
B Type 6680 Type 5590/303
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 8 7 0 15 M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 7 8 S - AM 0 C1 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2 7 8 S3 P3
L1
A
3
4
6
7
8
CT
D +T
V
M
ELVOX
B
C
A1
L1
3
4
E 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
B
C
A1
L1
3
4
E 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
B
C DIAGRAM N° vc5211
139
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH THREE OUTDOOR UNITS, ONE VIDEO ONLY AND WITH
SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5590/303 WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES WITH
®
SWITCHING MODULE Type 6935/A
75 Ohm
V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 INTERPHONE
M M M M M
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 Type 6221
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
TO MONITOR
M M M M M
- - - - -
+ + + + +
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
PI PI PI PI PI
1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 Mains
L L L L L
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
PRI
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P POWER SUPPLY
F 1 2 3 4 5 Type 6582
MONITOR B/W COLOUR MONITOR - +U +I A B C D Connect for more
Type 6000 + Type 6003 + of 16 interphones
Type 6221 + Type 6221 +
Type 6145 Type 6145
N.B.
Mains Mains cover to position "A"
PRI PRI
SWICHING MODULE POWER SUPPLY SWICHING MODULE
A
Type 6935/A B
Type 6680 Type 5590/303
CH V + - 5 4 3 1
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 7 8 S - AM 0 C1 7 8 S1 A1 P1 7 8 S2 P2 7 8 S3 P3

2550/301-302 series
A1- Audio entrance panel 3300, 8000, 1200,
PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box L1
2550/301-302 series A
3
B- Additional door lock button 4
6
8
D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A CT
E- Camera with speech unit D +T

V
M
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
570G, 571, 559C and 570C
ELVOX
B
F- Landing call push-button C
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
10x24V 3W with type M832 A1
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 L1
3
4
E 5
6
7
8
N.B.
*
ELVOX
C
B
The monitors have a (supplied) to the last
microswitch on the monitor, between termi-
back for connection A1
nals V2-M.
"with coaxial/without L1
coaxial"; set the micro- 3
4
switch to "coaxial". E 5
6
7
8
ELVOX
C
140
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS,
AND SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5591 ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
which point is calling (C1 for the main entrance with panel, C2 for the outdoor call push-button). This solution also makes it pos-
sible to use a single loudspeaker built in the interphone itself to produce the sound.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
matically activated for that entrance panel while the other entrance panels remain disabled. The last call made is given priority
over all preceding calls.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC3046)

Diagram
A 6000+6200+6145, 6003+6200+6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6303, 6500, 6401, 6501 Monitor n
C 6600, 660A, 6700 Monitor 2
D - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
F Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
PATAVIUM or letter box 2550/301-302 Video entrance panel 2
G 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571
H 6591 Switching module 1
I 2/690 Harness to connect switching modules
and power supply 1
L - Additional push-button for lock 1
M - Landing call push-button 1
COAX
7[+1]
In the event of a short cir- Lighting of entrance panel: 2 C

cuit, the protection devices type 6680 powers a maxi-
(PTC) switch off the mains mum of 3 24V 3 W bulbs M
voltage. Once the short cir- Transformer type M832 6[+1]+(n-2)
cuit has been eliminated, powers a maximum of 10 COAX
7[+1] 7[+1]
wait for a few minutes to 24V 3W bulbs;
allow the protection device Transformer type M832/030
to cool down so that the unit powers a maximum of 16 COAX 2
can return to normal opera- 24V 3W bulbs. A
2 B
tion. M 6[+1]+n M
COAX
Note:
The value in squa-
re bracket is to be E
added in case of I
outdoor call.
H
ATTENTION: 9+n+COAX 9+n+COAX

The installation can also operate with conversation privacy.
When using monitors type 6000 and 6003 with interphone type
6200, add card type 6155.
Monitors type 6300, 6303, 6320 and 6500 are enabled by means 2 2
of a microswitch located on the back.
L L
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To do F+G F+G

this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the ELVOX ELVOX
various components of the system, on pages 157 to 178.

2 2
D D
141
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS,
AND SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5591 ®
N.B.
* Connect 75 Ohm resistor (sup-

plied) to the last monitor, bet-
In the event of buzzing on the audio line, move the switching
module "A-B" located under the cover to position "A"
NOTES
Connect white wire on the
power supply terminal C1. Harness
MAINS type 2/690
PRI
A
B
type 6680 type 6591
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 M V 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 P2
CABLE
type 61/001
type 61/003
C2 1 2 3 5 6 S V CH CH CH CH
M
V
13
MONITOR 12
A L1
11
type 6600 10 E
type 660A 9 3
8 4
type 6700 7 6
6 7
5 8
4 CT
3
2
D +T
V
1 M
ELVOX
B/W MONITOR
type 6300 B
type 6301
C
V2
V1
type 6320 M
type 6321 V3
13
type 6401 12
type 6303 11
10 E
type 6500 9
type 6501 8
7
6
5 A L1
4
3
3
2
4
1
6
7
B/W MONITOR 8
type
type
type
6000 +
6200 +
6145
*
V1
D
CT
+T
V
M
M
ELVOX
V2
M
V3 B
C
CN1
+A
+ A- Video entrance panel 8000, 3300, 8100
-
+D
1200, and letter box 2550/301-302 series
CH
ATTENTION: B- Additional door lock button
CN2
The installation can also C- 12V~ electric lock

operate with conversation D- Camera with speech unit
CN1
7 privacy. type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,

AU 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
1 When using interphone
2
type 6200 add circuit board E- Landing call push-button
3
5 type 6155. L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
6E
A 6 Monitors type 6300, 6303 (3x24V 3W max.)
C 6P
6S E 6320 and 6500 are enabled 10x24V 3W with type M832
COLOUR MONITOR by means of a microswitch 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
type 6003 + located on the back.
type 6200 + C2 1 2 3 5 6 S V CH
type 6145 MONITOR CABLE RISER DIAGRAM N° vc3046
142
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS, SWITCHING MODULE
TYPE 5591 AND INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES ®
V
V1
M
V2
75ohm
V1
M
V2 *
MONITOR B/W
Type 6000 +
Type 6200 +
*
M M
V3 V3 Type 6145 (supplied) to the last
+A +A monitor, between termi-
CN1
+ COLOUR MONITOR
+ + nals V2-M.
- - - Type 6003 +
+D +D
CH CH Type 6200 +
Type 6145
CN2
CN2
CN1
CN1
S 7 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU AU INTERPHONE
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
Type 6200
3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
8 8 8 8 8
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C
6 9 9 9 9
CH 9 6 10 10 10
10 10 6 11 11
11 11 11 6 12
12 12 12 12 6
N.B. 1 2 3 4 5
In the event of buzzing on the audio line,
move the switching module "A-B" located
under the cover to position "A”. NOTES
Connect white wire on the
power supply terminal C1.
Harness
Type 2/690
MAINS
PRI
SWITCHING A
MODULE 935A B Type 6680 Type 6591
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 8 7 0 15 M1 V1 M2 V2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 M V 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 P2
L1
A
3
4
6
7
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, 8
CT
PATAVIUM, 8100, 1200 and letter box D +T
V
2550/301-302 series M
B- Additional door lock button ELVOX
C- 12V~ electric lock B

C
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
570G, 571, 559C and 570C
L1
(3x24V 3W max.)
A
10x24V 3W with type M832 3
4
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 6
7
8
CT
+T
D V
M
ELVOX
B
C
DIAGRAM N° vc4877R1
143
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS, SWITCHING MODULE TYPE 5591 AND
INTERCOMMUNICATING MONITOR AND PHONES WITH SWITCHING MODULE 6935/A ®
V1
M
75 Ohm *
V1
M
V1
M
V1
M
V1
M
INTERPHONE
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 Type 6200
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
TO MONITOR
M M M M M
- - - - -
+ + + + +
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
PI PI PI PI PI
1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
L L L L L
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E POWER SUPPLY
PRI
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
E Type 6582
1 2 3 4 5
Connect for more
MONITOR B/W COLOUR MONITOR - +U +I A B C D
of 16 interphones
Type 6000 + Type 6003 +
Type 6200 + Type 6200 +
Type 6145 Type 6145
N.B.
In the event of buzzing on the audio
line, move the switching module "A-B"
located under the cover to position
"A”. NOTES
Connect white wire on the power
supply terminal C1. Harness
MAINS MAINS
Type 2/690
CH V + - 5 4 3 1
PRI PRI
SWITCHING MODULE A
Type 6935/A B Type 6680 Type 6591
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 M V 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 P2
N.B.
*
Connect 75 Ohm resistor A L1
The monitors have a (supplied) to the last 3
microswitch on the monitor, between termi- 4
6
back for connection nals V2-M. 7
8
"with coaxial/without CT
coaxial"; set the micro- D +T

V
M
switch to "coaxial". ELVOX
B
C

2550/301-302 series
C- 12V~ electric lock A L1
3
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 4
6
570G, 571, 559C and 570C 7
8
E- Landing call push-button CT
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb D +T

V
M
(3x24V 3W max.) ELVOX

B
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 C
DIAGRAM N° vc5337
144
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO OR MORE VIDEO SPEECH UNITS AND
SWITCHING MODULES TYPE 6592 ®
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PROGRAMMABLE SWITCHING MODULE type 6592

Automatic, programmable switching module for two outdoor stations with or without camera.
The switching module is supplied with the programming jumpers already inserted. Within the call from one of the two speech
units type 6592 automatically switches the video, audio and electric lock functions.
The switching module is suitable for operation with more than one speech unit and can be connected in series with other swit-
ching modules: a special device makes it possible to activate the system from inside by means of an additional push-button on
the monitor, and to switch all the speech units sequentially. In systems with more than one switching module, it is necessary to
include a transformer type M832 for each switching module in addition to the first (see wiring diagram).
The connections between the power supply and the switching module and between the switching modules, if there is more than
one speech unit, are facilitated by the 2 sets of wiring supplied:
2/690, in black, for connection between the power supply and the switching module
2/591, in white, for connection between switching modules
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Diagram ref. vc3048 vc3050)
A 6000+6200+6145+6152, 6003+6200 6145+6152 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6303, 6321, 6500, 6401, 6501 Monitor n
C - Additional door lock push-button 2
D - Electric lock 12V AC 1
F 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
PATAVIUM or letter box 2550/301-302 series Video entrance panel 2
G 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571,
559C and 570C Camera 2-n
H -H1 6592 Switching module 2
I 2/690 Wiring between power supply and
switching module 1
L 2/591 Wiring between switching modules 1
M M832 or 832/030 Transformer 1-n
N - Additional push-button for lock 1
O - Landing call push-button
PROGRAMMING TABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM

The device is equipped with 7 removable jumpers denomina- N° sb1232 COAX
7[+1]
ted P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and P7, which when set up to do
so, change the switching as follows:
P1 Disable self-start priority 6[+1]+(n-2)
2 C
If the jumper is removed, self-start of the monitor cuts off any com- A O
COAX
munication that may be in progress with the entrance panel. 7[+1] 7[+1]
P2 - P3 Priority 1st entrance panel - Priority 2nd entrance
panel 2 2
If the jumper is removed, the corresponding entrance panel
COAX B
O O
loses the priority (an entrance panel with priority cuts off com- COAX 6[+1]+n
munication with an entrance panel without priority). If the Note:
entrance panel does not have priority, it is advisable The value in squa-
to insert the indication "ENGAGED - WAIT, PLEASE". re bracket is to be
E
P4 - P5 Video switch-on 1st entrance panel - Video switch- added in case of
on 2nd entrance panel outdoor call. I
If the jumper is removed, the call from the corresponding
entrance panel does not switch on the monitor (this is used
when the entrance panel has no video camera). H
P6 Do not use L
M
P7 Closure on last switching module 2
When using more than one switching module, leave the jumper 9+n+COAX
9+n+COAX
in place only in the last. H1
In the event of a short circuit, Lighting of entrance panel:
the protection devices (PTC) type 6680 powers a maxi-
9+n+COAX 9+n+COAX
switch off the mains voltage. mum of 3 24V 3W bulbs
2 2
Once the short circuit has been Transformer type M832
eliminated, wait for a few minu- powers a maximum of 10 N N
tes to allow the protection devi- 24V 3W bulbs; 2 2
ce to cool down so that the unit Transformer type F+G F+G
can return to normal operation. M832/030 powers a maxi- ELVOX
N N ELVOX
mum of 16 24V 3W bulbs. 2 F+G F+G 2

N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To D ELVOX ELVOX
D
do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the 2 2
D D
145
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO VIDEO SPEECH UNITS AND
PROGRAMMABLE SWITCHING MODULES TYPE 6592
®
ATTENTION: # Programming jumpers.

The installation can also opera- See table
te with conversation privacy. NOTES
When using interphone type Connect white wire on the
6200 add circuit board type power supply terminal C1. CABLE
6155. Monitors type 6300, type 2/690
MAINS #
6303 and 6500 are enabled by
means of a microswitch located PRI
POWER SUPPLY
A CN1 CN2 SWITCHING P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
on the back. TYPE 6680
B MODULE TYPE 6592
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 A M V 15 0 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 L1 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 L2 P2
N.B.
the switching module
"A-B" located under the
cover to position "A".
*
CABLE
stor (supplied) to the
C2 1 2 3 5 6 S A V CH CH CH CH type 61/001
last monitor, between
terminals V2-M. type 61/003
M
V
13
MONITOR 12
11
type 6600 L0
10 E
type 660A 9
L1
type 6700
8 A
7
6
3
5
4
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
CT
MONITOR D +T
V
type 6300 ELVOX M
type 6301 V2
type 6320 V1
B
M
type 6321 V3 C
type 6401 13
12
type 6303 11
type 6500 10 E
9
type 6501 8
7
6
5
4
3 L0
2
L1
1 A
3
4
*
V1
M
6
7
8
CT
V2
M
D +T
V
V3 ELVOX M
CN1
+A
+
- B
+D C
CH

CN2
Note: Push-button N. 1 of type

1200, PATAVIUM and letter box 6200 corresponding to terminal
CN1
7
2550/301-302 series N. 8 and push-button with the
AU B- Additional door lock button “ ” symbol of range 6300 -
1
2 C- 12V~ electric lock 6500 corresponding to terminal
3
5 D- Camera with speech unit N. 12 if connected to terminal A
6E
A 6
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, of switching module allow the
C 6P 570G, 571, 559C and 570C self-start of the installation and
6S E
4
E- Landing call push-button the switching in cyclical sequen-
8 L0- “Engaged” lamp type 8291 for 8000 range ce of the audio-video-lock func-
B/W MONITOR entrance panel
type 6000+type tions of all outdoor stations.
6200+type 145+6152 C2 1 2 3 - + S A V CH
(3x24V 3W max.)
MONITOR CABLE RISER
COLOUR MONITOR 10x24V 3W with type M832
type 6003+type 6200 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
+type 145+6152 DIAGRAM N° vc3048
146
IMPIANTO DI VIDEOCITOFONO CON DUE POSTI ESTERNI VIDEO E COMMUTATO-
RE Type 6592 PROGRAMMABILE CON MONITOR E CITOFONI INTERCOMUNICANTI
®
75ohm
MONITORW/N
V1 V1 Type 6000 +
M M A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, 8100,
V V2 V2 Type 6200 + 1200, PATAVIUM and letter box
M M
V3 V3 Type 6145
2550/301-302 series
CN1
+A +A COLOUR MONITOR
+ + + B- Additional door lock button
- - - Type 6003 +
+D
CH
+D
CH Type 6200 + C- 12V~ electric lock
Type 6145 D- Camera with speech unit
CN2
CN2
CN1 type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
CN1
CN1
CN1
INTERPHONE 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
S 7 7 7 7
AU AU AU AU Type 6200 E- Landing call push-button
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
F- Transormer Type 832/030
5 5 5 5
E 6E 6E 6E 6E
L0- “Engaged” lamp type 8291 for 8000 range
C2 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S entrance panel
AU 4A 4A 4A 4A
8 8 8 8 L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
C3 4C 4C 4C 4C
CH 6 9 9 9 (3x24V 3W max.)
9 6 10 10
10 10 6 11 10x24V 3W with type M832
11 11 11 6
1 2 3 4
N.B.
zing on the audio line,
move the switching
module "A-B" located
SWITCHING under the cover to
MODULE position "A". NOTES
Type 935A Connect white wire on
the power supply termi- SWITCHING
nal C1. CABLE
Type 2/690
MODULE
Type 6592
Mains Mains
PRI PRI
A
POWER SUPPLY CN1 CN2 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
F B Type 6680
CH AU C1 C3 3- 2 1 8 7 15 0 0 15 M1 V1 M2 V2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 A M V 15 0 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 L1 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 L2 P2
L1
L0
A
3
4
6
7
8
CT
+T
D V
M
ELVOX
B
C
L1
L0
A
3
4
6
7
8
CT
+T
D V
M
ELVOX
B
C
DIAGRAM N° vc5069
147
IMPIANTO DI VIDEOCITOFONO CON DUE POSTI ESTERNI VIDEO E COMMUTATORE Type 6592
PROGRAMMABILE CON MONITOR E CITOFONI INTERCOMUNICANTI E COMMUTATORE Type 6935/A
®
V1
75 Ohm
V1
* V1 V1 V1
INTERPHONE
M M M M M Type 6221
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
TO MONITOR
M M M M M
- - - - -
+ + + + +
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S
PI PI PI PI PI
1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
L L L L L
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
E 1 2 3 4 5
Mains
PRI
MONITOR B/W COLOUR MONITOR POWER SUPPLY
Type 6000 + Type 6003 + Type 6582
Type 6221 + Type 6221 + - +U +I A B C D Connect for more
Type 6145 Type 6145 of 16 interphones
N.B.
zing on the audio line,
move the switching
module "A-B" located
under the cover to
position "A".
NOTES
Connect white wire
on the power supply
terminal C1. SWITCHING
CABLE
Type 2/690
MODULE
Mains Mains
PRI PRI
SWITCHING MODULE POWER SUPPLY
Type 6935/A A CN1 CN2 Type 6592 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
B Type 6680
CH V + - 5 4 3 1
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 A M V 15 0 6 7 8 - T1 M1 V1 S1 15 0 L1 P1 6 7 8 - T2 M2 V2 S2 15 0 L2 P2

1200, PATAVIUM and letter box
2550/301-302 series
L1
C- 12V~ electric lock L0
D- Camera with speech unit A
3
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 4
6
570G, 571, 559C and 570C 7
8
E- Landing call push-button CT
+T
L0- “Engaged” lamp type 8291 for 8000 range D V
M
entrance panel ELVOX

B
(3x24V 3W max.) C
L1
L0
N.B.
*
A
3
4
6
The monitors have a (supplied) to the last 7
8
microswitch on the monitor, between termi- CT
+T
back for connection D
nals V2-M. V
M
"with coaxial/without ELVOX
coaxial"; set the micro- B

switch to "coaxial". C
DIAGRAM N° vc5341
148
CABLE
N.B. NOTESConnect white wire on the type 2/690
In the event of buzzing power supply terminal C1.
on the audio line, move CABLE SWITCHING
TRANSFORMER
#
the switching module type 2/591 MODULE
type M832 *
"A-B" located under the type 832/030 type 6592
MAINS stor (supplied) to the
cover to position "A". P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 last monitor, between
PRI
A POWER SUPPLY CN1 CN2 terminals V2-M.
#
B SWITCHING MODULE
type 6680 type 6592
M1 V1 M2 V2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 A M V 15 0 6 7 8 - +T V1 M1 S1 15 0 L1 P1 6 7 8 - +T V2 M2 S2 15 0 L2 P2 PRI 12 0 A M V 15 0 6 7 8 - +T V1 M1 S1 15 0 L1 P1 6 7 8 - +T V2 M2 S2 15 0 L2 P2
MAINS
DIAGRAM N° vc3050
**
N.B.
The monitors have a
microswitch on the
back, set it to “witht con-
+ - HC HC HC HC
C2 1 2 3 S A V
* ** M L1 L1
V L0 L0
MONITOR 13
A
* **
N.B.
12 A The monitors have a
type 6600 11 3 3
type 660A 10 G 4 4 microswitch on the

9 6 6
8 7 7 back, set it to “with con-
type 6700 7 8 8
versation privacy” (posi-
6 CT CT
5 D +T D +T tion A).
4 V V
3 M M
2 ELVOX
ELVOX
1
B B
V2 C C
MONITOR V1
M N.B.
type 6300 V3
type 6301 13 The monitors have a
12
type 6320 11
microswitch on the back
** A1 F
10 G (or underneath) for con-
type 6321 +T - V M
9 L1
8 L0 nection "with
type 6303 7
type 6500 6 3 coaxial/without coaxial";
PROGRAMMABLE SWITCHING MODULES type 6592
5 4
type 6501 4 E 5
set the microswitch to
3 6 "coaxial".
type 6401 2 7
1 8
B/W MONITOR ELVOX
type 6000 +
V1 B A- Video entrance panel 8000, 8100, 3300,
type 6200 + M C
V2
type 6152 + * M # Programming jumpers. 1200, PATAVIUM and letter box
type 6145 V3
Note: Push-button N. 1 of type 6200 corre-
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TWO OR MORE VIDEO SPEECH UNITS AND
See table 2550/301-302 series

+A sponding to terminal N. 8 and push-button
CN1
+ B- Additional door lock button
-
+D
with the “ ” symbol of range 6300 - 6500 C- 12V~ electric lock
CH
corresponding to terminal N. 12 if connec- ATTENTION:
CN2
The installation can also D- Camera with speech unit
ted to terminal A of switching module allow type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
operate with conversation
CN1
7
the self-start of the installation and the swit- 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
AU
ching in cyclical sequence of the audio- privacy.
1 E- Landing call push-button
2
video-lock functions of all outdoor stations. When using interphone type
3 L0- “Engaged” lamp type 8291 for 8000 range
5 6200 add circuit board type
6E
A 6 6155. entrance panel
C 6P
COLOUR MONITOR 6S
G
Connect 75 Ohm resistor (sup- Monitors type 6320, 6300, L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
type 6003 + 4 plied) to the last monitor, bet-
type 6200 + 8 6303 and 6500 are enabled (3x24V 3W max.)
type 6152 + by means of a microswitch 10x24V 3W with type M832
®
type 6145 C2 1 2 3 - + S A V CH
located on the back.
MONITOR CABLE RISER
149
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM IN BUILDING COMPLEX: CONNECTION OF MAIN
ENTRANCE PANEL AND TWO OR MORE SECONDARY ENTRANCE PANELS ®
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The installation allows connection of various apartment blocks with a main speech unit. Every single block may be equipped with
an entrance panel with or without camera and monitors in each apartment. Main speech unit may have a camera entrance panel
with names of all users in all buildings. Switching module type 6594 in every apartment block, selects audio-video-door-lock
connection of calling entrance panel (main and secondary). Every building is thus perfectly independent and enables simulta-
neous communication of monitors, in every apartment with its own entrance panel.
N.B.:Power supplier type 6680/V03 has the same features and functions as power supplier type 6680. It replaces power sup-
plier type 6680 in “building complex” installations.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC1930-VC4356-VC4357)

A 6000+6200+6145, 6003+6200+6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6303, 6500, 6401, 6501 Monitor n
C 5556/004 Video distributor 1
D 6582 Power supply 1
E 6680/V03 Power supply n
F Video entrance panel series 3300, 8100, 1200 Main entrance panel and
8000 or PATAVIUM video secondary entrance panel n
F1 Audio secondary entrance series 3300, 8100, Main entrance panel and
1200, 8000 or PATAVIUM audio secondary entrance panel 1÷n
G type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570, 570G, 571
559C and 570C Camera n
G1 930 or 930A Speech unit n
H 6594 Switching module n
I 6584 Power supply 1
L - Electric lock 12V A.C. n
M - Additional push-button for lock n
N 5556/004 - 6554 Distributor n
O Landing call push-button n
m - Number of users 1st building m
n - Number of users 2nd building n
o - Number of users 3rd building o
x - Number of buildings x
A complete diagram is obtained by putting basic diagram vc1930 together with vc4356 or vc4357.
COAX COAX
6[+1]+(m-2) C 6[+1]+(n-2) B
7[+1] B 7[+1]
C 2 7[+1] 2 7[+1]
6[+1]+o+COAX
O 2 O 2
COAX 7[+1] 6[+1]+(m-1) COAX 6[+1]+(n-1)
7[+1]
O O
A 2 COAX A 2
6[+1]+m COAX 6[+1]+n
O 6[+1]+m+COAX 6[+1]+n+COAX O
E N E
Note: 7+n+COAX
9[+1]+m+COAX H H
The value in squa- D
re bracket is to be
added in case of
outdoor call. I
2 2
M F+G 8+x+(n+m+o)+COAX M F1+G1
ELVOX
In the event of a short circuit, ELVOX
2 2
the protection devices (PTC)
switch off the mains voltage. L L
Once the short circuit has 2
Lighting of entrance panel: type 6680
been eliminated, wait for a few M F+G
powers a maximum of 3 24V 3W bulbs
minutes to allow the protection
device to cool down so that Transformer type M832 powers a maxi-
the unit can return to normal ELVOX
operation. Transformer type M832/030 powers a
2
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. L
To do this, consult the variations on the standard connection
for the various system components, on pages 157 to 178.
150
DISTRIBUTOR
75ohm V4
type 5556/004 POWER SUPPLY
V3 type 6582
V2
MAINS
V1 MAINS PRI PRI
75ohm V POWER SUPPLY
V type 6584
-
+ - +U +I A B C D 1 2 - T1 S 6 7 8 - +T 15 0 S1 ST
BUILDING WITH
VIDEO ENTRAN-
CE PANEL
(ref. ve4357)
V
1
2
-
T1
S
R-CH
R-CH
P1
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM IN BUILDING
V
L1
1
2 A
COMPLEX: CONNECTION OF MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL
-
3
T1
4
S
6
R-CH
7
R-CH
8
P1
CT
+T
D V
M
BUILDING WITH
AUDIO ENTRAN-
CE PANEL B
C
(ref. ve4356)
V 1 2 - T1 S CH CH P1
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200, L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
PATAVIUM and letter box 2550/301-302 series (3x24V 3W max.)
B- Additional door lock button 10x24V 3W with type M832
C- 12V~ electric lock 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
DIAGRAM N° ve1930
®
570G, 559C and 570C
151
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM IN BUILDING COMPLEX:
BUILDING WITH AUDIO ENTRANCE PANEL ®
N.B.
*
stor (supplied) to the B" located under the
last monitor, between cover to position "A".
terminals V2-M. MAINS
PRI
A POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING MODULE
B type 6680/V03 type 6594
**
N.B.
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 1 2 - S +T AM 0 C1 1 2 CS M V 1 2 A1 - T1 M1 V1 SD P1 A2 - T2 M2 V2 P2
The monitors have a

microswitch on the
* **
N.B.
The monitors have a
microswitch on the
back, set it to “with con-
tion A).
1 2 3 - + C2 S V CH CH CH
M V
***
MONITOR
V
13
12
11
1
2
-
T1
type 6600 10 E S
type 660A 9 R-CH
8 R-CH
type 6700 7 R-CH
6 P1
5
4
A TO MAIN ENTRANCE
3
2 L1 PANEL
1
3
MONITOR 4
type 6300 V2 D 5
type 6301 V1 6
type 6320 M 7
V3 8
type 6321 13
type 6303 12 ELVOX
type 6500 11
10 E B
type 6501 9 C
type 6401 8
7
N.B. A- Audio entrance panel 1200,
* 6
5
4 - Short-circuiting termi- 3300, 8000, 8100, PATAVIUM and letter
* 3
2
1
nals S with CS in swit-
ching module type
box 2550/301-302 series
6594 main and secon- C- 12V~ electric lock
V1
M
dary door-locks may D- Speech unit type 930 o 930A
V2
M
be opened at the E- Landing call push-button
* V3
+A
+
same time. L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
(3x24V 3W max.)
CN1
- 10x24V 3W with type M832

+D
CH 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
CN2
CN1
7 N.B.
AU
1 The monitors have a microswitch on the back
2
3 for connection "with coaxial/without coaxial";
5
6E set the microswitch to "coaxial".
A 6
C 6P
6S E
1 2 3 - + C2 S V
B/W MONITOR MONITOR CABLE RISER

type
type
type
6000
6200 +
6145
*
(supplied) to the last monitor,
COLOUR MONITOR
type 6003 + between terminals V2-M.
type 6200 + DIAGRAM N° ve4356
type 6145
152
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM IN BUILDING COMPLEX:
BUILDING WITH VIDEO ENTRANCE PANEL ®
*
N.B.
stor (supplied) to the on the audio line, move
last monitor, between the switching module
terminals V2-M. "A-B" located under the
MAINS
PRI
**
N.B. M1 V1 V2 M2
A
B
POWER SUPPLY
type 6680/V03
AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 1 2 - S +T AM 0 C1
SWITCHING MODULE
type 6594
1 2 CS M V 1 2 A1 - T1 M1 V1 SD P1 A2 - T2 M2 V2 P2
The monitors have a
microswitch on the
* **
N.B.
The monitors have a
microswitch on the
back, set it to “with con-
tion A).
C2 1 2 3 - + S V CH CH CH
V
1
2
* **
M
-
V
T1
13
S
MONITOR 12
R-CH
11
type 6600 R-CH
10 E R-CH
type 660A 9
P1
8
type 6700 7
6 TO MAIN ENTRANCE
5
PANEL
4 L1
3 A
2
1
3
MONITOR
*
4
V2
type 6300 V1
6 N.B.
7 The monitors have a micro-
type 6301 M
8
* type 6320
type 6321
type 6303
V3
13
12
11
D
CT
+T
V
M
switch on the back (or under-
neath) for connection "with
coaxial/without coaxial"; set
type 6500 E
ELVOX
10
type 6501 9 the microswitch to "coaxial".
8
type 6401 7
6 B
5 C
4
3
2
1
N.B. A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8100, 8000
- Short-circuiting termi- 1200, and letter box 2550/301-302
nals S with CS in swit- series
V1
M ching module type B- Additional door lock button
* V2
M
V3
6594 main and secon-
dary door-locks may
CN1
+A
+ be opened at the type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
-
+D same time. 570G, 559C and 570C
CH
CN2
(3x24V 3W max.)
CN1
7
AU 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
1
2
3
5
6E
A 6
C 6P
6S E
C2 1 2 3 - + S V
B/W MONITOR
type 6000 MONITOR CABLE RISER
type 6200 +
type 6145
COLOUR MONITOR
type 6003 +
type 6200 + DIAGRAM N° ve4357
type 6145
153
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER SWITCHBOARD
type 152A-152B ... 152I ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.

The switchboard works both in installations with "Sound System" call and in installations with AC call.
During the course of "internal" operation (IE key switched to I) the system maintains conversation privacy between the switch-
board and the interphones, by disabling the speech unit. To communicate from the switchboard to the interphones or the moni-
tors, press the line selector key and the CH button. In the specific case of a call from the switchboard to the monitor, only the
audio part is active, and the video is disactivated.
To call the switchboard from the interphones or monitors, lift the interphone and press the push-button . To reply from the
switchboard press the key corresponding to the LED that is ON. The switchboard is equipped with 50Hz acoustic signalling that
the line is engaged. An electronic device diverts all calls from the entrance panel to the porter ringtone. During "external" opera-
tion (IE key set to E) the system enables communication without conversation privacy between the interphones or monitors and
the speech unit.The switchboard is excluded from the connection with the interphones and can communicate with the speech
unit. Calls from the entrance panel are sent to the respective internal users. The same porter switchboard call push-button on
the interphones or monitors operates the electric lock by means of a relay fitted in the switchboard. When the switchboard is in
the "external" state (I/E key set to E), to open the lock for the entrance panel from the switchboard, press the AP button.
For switchboards with more than 80 lines, there is a multiplier key "=x" on the switchboard, which enables you to double the num-
ber of lines. Each key inserts two users separately.
OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT
5+(n-2)
To communicate with an interphone or monitor from the
switchboard:
B
A coax
- lift the interphone; 6 6
coax
- on the multiplier key, select the LED (yellow
or red depending on the interphone you wish to call);
- press the line selector key: this lights the correspon-
ding LED of the same colour as the LED on the mul- coax
tiplier key.
To change, simply press the multiplier key. 5+n
All the other functions remain unchanged.
F
SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION
Switchboard may be flush-mounted or flush/desk-top D
mounted.
For surface wall-mounted, carry out following opera- 8+n+COAX
tions: open housing and loosen screws fixing the two
metal side supports.
Slide supports out and reverse their position. In this
way, the position of switchboard front panel is tilted, E
allowing interphone hooking.
9+n+COAX
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices

(PTC) switch off the mains voltage. Once the short cir-
cuit has been eliminated, wait for a few minutes to allow
the protection device to cool down so that the unit can 2
return to normal operation. G+H
I

services. To do this, consult the variations on the ELVOX

2
C BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1234
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VP3425)
A 6000+6200+6145, 6003+6200+6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6301, 6320, 6321, 6303, 6500, 6501 Interphone n
C - Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
D 152A-152B- - -152I Switchboard 1
F 836 Power supply for switchboard 1
G Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 o PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
H type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558 570,
570G, 571, 559C e 570C Camera 1
I - Additional door lock button 1
154
type 152A-152B ... 152I ®
N.B. Insert the jumper S1

*
In the event of buzzing on the
module "A-B" located under
1
the cover to position "A". 2
3 SWITCHBOARD MAINS
F
MAINS 4 *
5 type 152A
PRI
6
PRI POWER SUPPLY
A
POWER SUPPLY 7
8
B type 6680 9
type 836
1O S1 C1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 CP S X SP P + - 1O O Y
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 +J + - 15 10 0
B/W MONITOR
type 6000
A
type 6200 +
type 6145
L1
COLOUR MONITOR - + 2 3 4 V CH CH CH CH
type 6003 + 3
4
type 6200 + 6
type 6145 7
8
V1 CT
M +T ELVOX
V2 V D
M M
V3
CN1
+A
+ B
- C
+D
CH
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000,
1200, PATAVIUM, 8100 and letter box
CN2
2550/301-302 series
CN1

7
AU C- 12V~ electric lock
1
2 D- Camera with speech unit
3
5 type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
6E
A 6 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
C 6P
6S E - Diode 1N4004, type R027
MONITOR (3x24V 3W max.)
MONITOR type 6301
type 6300 V1 V1 type 6320 10x24V 3W with type M832
V2 V2
type 6320 M M type 6321 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
type 6303 V3 V3 type 6401
13 13
type 6500 12 12 type 6501 N.B.
11 11
10
9
10
9
The monitors have a microswitch on the back for connection "with
8
7
8
7
coaxial/without coaxial"; set the microswitch to "coaxial".
6 6
5 5
4
3
E 4
3
On monitors type 6300, 6303, 6320, 6500 set microswitch located on the
2
1
2
1
back of the monitor to “Switchboard” position.
- + 2 3 4 V CH
* SWITCHBOARD TERMINALS
C1 Common Sound System or AC call.
MONITOR CABLE RISER 1 Negative
2 Microphone
3 Common audio line
4 Porter switchboard call (switchboard in "INTERNAL" position) or
* (supplied) to the last monitor,
between terminals V2-M.
open door lock (switchboard in "EXTERNAL" position)
6,7,8 Speech unit
CP Common, buttons for entrance panels
S Door lock
X Monitor OFF
SP-P Connection for additional external ringtone. The ringtone is activated
by means of calls from the entrance panel with the switchboard in
the "INTERNAL" position.
F Interphone receivers and interphone call
DIAGRAM N° VP3425
155
type 152A-152B ... 152I AND TWO SPEECH UNITS ®
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.

The switchboard works both in installations with "Sound System" call and in installations with AC call.
During the course of "internal" operation (IE key switched to I) the system maintains conversation privacy between the switch-
board and the interphones, by disabling the speech unit. To communicate from the switchboard to the interphones or the moni-
tors, press the line selector key and the CH button. In the specific case of a call from the switchboard to the monitor, only the
audio part is active, and the video is disactivated.
To call the switchboard from the interphones or monitors, lift the interphone and press the push-button . To reply from the
switchboard press the key corresponding to the LED that is ON. The switchboard is equipped with 50Hz acoustic signalling that
the line is engaged. An electronic device diverts all calls from the entrance panel to the porter ringtone. During "external" opera-
tion (IE key set to E) the system enables communication without conversation privacy between the interphones or monitors and
the speech unit.The switchboard is excluded from the connection with the interphones and can communicate with the speech
unit. Calls from the entrance panel are sent to the respective internal users. The same porter switchboard call push-button on
the interphones or monitors operates the electric lock by means of a relay fitted in the switchboard. When the switchboard is in
the "external" state (I/E key set to E), to open the lock for the entrance panel from the switchboard, press the AP button.
For switchboards with more than 80 lines, there is a multiplier key "=x" on the switchboard, which enables you to double the num-
ber of lines. Each key inserts two users separately.
5+(n-2)
OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT
B
To communicate with an interphone or monitor from the A coax
switchboard: 6 6
coax
- lift the interphone;
- on the multiplier key, select the LED (yellow
or red depending on the interphone you wish to call);
coax
- press the line selector key: this lights the correspon-
ding LED of the same colour as the LED on the mul- 5+n
tiplier key.
To change, simply press the multiplier key. 6
All the other functions remain unchanged.
F
SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION
Switchboard may be flush-mounted or flush/desk-top D
mounted. 8+n+COAX
For surface wall-mounted, carry out following opera-
tions: open housing and loosen screws fixing the two
metal side supports. E
Slide supports out and reverse their position. In this M
way, the position of switchboard front panel is tilted, 9+n+COAX 9+n+COAX
allowing interphone hooking. L
12+n 12+n
In the event of a short circuit, the protection devices

(PTC) switch off the mains voltage. Once the short cir-
cuit has been eliminated, wait for a few minutes to allow
the protection device to cool down so that the unit can
return to normal operation. 2 2
G+H G+H
I I
services. To do this, consult the variations on the ELVOX ELVOX

2 2
C C
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VP4519) BLOCK DIAGRAM N° sb1234
A 6000+6200+6145, 6003+6200+6145 Monitor n
B 6300, 6320, 6301, 6303, 6321, 6500, 6501 Interphone n
D 152A-152B- - -152I Switchboard 1
F 836 Power supply for switchboard 1
G Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 oder PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
H type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558 570,
570G, 571, 559C e 570C (colour) Camera 1
I - Additional door lock button 1
L type 6591 Switching module 1
M type 2/690.A89 Harness 1
156
Insert the jumper S1
N.B. type 2/690.A89 POWER SUPPLY

White wire
1 type 836
In the event of buzzing MAINS 2
3
F
SWITCHBOARD MAINS TRANSFORMER
on the audio line, move PRI type 152A type 832/030
POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING MODULE PRI
the switching module "A- CP O 15 AM
AM +TT - 8 7 6
type 6680 type 6591
B" located under the M1 V2 1 2 3 - S 6 7 8 C1 M V 6 7 8 - T1 15 0 P1 7 8 - T2 M2 0 P2
10 7 8 P + - 10 Y
+J + - 15 10 0 PRI O 15
MAINS
B/W MONITOR
type 6000 +
type 6200 +
type 6145
COLOUR MONITOR
type 6003 +
type 6200 + 2 3 CH
type 6145
V1 A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8100,
1200, 8000, PATAVIUM and letter box
A L1 2550/301-302 series
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
CN1
D
7
ELVOX
570G, 571, 559C and 570C
E - Diode 1N4004, type R027
B
C L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
6E
6 (3x24V 3W max.)
Type 152A-152B ... 152I WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS
6S 10x24V 3W with type M832

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH PORTER’S SWITCHBOARD
A L1
V1 V1
M
V3 C1 Common Sound System or AC call.
13 13
12 12
1 Negative
10 10
9 9
D 2 Microphone
8 8 M
ELVOX
7 7 3 Common audio line

5 4 Porter switchboard call (switchboard in "INTERNAL" position) or
E 4 B
MONITOR MONITOR C
type 6300 2 2 open door lock (switchboard in "EXTERNAL" position)
1 1 type 6301
type 6303 type 6401 6,7,8 Speech unit
type 6500 type 6501 CP Common, buttons for entrance panels
type 6503
2 3 - + 5 CH * S Door lock
type 6320
MONITOR CABLE RISER Connect 75 Ohm resistor X Monitor OFF
* (supplied) to the last monitor, SP-P Connection for additional external ringtone. The ringtone is activated
between terminals V2-M. by means of calls from the entrance panel with the switchboard in
the "INTERNAL" position. Interphone receivers and interphone call.
®
DIAGRAM N° VP4519
157
STANDARD VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM VARIATIONS
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 17
Wiring diagram with simultaneous activation of two or more monitors by power supply type 6582
Monitor cable riser
V S 3 2 1 - + The power supply type

6680 can simultaneously
Max 2 monitors power two monitors type
connected to the 6000, 6003, 6300, 6301,
6582 power supply
type 6000
6303 or one monitor type
V1 V1 V1 6321, 6500, 6501, 6401
type 6003
M M M
V2 V2 V2
6320, by connecting them
M M M as shown in the diagram.
V3 V3 V3 With a larger number of
monitors switched on
CN1
+A +A +A
+ + + simultaneously, it is
- - -
necessary to use the addi-
+D +D +D
CH CH CH tional power supply type
6582: connect a maximum
CN2
CN2
CN2
of two monitors type
Interphone 6000, 6003, 6300, 6301,
CN1
CN1
CN1
type 6200 6303, 6600 or one monitor
7 7 7
AU AU AU
type 6320, 6321, 6401,
1 1 1 6500, 6501, or use the
2 2 2 desk-top conversion kits
3 3 3
5 5 5
with built-in power supply.
6E 6E 6E For simultaneous switch-
6 6 6 on of more than one moni-
6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S tor with the same call, use
type 934 to regenerate
Max 2 monitors the call signal.
connected to the
- +U +I A B C D Use type 934 after the 3rd
main power supply
POWER SUPPLY type 6000 monitor and for a further 4
type 6582 type 6003 monitors.
PRI
Mains CH V S 3 2 1 -+
To power supply
type 6680
Monitor cable riser
Max 2 moni- V 6 5 Monitor cable riser

tors connected
to the main V 6 5
power supply
type 6300
type 6301
type 6303 V2 V2 V2
Max 1 moni- V1 V1 V1
tors connected M M M M M M
to the main V3 V3 V3 V V V
power supply 13 13 13 Max 2 moni- 13 13 13
12 12 12 tors connected 12 12 12
type 6500
11 11 11 to the main 11 11 11
type 6501
type 6321 10 10 10 power supply 10 10 10
9 9 9 type 6600 9 9 9
type 6320
8 8 8 type 660A 8 8 8
type 6401
7 7 7 type 6700 7 7 7
6 6 6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
- +U +I A B C D - +U +I A B C D
type 6582 CH V + - type 6582 CH V + -
To power supply To power supply
PRI type 6680 PRI type 6680
Mains Mains
158
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 18
Wiring diagram with simultaneous switch-on of two or more monitors with power supply type 6583, with call repeater
type 934.
Monitor cable riser
Max 4 monitors V S 3 2 1 - +
The power supply
connected to
the 6583 power type 6680 can
supply power two monitors
type 6000 type 6000, 6003,
V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 V1
type 6003 M
V2
M
V2
M
V2
M
V2
M
V2
M
V2
6300, 6301, 6321,
M M M M M M 6303 or one monitor
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
type 6320, 6401,
CN1
+A +A +A +A +A +A
+ + + + + + 6500, 6501 by con-
- - - - - -
+D +D +D +D +D +D necting them as
CH CH CH CH CH CH
shown in the stan-
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
dard diagram.
Phone
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
type 6200
7 7 7 7 7 7 For simultaneous
AU AU AU AU AU AU
1 1 1 1 1 1 switch-on of more
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 than one monitor, it
5 5 5 5 5 5
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E
is necessary to use
6 6 6 6 6 6 the additional power
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S supply type 6583:
Max 4 monitors connect a maximum
connected to
the main power
of four monitors type
- +U +I - +U C +I A B C 15 O
Call repeater supply 6320, 6321, 6000,
Power supply
type 934 type 6000 6003, 6300, 6301,
type 6583
PRI PRI
type 6003 CH V S 3 2 1 -+ 6303, 6600 or two
Mains Mains monitors type 6500,
Max 4 monitors 6501, 6401, or use
connected to the additional the desk-top conver-
power supply type 6583
type 6301
sion kits with built-in
type 6303 power supply.
Max 2 monitor
connected to additional
power supply type 6583
type 6500
type 6320 Monitor cable riser
type 6321 V 6 5 3
type 6501 Monitor cable riser
type 6401 V 6 5 3
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2
V1 V1 V1 V1 V1
M M M M M
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 M M M M M
13 13 13 13 13 V V V V V
12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13
11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12
10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11
9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10
8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9
7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8
6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7
5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
Max 4 monitors
connected to the
additional power
supply type 6583
- +U +I - +U C +I A B C 15 O type 6600
Call repeater type 660A - +U +I - +U C +I A B C 15 O
Power supply CH V 6 5 3
type 934 type 6700 Power supply
type 6583 To power supply CH V 6 5 3
PRI PRI type 6583
type 6680 Call repeater PRI PRI
Mains
Max 2 monitors connected type 934 Mains Mains To power supply
to main power supply
type 6680
type 6300
type 6301
type 6303
Max 1 monitor connected
to main power supply
type 6320
type 6321
type 6500
type 6501
type 6401
159
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 19
Wiring diagram for power supply type 6583 on installations with considerable voltage drop on power line “+ -”.
Stand-by line power supply type 6583 may be

connected as shown in the diagram in case of
long supply lines where power voltage on the
line wiring to the monitors (+ -) is less than 15V
D.C. between terminals 5-6. The unit can
supply 18V D.C. 2A with intermittent operation. Mains
PRI
1st MONITOR 2nd MONITOR Power supply
CABLE RISER CABLE RISER type 6680
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S
If a line with excessive voltage drops powers a
single monitor, you can use the power supply
type 6582.
Mains
PRI 15 O +I C +U -
A Power supply
B type 6583
C
N.B. Set jumper in “B-C”
VARIATION 20
Connection of call repeater type 2/841.
The loudspeaker module type 2/841 repeats the monitor sound leaving the tone unaltered.
V2
Monitor Monitor V1
type 6000 V1
M type 6300 M
type 6003 type 6301 V3
V2
M type 6320 13
V3 type 6321 12
type 6401 11
type 6303 10
CN1
+A CALL CALL
+ REPEATER type 6500 9 REPEATER
- type 2/841 type 6501 8 type 2/841
+D 2 7 2
CH 3 6 3
5 5 5
CN2
6 4 6
Interphone 3
type 6200 2
CN1
1
7
AU
1
M
2
V
3
13
5
12 A
6E
11
A 6
Monitor 10 CALL
C 6P
type 6600 9 A REPEATER
6S
type 660A 8 type 2/841
type 6700 7 2
6 3
5 5
4 6
3
2
1
160
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 21
Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type 860A.
N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A features a two or three-notes ringtone which is selected by connection to the corresponding
terminal (7 or 8). The ringtone is powered by the mains voltage.
A- Landing call push-button
B- Diode 1N4004, type R027
Monitor
Additional bell Additional bell
type 6000
V1 type 860A type 860A
type 6003 M
V2
M
V3 PRI 4 5 7 8 PRI 4 5 7 8
Mains Mains
CN1
+A
+
-
+D V2
CH V1
Monitor M
CN2
V3
type 6301 13
type 6321 12
CN1
11
7 type 6401 10
AU type 6501 9
1 8
2 7
3 6
5 5
6E 4
A 6 3
C 6P 2
Interphone 6S 1
type 6200

type 860A type 860A
Power supply
type 6680 PRI 4 5 7 8 PRI 4 5 7 8
C2 Mains Mains
V2 A V2
V1 B B V1
M M
Monitor V3 Monitor V3
13 13
type 6300 12 type 6300 12
type 6303 11 type 6303 11
10 10
type 6320 9 type 6320 9
type 6500 8 type 6500 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1

type 860A type 860A
Power supply
type 6680 PRI 4 5 7 8 PRI 4 5 7 8
C2
A B B
M M
V V
13 13
Monitor 12 12
11
Monitor 11
type 6600 10 type 6600 10
type 660A 9 9
8
type 660A 8
type 6700 7 type 6700 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3 N.B. In this configuration, the landing call
2 2
1 1 does not activate the additional bell.
161
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 22
Wiring diagram for additional mechanical doorbells.
The diagram shows the connection of additional doorbells operating at 12 V AC or at the mains voltage using relay type
170/101, by connecting it as shown in the diagram.
RELAY RELAY
A- Landing call push-button type 170/101 type 170/101
B- Diode 1N4004 and type R027 Maximum load Maximum load
3A - 230V 3A - 230V
Monitor
type 6000
type 6003 V2
V1 V1
M M
V2 V3
M 13
V3 12
C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC Mechanical C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC
11
CN1
+A 10
+ doorbell 9
- Mechanical
8
+D doorbell 7 Monitor
CH Doorbell 6
Power supply type 6300
5
CN2
4 type 6320
Doorbell 3 type 6303
Power supply 2
CN1
1 type 6500
7
AU
1
2
3
5 N.B. In this configuration, the landing call does not activate the relay
6E
A 6
C 6P
Interphone 6S
type 6200
RELAY RELAY
type 170/101 type 170/101
Maximum load Maximum load Power supply
3A - 230V 3A - 230V type 6680
C2
V2 V2
V1 V1
M M
V3 Monitor A V3 Monitor
13 13
12
type 6301 12
type 6300
11 type 6321 11 type 6320
C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC
10 10 type 6303
Mechanical 9
type 6401 Mechanical 9
doorbell 8 type 6501 doorbell 8 type 6500
7 7
6 B 6
5 5
4 4
Doorbell 3 Doorbell 3
Power supply 2 2
1
Power supply 1
RELAY
RELAY
type 170/101
type 170/101
Maximum load
Carico massimo Power supply
3A - 230V
3A - 230V type 6680
C2
M M
V V
13
A 13
12 Monitor 12 Monitor
11 11
C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC
10
type 6600 C 1 2 15 5 4 3 RC
10 type 6600
Mechanical 9 type 660A Mechanical 9 type 660A
doorbell 8 doorbell 8
7
type 6700 7 type 6700
6 B 6
5 5
4 4
Doorbell 3 3
Doorbell
Power supply 2 2
1 Power supply 1
162
WITH COAX CABLE
®
VARIATION 23
Wiring diagram for landing call button.
When the landing call push-button is pressed, the monitor sounds with a different tone from the tone generated by a call from
the entrance panel. The monitor remains OFF.

If type 6150 is installed inside interphone type 6200, the landing call cannot be used.
Monitor
type 6000
type 6003
CN2
CN1
7
AU
1
2
3
5
6E A
A 6
C 6P Mains
Interphone
6S
type 6200 PRI
Power supply
A
type 6680
B
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
Mains
Monitor
V2
type 6300 PRI
V1 Power supply
type 6301 M A
type 6680
type 6320 V3 B
13
A
type 6321 M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
12
type 6303 11
type 6401 10
type 6500 9
type 6501 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Mains
PRI
A Power supply
M
V B type 6680
13 A
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
12
11
Monitor 10
type 6600 9
type 660A 8
type 6700 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
163
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 24
Wiring diagram for switching on the stair light or other services powered by AC mains by means of relay type
170/001.
To switch on the stair light in this case, press push-button number To activate the auxiliary service press the push-button with
1. You can connect any one of the eight additional buttons of type
6152. The capacity of the contacts of the monitor push-button is 24 the symbol . The capacity of the contacts of the inter-
V D.C./A.C. 0.5A max. phone push-button is 24 V D.C./AC 0.5 A max.
Relay
Monitor type 170/001
type 6000 V1
type 6003 M
V2
Buttons (for switching on
M
stair light or other)
V3
1 2 3 4 5
CN1
+A
+
-
+D Auxiliary service
CH (stair light or other
CN2
services)
Maximum load
Interphone 3A 230V AC
type 6200
CN1
7 V2
AU Monitor V1
1 type 6300 M
2 type 6301 V3 Relay
3 type 6320 13 type 170/001
5 type 6321 12
6E 11
type 6303
A 6 10
type 6401
C 6P 9
type 6500
6S 8
type 6501
7 Buttons (for switching on
4 1 2 3 4 5
6 stair light etc.)
8
5
4
3
2
1
Auxiliary service
(stair light or other
services)
Maximum load
3A 230V AC
M Relay M Relay
V type 170/001 V type 170/001
13 13
12 12
11 11
Monitor 10 Monitor 10
type 6600 9 type 6600 9
type 660A 8 type 660A 8 Buttons (for switching
1 2 3 4 5 Buttons (for switching 1 2 3 4 5
type 6700 7 type 6700 7 on stair light etc.)
6 on stair light etc.) 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 Auxiliary service 1 Auxiliary service
(stair light or other (stair light or other
services) services)
Maximum load Push-button “ ” Maximum load
Push-button “ ” 3A 230V AC 3A 230V AC
164
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 25
Wiring diagram for self-start of monitor
To activate the video system from the monitor, press push-button number 1, because this push-button has been used in the diagram. You can,
however, connect any one of the eight additional buttons type 6152.
The capacity of the contacts of the monitor push-button is 24 V D.C./A.C. 0.5A max.
Monitor
type 6000
CN2
type 6003
CN1
7 Mains
AU
1 PRI
2 Power supply
3 A type 6680
5 B
6E
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
A 6
C 6P
Interphone
6S
type 6200 + 6152
4
8
N.B. The key with the symbol is set up exclusively for self- It is possible to activate the video system from the monitor, using
start of the system and cannot be used for other purposes.
the push-button with the symbol " ", by connecting it as
shown in the diagram.
V2
V1
MONITOR M M
type 6300 V3 V
type 6301 13 13
type 6320 12 12
type 6321 11 11
type 6401 10 10
type 6303 MONITOR
9 9
type 6500 type 6600
8 type 660A 8
type 6501
7 type 6700 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Mains Mains
PRI PRI
A A
type 6680 type 6680
B B
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
165
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 26
Wiring diagram of video door entry system with "SOUND SYSTEM" call and ringtone type 6150.
The electronic ding-dong ringtone card type 6150 can be installed in interphone type 6200 to convert the sound generated by
the power supply type 6680.
N.B . The loudspeaker must be disconnected from the interphone's motherboard and connected to connector "A-A" on the inter-
phone.
-
Monitor +D
type 6000 CH
CN1
type 6003
CN2
Loudspeaker 3
CN1
7
AU
1
2
3
5
6E
A 6
C 6P
6S Mains
+ PRI
A Power supply
CH
C A A
- A
B type 6680
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
CH 3
Interphone
type 6200 + 6150
Loudspeaker
Art. 6 L1
15O
3
+ CH A A
-
With type 6150, the landing call and intercommunicating call cannot be connected.
VARIATION 27
Wiring diagram of cameras type 558-571 with "Videomoving" device

Cameras with vertical movement type 558 and 571 enable you to con- Cameras with vertical movement type 558 and 571 enable you
trol the vertical camera angle using push-button to control the vertical camera angle using the monitor push-but-
number 1 on the interphone. You can connect any one of the eight addi-
tional buttons of type 6152. ton with the symbol . This makes it possible to frame people
This makes it possible to frame people of different heights or to position of different heights or position the entrance panel higher or lower
the entrance panel higher or lower than prescribed. than prescribed.
Monitor V2
V1
A- 8000, 8100, 3300, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter type 6300 M
Monitor box series video entrance panels type 6320 V3 A- 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM or letter
type 6000 B- Electric lock 12V AC type 6301 13 box series video entrance panel
CN2
C- Camera type 558 - (571 + 930) 12

type 6003 type 6321 11
B- Camera type 558 or 571+ 930
D- Additional door lock button type 6401 C- Electric lock 12V AC
10
CN1
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb 9 D- Additional door lock button

type 6500
7 8 L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb
AU type 6501 7
1 6
2 5
3 4
5 3
6E 2 L1
A 6 L1 1
C 6P
6S A A
3 3
4 4 4
8 6 6
7 7
Interphone 8 8
CT CT
type 6200 +T
V
C +T
B
V
M M
ELVOX
ELVOX
D B D
C
166
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 12
Wiring diagram for video door entry system with an interphone in parallel, and/or user with interphone without monitor.
A -Connection to user without monitor

B - Connection in parallel to a video door entry unit
N.B.
Can be connected to a maximum of 1 interphone in parallel
to a monitor. To connect a larger number, use call repeater type 934 (see variation).
Monitor cable riser
Monitor cable riser
CH S 6 5 3 2 1 V CH S 6 5 3 2 1 V
Interphone
type 8875
A Interphone
type 8875
A
type 8872 1 type 8872 1
2 2
3 3
4/5 4/5
6 6
7 7
8 8
Monitor
type 6300 B Monitor B
type 6320 type 6600
type 6301 type 660A
type 6321 V2 type 6700
type 6303 V1 M
type 6500
M V
type 6501
V3 13
13 1 12
1 12 2 11
2 11 3 10
3 10 4/5 9
4/5 9 6 8
6 8 7 7
7 7 8 6
8 6 Interphone
5
Interphone
5 type 8875 4
type 8875 4 type 8872 3
type 8872 3 2
2 1
1
CHCHCH S 6 5 3 2 1 V CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 V
To power supply type 6680 To power supply type 6680
Monitor
type 6000
type 6003
CN2
Interphone type 6200 can also be connected without

CN1
monitor.
Simply do not make the connection between the
Interphone 7 7
monitor and the interphone.
type 6200 AU AU
1 1
2 2
3 3
5 5
6E 6E
A 6 6
C 6P 6P
6S 6S
167
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 29
Wiring diagram of ringtone level control module with OFF indicator (red LED) and "lock open" indication (green LED)
with accessory module type 6153. Wiring diagram of call volume control module
DESCRIPTION OF MODULE type 6153
without visual indicators
Switching module type 6153 makes it possible to control the ring- V
1
tone volume or disable it, on interphones with call loudspeaker in the 2
PETRARCA series, type 6200 - 6201. The device also has two 3
LEDs , one for indicating that the ringtone is OFF (red indicator) and Monitor S
type 6000 V1 -
one to indicate that the door lock is open (green indicator); the use +
type 6003 M
of these two devices requires additional connections as shown in V2 CH
the wiring diagrams. M CH
V3
To power supply
INSTALLING THE MODULE ON PETRARCA SERIES INTER- +A type 6680
+
CN1
PHONES 6200 - 6201
- Open the interphone, split the cover from the bottom making -
+D
pressure on the lower side of the cover Fig. 1. CH
- Snap off the plastic lamina by exerting pressure on it (Fig. 1B)
CN2
- Insert the card in its seat and fix it with the screw supplied (Fig. 2)
- Disconnect the loudspeaker wire from pin "A" on the interphone.
- Insert the removed wire onto the pin (CN2) on the card type 6153.
CN1
- Insert the wire pre-connected to terminal n° 6 of type 6153, on pin
7
"A" of the interphone (Fig. 3) AU
1
N.B. On terminal n° 7 of card type 6153, there is a wire to be used 2
3
for visual indication that the ringtone is disabled. 5
In position "0" (ringtone OFF) terminals 6E
7 -10 are connected to the diode, thus enabling the red LED to light. C 6
Interphone A 6P
type 6200 6S
6
CN2 DL1 7
8
A DL2 9
10
A - type 6153
V 1 2 3 S - + CH
Fig. 1
Fig. 1B
Fig. 2
Ringtone level selection

Left 0 1 2 3 Right
← →

Position "1": minimum volume
Position "2": medium volume
Fig. 3 Position "3": maximum volume
When the ringtone OFF visual indicator is

Loudspeaker
BI used (red LED) as well as the "lock open"
BL
R0 indicator (green LED), it is necessary to
C
A power these diodes (up to a maximum of
30) with the separate power supply type
6582. See diagrams on next page.
type 6153
Interphone basic card 6
7
168
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 30
Wiring diagram of ringtone level control module with OFF indicator (red LED) and lock open indicator module (green
LED).
Mains PRI
Power supply
- +U +I A B C D
type 6582
V
1
The diagram shows the connection of type 6153 with
2 the ringtone OFF (red LED) and lock open (green
Monitor 3
type 6000
S LED) indicators on interphones type 6200 and moni-
V1 -
type 6003 M + tor type 6000, 6003.

V2
M To use just one of the two functions, proceed as fol-
V3 CH
CH lows:
+A
+ To power supply With the ringtone OFF indication, connect only the
CN1
- type 6680
+D wire to terminal N. 10 of the interphone type 6200.
CH
With the "lock open" indicator, connect only terminal
CN2
N. 8 of the interphone type 6200.

CN1
7 As shown in the diagram, use type 6582 to power

AU
1 the LEDs (maximum 30).
2
3 For more than 30 LEDs, use further additional power
5
6E 15/AS
supplies.
C 6
Interphone A 6P
6S S/S1
type 6200
6
CN2 DL1 7
8
DL2 9
A 10
A - type 6153
V 1 2 3 S - + C +U CH
N.O. contact
Lock
VARIATION 31
Wiring diagram of "lock open" visual indication (green LED) with 6300, 6500, 6400 and 6600 series monitors.
The diagram shows the
Mains Mains connection of the "lock
PRI PRI open" indicator (green LED)
Power supply Power supply with 6300 and 6500, 6400,
type 6582 type 6582 6600 series monitors (con-
- +U +I A B C D - +U +I A B C D nection to terminal 13).
V V
Monitor 1 1 The ringtone OFF indication
2 2
type 6300 3 3 is already inserted in the
S S
type 6301 - -
monitors and it is not
+
type 6320 V2 + necessary to connect any
V1
type 6321 M
CH
M
CH additional conductor.
CH CH
V3
type 6401 13
V
13
To disable the "lock open"
type 6303 12
11
Monitor 12 indication, do not connect
11
type 6500 10 type 6600 10
15/AS
terminal No 13 of the moni-
9 9
type 6501 8
15/AS type 660A 8 tors
7 type 6700 7
S/S1
6 6
S/S1
5
4
5
4
The red LEDs are powered
3 3 by the power supply 6680
2 2
1 1 and must not exceed a total
of 20 in number. For larger
numbers, use an additional
power supply.
V 1 2 3 S - + C CH
V 1 2 3 S - + C CH
N.O. contact N.O. contact As shown in the diagram,

Lock
Lock use a power supply type
6582 to power the green
LEDs (maximum 30).
For more than 30 LEDs,
use further additional power
supplies.
169
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 32 N.B.
line, move the switching module "A-B"
Wiring diagram located under the cover to position "A".
for the separate
Additional camera with
camera from the MONITOR CABLE RISER
waterproof housing
entrance panel type 5000-5020-5A20-5B20
with speech unit CHCHCH 9 6 5 3 2 1 V Mains type 5A10-5B10-5C10
and additional
PRI
bulbs for lighting A Power supply
the coverage T
B type 6680
area. 24 O - +T V M
M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
It is possible to
connect an entran-
ce panel with the
Mains
speech unit only
24 O PRI
and a separate
camera type 5000 Transformer
- 5020 - 5A20 - type 832/024
5B20 - 5A10 -
5B10-5C10. The Relay
illumination bulb type 170/001
must be inserted Maximum load
as shown in the 3A - 230V
diagram. A 1
2
The illuminated 3
L1 4
push-button con- 5
nected to terminals 3
4
3 and 4 of the
speech unit type D 5 AC mains
6 power supply
930 or 930A can 7
8 Illumination bulb
be used to switch
viewing series.
the entrance panel R
For B/W filming, you can use

illumination bulbs
C B series 5250 infrared bulbs
on momentarily, as
shown in the dia-
gram.
N.B.
A- 3300, PATAVIUM, 8100, 8000, 1200 or letter box line, move the switching module "A-B"
2550/302-302 series audio entrance panel located under the cover to position "A".
Mains
C- Electric lock 12V AC
PRI
D- Speech unit type 930 or 930A MONITOR CABLE RISER Power supply
A
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb B type 6680
CH CH CH S 6 5 3 2 1 V
(3x24V 3W max) M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1
VARIANTE 32B
Wiring diagram for camera Art. 559A and
559B with power supply Art. 6680.
A- Audio entrance panel

series 8000, 8100, 3300, 1200 and L1
PATAVIUM A
B- Additional door lock button 5
C- Electric lock 12V AC D 6
7
+T
Art. 559A - 559B V
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb M
-
(3x24V 3W max)
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 B

C
170
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 33
Wiring diagram for relay type 170/560 for additional camera switching.
Monitor Mains
type 6000
V1 PRI Camera
type 6003 M Relay A
Power supply type 5000 - 5020 - 5A20 - 5B20
V2 type 170/560 type 6680
B type 5A10 - 5B10 - 5C10
M
V3 C1 T2 T1 - +T CP V1 V2 V V M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1 +T - V M
CN1
+A
+
-
+D
CH
CN2
CN1
7
AU
1
2
3
5
6E L1
A 6
C 6P A
6S 3
4
4 6
8 7
4 8
9 CT
Interphone +T
V
C
type 6200+6152 M
Monitor ELVOX
type 6300 V2 D B
type 6301 V1
type 6320 M
type 6321 V313
type 6303 12
type 6401 1110 A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200
type 6500 9
type 6501 8 PATAVIUM or letter box 2550/301-302 series
7
6 B- Electric lock 12V
5
4
C - Camera with speech unit
3
2
type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
1 570G, 571, 559C and 570C
D- Additional door lock button
(3x24V 3W max)
M 10x24V 3W with type M832
V
13 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
Monitor 12
11
type 6600 10
type 660A 9
8
type 6700 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OPERATION
Relay type 170/560 allows the camera self-start and switching. On monitors serie 6300, 6500 use push-button with the " "
symbol for the camera self-start and push-button for switching. On monitor series 6600 use push-button to switch the
monitor on, which will display the image captured by the camera on the panel. Pressing and keeping pressed push-button with
the symbol " " a switching to the additional camera occurs.
N.B. Displace the switcher on the back of monitor Art. 6600, 6700 to the “A” position (or under the monitor in type 660A).
On interphones type 6200, use an additional button; the push-buttons used in the diagram are push-buttons number 1 and 2.
Pressing the 1st push-buttons enables self-start of the system without activating the ringtone. If you keep the push-button
pressed down,
you will see the image of the additional camera; when you release it, you will switch to the image of the entrance panel came-
ra.
For night filming, light the viewing area of the secondary camera with an additional bulb, using relay
type 170/001. This bulb can be either infrared for B/W filming, or white light type for colour filming.
For the other connections, follow the standard diagrams for power supply type 6680.
171
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 33B
Wiring diagram for relay type 170/560 for additional camera switching.
Monitor Mains
type 6000
Camera
type 6003 V1
Relay PRI Power supply
M A type 5000 - 5020 - 5A20 - 5B20
V2 type 170/560 type 6680 type 5A10 - 5B10 - 5C10
B
M
V3 C1 T2 T1 - +T CP V1 V2 V V M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1 +T - V M
CN1
+A
+
-
+D
CH
CN2
CN1
7
AU
1
2
3
5
6E L1
A 6
C 6P A
6S 3
4
4 6
8 7
4 8
9 CT
Interphone +T
V
C
type 6200+6152 M
Monitor ELVOX
type 6300 D
type 6301
V2 B
V1
type 6320 M
V3
type 6321 13
type 6303 12
type 6401 11
A- Video entrance panel, 12000
10
type 6500 9
type 6501 8
3300, 8000, 8100, PATAVIUM or letter box
7 2550/301-302 series
6
5 B- Electric lock 12V
4
3 C - Camera with speech unit
2
1 type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, 558, 570,
570G, 571, 559C and 570C
D- Additional door lock button
M
(3x24V 3W max)
V
13
12 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
11
10
Monitor 9
8
type 6600 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OPERATION
Relay type 170/560 allows the camera self-start and switching.
On monitors serie 6300, 6500 use push-button with the " " symbol for the camera self-start and switching.
On monitors series 6600 use push-button with the " " symbol for the self-start and the push-button with the " " symbol for
the camera switching (desplace the switch on the rear of monitor to "A" position).
On interphones type 6200, use an additional button; the push-button used in the diagram is push-button number 1.
Pressing this push-button enables self-start of the system without activating the ringtone. If you keep the push-button pressed
down,
you will see the image of the additional camera; when you release it, you will switch to the image of the entrance panel came-
ra.
For night filming, light the viewing area of the secondary camera with an additional bulb, using relay
type 170/001. This bulb can be either infrared for B/W filming, or white light type for colour filming.
For the other connections, follow the standard diagrams for power supply type 6680.
172
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 34
Wiring diagram of video entry unit with conversation privacy and door lock release after call.
To provide conversation privacy, fit card type 6155 into interphone type 6200.
V1
CN1
M
S
V2
M
V3
Monitor +A
type 6000 + Use the push-button with the symbol , connected as
type 6003 - shown in the diagram, to enable opening of the door lock
+D
CH
at any time.
CN2
CN1
Mains
7
PRI
AU AU
Power supply
1 1 A
Art. 6155
2 2 type 6680
B
3 3
5 6E M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
6E CN1
C 6
A 6P
Interphone
6S
type 6200 + 6155
12 V A.C. electric
door lock.
V1
CN1
M
S
V2
M
V3
Use additional push-button No 1, connected as shown
Interphone +A in the diagram, to enable opening of the door lock
type 6000 + after a call, with the interphone ON.
type 6003 -
+D
CH
CN2
CN1
Mains
7
PRI
AU AU
Power supply
1 1 A
Art. 6155
2 2 type 6680
B
3 3
5 6E M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
6E CN1
C 6
A 6P
6S
4
8
Interphone 12 V A.C. electric
type 6200 + 6155 + 6152 door lock.
173
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 35
Wiring diagram for video amplifier type 5559.

Amplifier
Monitor type 5559 Mains
Type 6000
V1 PRI Power supply
Type 6003 M A
V2
B
type 6680
M
V3 Vin 1 2 3 Vout M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1 L1
A
CN1
+A
+
75 Ohm
- 3
4
+D
6
CH
7
CN2
8
CT
+T
C
CN1
V
M
Monitor ELVOX
Type 6300 V2 D B
Type 6500 V1
Type 6320 M When the connection lines are more than 200 metres long, on
V3
Type 6301 13 video or CCTV door entry systems, the attenuation of the video
12 signal on the coaxial cable makes it necessary to use video line
Type 6321 11
Type 6401 10 A- Video entrance panel 1200, amplifier type 5559. It is possible, however, to exceed lengths
9 of 200 metres with good quality coaxial cable. The amplifier ope-
Type 6501 8 3300, 8000, 8100, PATAVIUM series
7 or letter box type 2550/301-302 rates with input and output impedances of 75 Ohm; it is there-
6
5 C - Camera type 559, 559A, 559B, 559G, fore advisable to use RG59 coaxial cable or good quality cables
4
558, 570, 570G, 571, 559C, 570C with equivalent impedance. It is advisable to install
3
2 B - Electric lock 12V~ the amplifier near the power supply, in a dry, ventilated area. It
1
D- Electric lock button is possible to install the amplifier on the monitor cable riser; if
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb you do this, however, the amplifier will also amplify any distur-
(3x24V 3W max) bance signals on the video connection line. The amplifier is
M
V 10x24V 3W with type M832 equipped with a device which adapts the gain to the length of
13 the line.
Monitor 12 16X24V 3W with type 832/030
11 It is therefore necessary to move the 3-pin connector to the
Type 6600 10
9
position corresponding to the line length nearest to the pre-
Type 660A
8 selected values of 200 m, 400 m, 600 m and 800 m. For inter-
Type 6700 7
6
mediate line lengths move the 3-pin connector to the position
5 corresponding to the length immediately below the available
4
3 values; then adjust the gain trimmer P1, until the image has suf-
2 ficient contrast. Make the connection as shown in the diagram.
1
Remember to leave in place the 75 Ohm load resistance to the
input terminals "IN". Connect the resistances supplied with the
V
V2-M terminals of the last monitor. For the other connections,
refer to the wiring diagrams for the power supply type 6680.
VARIATION 36
Wiring diagram for transformer type M832-832/030

in entrance panels with name tag illumination
bulbs Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY TRANSFORMER
A
The transformer is used when there are three or more B type 6680 type M832
name tag illumination bulbs. M1 V1 V2 M2 AU C2 1 2 3 - + S 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 0 S1 C1 PRI 0 15
type 832/030
Mains
A- Video entrance panel 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200

PATAVIUM series or letter box type 2550/301-302
C - Camera 3 A
4
B - Electric lock 12V~ 6
7
D- Electric lock button 8
L1...Lx- 3x24V 3W max CT
+T
10x24V 3W max with M832 V C
16x24V 3W max with 832/030 M
D
B
174
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 37
Wiring diagram of video distributor type 5556/004 for several cable risers.
The video connection must be made using a RG59 type cable or one similar with an impedance of 75 Ohm.
75 Ohm resistors (supplied) must be wired across video outputs V1-V2-V3-V4. These resistors must be wired to the output ter-
minals not used or terminals V2-M on the last riser monitor. A 75 Ohm resistor must also be wired to the “V” voltage-free termi-
nal on the last distributor.
N.B. Video distributor type 5556/004 is equipped with trimmer P1 which simultaneously adjusts the video signal gain at all the
outputs. This trimmer is factory-set to 1.
Monitor terminals Monitor terminals Monitor terminals

series Petrarca series 6300-6400-6500 series 6600
75 Ohm
V1 V2 M
M V1 75ohm V
V2 75ohm M 13
M V3 12
V3 13 11

V1 V2 M
M V1 V
V2 M 13
M V3 12
V3 13 11

V1 V2 M
M V1 V
V2 M 13
M V3 12
V3 13 11
To power supply
type 6680
V
75ohm
75ohm
+T
- +U +I A B C D + - V V V1 V2 V3 V4
Power supply Distributor

type 6582 type 5556/004
PRI
Mains
N.B. In power supply type 6582 short circuit terminals A-B-D.
175
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 38
Wiring diagram of video door entry unit and video floor distributor type 5556/004 or type 6554 with monitors series
Petrarca.
The wiring diagram only illustrates the monitor cable riser connection to a video floor distributor in a video door entry system.
To make the remaining connections, follow the standard wiring diagrams for power supply type 6680, except for the monitor cable
riser connection (without video floor distributor) which must be replaced by the one shown in this diagram.
Monitor cable riser
V -+
M M
75ohm 75ohm
V V
13 13
Monitor 12 12
11 11
Monitor
type 6600 10 10 type 6600
type 660A 9 9
8 8
type 660A
type 6700 7 7 type 6700
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Monitor Monitor
type 6300 type 6300
type 6301 V2 75 ohm 75 ohm V2 type 6301
V1 V1
type 6320 M M type 6320
type 6321 V3 V3
13 13
type 6321
type 6303 12 12 type 6303
type 6401 11 11
10 10
type 6401
type 6500 9 9 type 6500
8 8
type 6501 7 7 type 6501
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
5556/004 e 6554:
75 Ohm resistors (supplied) must be wired
Distributor across video outputs V1-V2-V3-V4. These
type 5556/004 resistors must be wired to the output termi-
V4
type 6554 V3 nals not used or terminals V2-M on the moni-
V2
V1 tor. A 75 Ohm resistor must also be wired to
V
V the voltage-free terminal “V” on the last distri-
-
+
butor.
Monitor Monitor
type 6000 type 6000
V1 V1
type 6003 M M
type 6003
V2 75ohm 75ohm V2
M M N.B. To power the distributors, connect
V3 V3
the terminals - and + of the distributor to
the - and +D (or 10) terminals only of the
CN1
CN1
+A +A
+ +
- - monitors connected to the distributor
+D +D
CH CH itself.
CN2
CN2
CN1
CN1
IMPORTANT:
Distributor type 6554 can be connected
Distributor directly to the + and - terminal of the stan-
type 5556/004 dard power supply instead of +D (or 10)
V4 75ohm
type 6554 V3 75ohm terminal of the monitor.
V2 In this case, it is possible to insert a maxi-
V1
V mum of 10 video distributors type 6554 in
V
- the same system with monitor Type 6300-
+
6301-6000-6003 and max. 5 video distribu-
tor with monitor type 6500-6501-6401.
To power supply
V - + type 6680
176
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 39
Wiring diagram of video door entry unit and video floor distributor type 5556/004 or type 6554 with monitors series
6300 and 6500.
The wiring diagram only illustrates the monitor cable riser connection to a video floor distributor in a video door entry system.
To make the remaining connections, follow the standard wiring diagrams for power supply type 6680, except for the monitor
cable riser connection (without video floor distributor) which must be replaced by the one shown in this diagram.
Monitor cable riser
V1
+U 6 5
V
75 ohm V Last distributor
3 type 5556/004
- type 6554
+
Last floor
M M 5556/004 e 6554:
75 Ohm V V 75 Ohm
13 13
75 Ohm resistors (supplied)
12 12 must be wired across video out-
Monitor 11 11
10 10
Monitor puts V1-V2-V3-V4. These resi-
type 6600 type 6600
9 9 stors must be wired to the out-
type 660A 8 8 type 660A
type 6700 7 7 type 6700 put terminals not used or termi-
6 6 nals V2-M on the monitor. A 75
5 5
4 4 Ohm resistor must also be
3 3 wired to the voltage-free termi-
2 2
1 1 nal “V” on the last distributor.
Monitor
type 6300
Monitor
V2 75 ohm 75 ohm V2 type 6301
type 6300 V1 V1 type 6320 IMPORTANT:
type 6301 M M
type 6321
type 6320 V3 V3 The power supply type 6583
13 13 type 6303
type 6321 can power up to a maximum of
12 12 type 6401
type 6303
type 6401
11 11 type 6500 12 distributors 5556/004 or 30
10 10 type 6501
type 6500 9 9 distributors 6554; if further dis-
type 6501 8 8 tributors are needed, use fur-
7 7
6 6 ther 6583 units.
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 V4 1
V3
V2
V1
Distributor
V
V type 6554
- type 5556/004
+
Second floor
Monitor Monitor
type 6000 type 6000
V1 V1
type 6003 M M type 6003
V2 75ohm 75ohm V2
M M
V3 V3
CN1
CN1
+A +A
+ +
- -
+D +D
CH CH
CN2
CN2
CN1
CN1
75 ohm V4
75 ohm V3
Mains V2
V1
PRI 15 O +I C +U - V Distributor
V type 6554
A Power supply -
B type 6583 + type 5556/004
First floor C
To power supply
+U 6 5 V
type 6680
177
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VARIATION 39A
Auxiliary relay connection for F1, F2, LS outputs.

A - External command push-buttons.
Mains Relè
Type 170/001
PRI
Auxiliary service
Type 6935/A 230VA.C. max. 3A
Z PH B3 F2 F1 AU C1 4 3 1 5 7 8 S1 LS 15 0 AS
1 2 3 4 5
F1
A
Relè
Type 170/001
Auxiliary service
230VA.C. max. 3A
1 2 3 4 5
F2
A
Relè
Type 170/001
Auxiliary service
230VA.C. max. 3A
1 2 3 4 5
LS
VARIATION 39B
Auxiliary relay connection for 6S programmed output.

Relay
Type 170/001
Interphone V1
Type 6221 M
V2
1 2 3 4 5
V3
M
Auxiliary service
- 230VA.C. max. 3A
+
6S
PI
1
3
4
5
L
6E
6P
178
WITH COAX CABLE
®
VARIATION 39C
Connection for programmable relay type 170F.
Relay
Type 170/001 Relay
PRI
Transformer
Type 832/030
1 2 3 4 5 0 15
Auxiliary service
S1 230VA.C. max. 3A
Electric lock 12V∼
Relè
Type 170/001
Relay
PRI
Transformer
Type 832/030
1 2 3 4 5 0 15
Auxiliary service
S2 230VA.C. max. 3A
V1
Interphone
M
Type 6221
V2
V3 Electric lock 12V∼
M
Relay A2 A1 B2 B1
- Type 170F
+
6S
PI S2 S1 5 4 6 1
1
3
4
5
L
6E
6P
179
WITH COAX CABLE ®
VIDEO
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
WITHOUT COAX CABLE
WITH SOUND SYSTEM
CALL
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE (in mm2)

2 2 2
a 0, 15, -, +, S1, P1, P2, +T 1 mm 1,5 mm 2,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
180
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE WITH POWER
SUPPLY TYPE 6568 ®
OPERATION
The video installation without coaxial cable has been designed to reduce to the minimum mounting operations and particularly
when carrying out remaking works. The installation can use the 5-wire conductors of old intercom (4 common + 1 call) without
using a shielded cable for the video signal. The installation consists of one camera entrance panel, speech unit, one power
supply and one or more monitors. When a push-button of entrance panel is pressed, the ringtone rings in the corresponding
apartment. Almost immediately the image of the caller appears on the monitor. The coverage area is illuminated, in a invisible
way, by infrared LED’S (when using a B/W camera) or white light (when using a color camera) incorporated in the entrance panel.
If desired, the user may simply raise the interphone, communicate with the caller and, if appropriate, activate the door lock relea-
se. In this case, door-opening time may be varied from 0.5 to 30 seconds using the potentiometer P3.
ATTENTION: the installation is completely switched off by pressing the lock release push-button.
The system turns automatically off after a preset time, adjustable from 30 to 90 seconds using potentiomenter P1 inside power
supply.
If the caller presses another user’s push-button, the previously called monitor is automatically disactivated without waiting for the
end of the preset time.
When testing the installed system, use trimmer P2 to adjust the optimal volume of the speech unit. For simultaneous activation
of two or more monitors, one extra power supply (type 6582) must be installed for each additional monitor or type 6583 for
more monitors. A blocking circuit cuts off power to the monitors if the line is overloaded or short-circuited. Push-buttons with
name-tags are illuminated through output 0-15 on the power supply. Up to a maximum number of three 24V 3W bulbs can be
connected. Additional transformers type M832 or 832/030 are required for entrance panels with more than three bulbs.
Technical specifications of power supply type 6568

Power supply for video door entry installation without coaxial cable; in grey ABS housing; preset for mounting on case with 12-
module DIN supports or with expanding plugs with screws.
- 13V D.C. 0.3A camera supply.
- 15V A.C. rectified 0.25A outputs for panels illumination in continuous operation (max. three 24V 3W bulbs).
- Amplified electric audio door entry system.
- Dimensions: 208x135x72 - Weight: 1.4 Kgs.
Protections on power supply:

- Primary coil of transformer: PTC
- 1st secondary coil for internal electronic supply: F3A 250V (F1) fuse.
- 2nd secondary coil for lock and electronic calls supply: F34 250V (F2) fuse.
- Electronic protection against short-circuits and overloading on monitor cable riser.
- Electronic protection against overloadings to speech unit.
Note:
The electric door lock must operate with an intermittent cycle so that 5 rest periods correspond to one operation period, if not there
is a a risk of overheating of the protection device (one period corresponds to the door lock insertion time).
CARD CALIBRATIONS ON POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6568 EXTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENTS
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS
P1 - 18 D.C. Stabllized supply voltage
(factory set x 4)
P4 - Internal volume (preset during manufacturing)
P5 - Adjustment of lock activation point
(preset during manufacturing)
Removable terminal block P6 - Volume balance (preset during manufacturing)
181
SUPPLY TYPE 6568 ®
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC3001, with floor distributor)

A 6000 + 6201 + 6145, 6000 + 6201 + 7155 + 6145 Monitor n
B 6306, 6506, 6326 Monitor n
D 6568 Power supply 1
E - Additional push-button for lock n
F Series 3300, 8000, 8100, 1200, PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
G 561-561G Camera 1
H 27/005 - 2/994 Diode strip n
I - Landing call push-button n
A 5[+1]+( n-4 )
A
5[+1]
5[+1]
Note:
2
The value in squa-
re bracket is to be 2
added in case of
outdoor call.
I I
5[+1]+( n-2 )
B
In the event of a short circuit, the pro- B
tection devices (PTC)
switch off the mains voltage. Once 5[+1]
the short circuit has been eliminated, 5[+1]
wait for a few minutes to allow the 2
protection device to cool down so 2
that the unit can return to normal ope-
ration.
I 5[+1]+n
I
type 6680 powers a maximum of 3
24V 3 W bulbs
D
Transformer type M832 powers a 12+n
maximum of 10 24V 3W bulbs;
Transformer type M832/030 powers
a maximum of 16 24V 3W bulbs.
2
E
F+G+H
ELVOX
N. B. The system can be completed by adding other services. To C

do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the
various components of the system, on pages 188 to 198. BLOCK DIAGRAM N. sb1263
182
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6568, PANEL
WITH CAMERA TYPE 561, AND CAMERA TYPE 560A
®
P2 + -
Connect 75 Ohm resistor (supplied) to the last
Monitor
type 6000 +
* monitor, between terminals V1-M and V3-M.
type 6201 +
type 6145
*
V1
Remove the connection jumper V3-M from the
monitor terminal block and set the microswitch
M 75 Ohm located under the monitor to the twisted position.
V2
M
V3 A D1 D A- Video entrance panel
75 Ohm B- Additional push-button for lock
3300 561, 561G 560A
CN1
+A
+ 8000 561, 561G 560A C- Electric lock 12V~
- D- Camera with speech unit type 560A
+D 8100 560A
CH 1200 560A D1- Camera with speech unit
type 561-561G
CN2
PATAVIUM 561, 561G 560A

CN4
1 L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max.)

2 10x24V 3W with type M832
3
4
SR
SD 5
C 6 F IMPORTANT
A
The monitor type 6000 with interphone type 6201 connected as in the diagram has
no conversation privacy. For systems with conversation privacy remove the jumper
"CN3" on interphones type 6201 and fit card type 7155.
V1
V2
M Function settings for card type 7155:
V3 - Direct door lock release: insert the wire in connector “SD”.
Monitor 13
12 - Door lock release after call: Insert the connector in position “SR”.
type 6306 11
type 6506 10
9 Monitors type 6306 and 6506 are always equipped with conversation privacy.
type 6326 8
7
6
5
4
3 F
2
1
Mains
PRI
POWER SUPPLY
type 6568
CH CH V2 V1 P2 + -
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0
SW1
COAX DOPP.
15
P1
CH
CH
E E
2
L1 L1
A A
3
D 5
6
5
6
4
5
7 6
8 8 8
+T +T +T
SW1 V2 V2
D1 V2
V1 V1 V1
- - -M
0
ELVOX
S1 ELVOX
B B
C C DIAGRAM N° si550
183
SUPPLY TYPE 6568 AND FLOOR DISTRIBUTOR TYPE 6669 ®
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC3040, with floor distributor)

A 6000 + 6201 + 6145, 6000 + 6201 + 7155 + 6145 Monitor n
B 6306, 6506 Monitor n
D - Additional push-button for lock n
F Series 3300, 8100, 8000, 1200, PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
G 561-561G Camera 1
H 27/005 - 2/994 Diode strip n
I 6669 Floor distributor n
L - Landing call push-button
4[+1]+( n-4 )
A A
Note: 5[+1] 5[+1]

The value in squa-
re bracket is to be 2 2
added in case of
outdoor call.
L L
B B
In the event of a short circuit, the pro-
tection devices (PTC)
5[+1] 5[+1]
switch off the mains voltage. Once I
the short circuit has been eliminated,
wait for a few minutes to allow the 2 2
protection device to cool down so
that the unit can return to normal ope-
ration. L L
4[+1]+n

type 6680 powers a maximum of 3
E
24V 3 W bulbs
Transformer type M832 powers a
12+n
D
F+G+H
ELVOX
2
do this, consult the variations on the standard connection for the C
various components of the system, on pages 188 to 198. BLOCK DIAGRAM N. sb1264
184
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE WITH POWER SUPPLY
TYPE 6568 AND FLOOR DISTRIBUTOR TYPE 6669 ®
IMPORTANT:
Video signal closing resistors must be wired to the Monitor V1 V1 Monitor
V2 V2
last video distributor: to do this, simply short V1 type 6306 M M
type 6306
type 6306 V3 V3 type 6306
with R1 and V2 with R2. type 6326 13 13 type 6326
12 12
11 11
10 10
IMPORTANT: The connection line between the 9 9
8 8
video distributor and monitor must not exceed 7 7
20 metres. 6 6
5 5
4 4
Monitor 3 F F 3 Monitor
2 2
type 6000 + 1 1 type 6000 +
type 6201 + type 6201 +
V1 V1
type 6145 M M
type 6145
V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V2 V2
Last M M
V3 V3
distributor
CN1
CN1
+A +A
type 6669 + - V1 R1 V2 R2 + +
- -
+D +D
CH CH
CN2
CN2
CN4
CN4
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4 SR
SR
5 5 SD
SD
C
6 F F 6 C
A A
Remove the con-

nection jumper V3-
M from the monitor
terminal block and
set the microswitch
located under the
monitor to the twi-
sted position.
V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2
DISTRIBUTOR
+ - V1 R1 V2 R2
type 6669
POWER SUPPLY
MAINS type 6568 IMPORTANT
PRI
The monitor type 6000 with
CH CH CH CH V2 V1 P2 + - interphone type 6201 con-
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0
nected as in the diagram
has no conversation pri-
vacy.
For systems with conversa-
tion privacy remove the
jumper "CN3" on interpho-
nes type 6201 and fit card
type 7155.
A- Video entrance panel series
3300, 8000, 8100, 1200 and Function settings for card
PATAVIUM type 7155:
B- Additional push-button for lock - Direct door lock release:
C- Camera with speech unit insert the wire in connec-
type 561-561G E tor “SD”.
D- Electric lock 12V~ A - Door lock release after
L1
E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994 call: Insert the connector
F- Landing call push-button 3 in position “SR”.
4
L1- Panel bulb 5
6
(3x24V 3W max.) 8 Monitors type 6306 and
+T
10x24V 3W with type M832 6506 are always equipped
D V2
V1
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 ELVOX
-M with conversation privacy.
B
C
DIAGRAM N° vc3040
185
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT COAXIAL
CABLE WITH TWO VIDEO SPEECH UNITS ®
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
matically activated for that door entrance panel while the other entrance panels remain disabled. The last call made is given prio-
rity over all preceding calls.
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram Ref. VC3039)
Diagram ref. Type Name Quantity

A 6000 + 6201 + 6145, 6000 + 6201 + 7155 + 6145 Monitor n
A1 6306, 6506 Monitor n
B 8873, 8877 Interphone n
B1 6201 Interphone n
C - Additional push-button for lock 2
D 6669 Distributor 1
F Series 8000, 3300, 8100, 1200 or PATAVIUM Video entrance panel 1
G 561, 561G Camera 1
H 6596 Switching module 1
I Electric lock 12V A.C. 1
L 2/668 Harness 1
M 27/005, 2/994 Diode strip n
N - Landing call push-button n
O - Additional push-button for lock n
4[+1]+(n-4)
In the event of a short circuit, the pro- A B1
tection devices (PTC) switch off the 2[+1]
mains voltage. Once the short circuit 5[+1]
has been eliminated, wait for a few
2
minutes to allow the protection devi- 2
ce to cool down so that the unit can
return to normal operation. N N B
2[+1]
A1
5[+1] 2

2 N
type 6680 powers a maximum of 3 D
24V 3 W bulbs
Transformer type M832 powers a N
4[+1]+n
E
N. B. The system can be completed

H
by adding other services. To do
this, consult the variations on the
standard connection for the 12+n 12+n
various components of the system,
on pages 188 to 198.
Note:
The value in squa- 2 2
re bracket is to be F+G+M F+G+M
added in case of C C
outdoor call.
ELVOX ELVOX
2 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM N. sb1239
I I
186
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLE WITH TWO VIDEO
SPEECH UNITS, WITH OR WITHOUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
IMPORTANT
CH CH + - The monitor type 6000 with interphone type 6201 con-
nected as in the diagram has no conversation privacy.
V1 For systems with conversation privacy remove the jum-
V2
M per "CN3" on interphones type 6201 and fit card type
V3
Monitor 13 7155.
12
type 6306 11
Interphone
type 6506 10
type 6326 9 type 8877 With card type 7155:

8
7
type 8873 - Direct opening of the lock: position the connector in
6
5 position "SD".
4
Monitor 3 F - Opening of lock after call; position the connector in
2 1
type 6000 + 1 3 position "SR".
4/5
type 6201 + 6
type 6145 V1 F
M Monitors type 6306 and 6506 are always equipped with
V2
M conversation privacy.
V3
CN1
+A
+ The lock control is active only when the monitor is swit-
-
+D ched on after a call. Interphone type 8873 (with con-
CH
versation privacy)keeps the lock control ON at all times.
CN2
CN4
1 1 Citofono
2 2
3 3 type 6201
4 4
SR SR
5 5
SD SD
C
6 F F 6
C
A A
V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2
On the distributor, it is necessary to insert the clo-
DIistributor sure resistors for the video signal: to do this,
type 6669
simply short-circuit V1 with R1 and V2 with R2.
+ - V1 R1 V2 R2
The connection line between the distributor

Remove the con- and the monitor must not exceed 20 metres.
Harness
nection jumper type 2/668
V3-M from the
Mains
monitor terminal
PRI
block and set the Power supply Switching module
microswitch loca- CH CH CH CH CH P2 + - V2 V1 type 6568 type 6596
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0 V2 V1 2 5 6 8 - T1 V2 V1 P1 S1 15 0 2 5 6 8 - T2 V2 V1 P2 S2 15 0
ted under the
monitor to the twi-
sted position.

8000, 8100, 1200, 3300 or
PATAVIUM series
D- Camera with speech
unit type 561, 561G E E
E- Diode strip type 27/005 L1 L1
A A
- 2/994
3 3
F- Landing call push-button 4 4
5 5
L1- Entrance panel illumina- 6 6
8 8
tion bulb +T +T
V2 V2 D
(3x24V 3W max.) D V1 V1
-M -M
10x24V 3W with type ELVOX
ELVOX
M832
B B
16X24V 3W with type C C
832/030 DIAGRAM N° vc3039
187
WITHOUT COAX CABLE ®
Wiring diagram of interphone type 6201 connected in Wiring diagram of an interphone in a video door entry
parallel in a video door entry system without coaxial system without coaxial cable.
cable.
Monitor cable riser
V2 V1 - +
- + V2 V1
A- Single connection A Interphone
B- Connection in parallel type 8877
to a video door entry unit type 8873
Monitor 1
type 6000 3
V1 4/5
M
6
V2
M
V3
+A
+
-
+D
B Monitor
type 6306
CH
type 6506
CN1
Interphone type 6326

CN2
type 6201
V1
V2
CN4
CN4
M
1 1 Interphone V3
2 2
SR type 8877 13
3 3
SD 12
4 4
C
5 5
type 8873 11
A
6 6 10
9
8
7
1 6
Mains 3 5
4/5 4
- +U +I A B C D PRI 6 3
Power supply CH V2 V1 - + 2
1
type 6582 To power Mains
supply - +U +I A B C D PRI
type 6568 Power supply
type 6582 CH CH - + V2 V1
Monitor
cable riser
Wiring diagram of monitor self-start button. Wiring diagram of monitor self-start button
It is possible to activate the video system from the monitor, It is possible to activate the video system from the monitor,
using one of the additional buttons (type 6152). The push-but- using the push-button with the symbol .
ton used in the diagram is push-button number 1.
Mains PRI
Power supply
type 6568
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - + P1 S1 15 0
Monitor
type 6000
Monitor
V1
CN1
type 6306
Interphone type 6506 V2
CN2
type 6201+6152 Mains type 6326 M

V3
PRI 13
CN4
Power supply 12
1 type 6568 11
2
SR
3
10
SD - + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0 9
4
C 8
5
A
6 7
6
4 5
8
4
3
2
1
188
Wiring diagram of two or more monitors connected in Wiring diagram of 2 or more monitors connected in paral-
parallel with simultaneous switch-on. lel, with simultaneous switch-on.
Power supply type 6568 powers a single monitor type 6000. Power supply type 6568 powers a single monitor type 6306
If two monitors are to be switched on simultaneously, it is or 6506, connected as shown in the diagram. If more than
necessary to use an additional power supply type 6582 for two monitors are to be switched on simultaneously, it is
each monitor, including the first. necessary to use an additional power supply type 6582 for
each monitor, including the first.
Remove the jumper between V3-M

on the monitor terminal block. Monitor cable riser Monitor
V2 V1 - +
cable riser
Monitor
- + V2 V1
Monitor type 6306
Monitor type 6000 type 6506
type 6000 type 6326
V1 V1
M M
V2 V2
M M V1 V1
V3 V3 V2 V2
+A +A M M
+ + V3 V3
- -
13 13
+D +D
CH CH 12 12
11 11
CN1
CN1
10 10
CN2
CN2
9 9
8 8
7 7
CN4
CN4
1 1 6 6
2 2 5 5
3 3
4 4
4 4
5 5 3 3
6 6 2 2
1 1
Interphone Interphone
type 6201 Mains Mains
type 6201
- +U +I A B C D PRI - +U +I A B C D PRI
Mains Mains
- +U +I A B C D PRI - +U +I A B C D PRI Power supply Power supply CH - + V2 V1
CH V2 V1 - +
type 6582 type 6582
To Power supply
To power supply
type 6568
Power supply Power supply type 6568
type 6582 type 6582
Wiring diagram of call repeater Wiring diagram of call repeater
Type 2/841 repeats the sound of the monitor without changing Type 2/841 repeats the sound of the monitor without changing
its tone. its tone.
N.B. It is not possible to directly connect conventional electro- N.B. It is not possible to directly connect conventional electro-
nic ringtones or mechanical doorbells (see variation). nic ringtones or mechanical doorbells (see variation).
Monitor V1
PETRARCA Series V2
M
V3
CN1
13
Interphone 12
CN2
type 6201 11 Monitor

2 10 type 6306
3 9 type 6506
CN4
Call 5 8 type 6326

1 repeater 6 7
2 type 2/841 6
SR 2 Call repeater
3 5
SD 3 type 2/841
4 4
C 5
5 3
A 6
6 2
1
189
Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtones type Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtones type
860A with interphones type 6201. 860A with monitor type 6306, 6506.
N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A has two different type s of N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A has two different type s of
sounds and three tones, which can be selected between ter- sounds and three tones, which can be selected between ter-
minal 7 and terminal 8. minal 7 and terminal 8.
Additional Additional
ringtone ringtone
Monitor type 860A type 860A
PETRARCA Series
V1
CN1
V2
CN2
PRI 4 5 7 8 M
Mains V3
CN4
13 PRI 4 5 7 8
1
2
12
SR Mains
3 Monitor 11
SD
4 10
C type 6306
5
A
6 type 6506 9
type 6326 8
Interphone
7
type 6201
6
5
4
3
2
1
Wiring diagram for landing call button. Connecting the landing call button
If you connect the landing call push-button as shown in the dia- If you connect the landing call push-button as shown in the
gram, the monitor will produce a different sound from the diagram, the monitor will produce a different sound from the
sound of a call from the main speech unit. In this case the sound of a call from the main speech unit. In this case the
monitor remains switched off. monitor remains switched off.
Monitor
Mains
PETRARCA Series
Mains
PRI
CN1
PRI Power supply

Power supply
CN2
type 6568 type 6568

V1
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0 V2
CN4
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - + P1 S1 15 0
1 M
2
SR
3 A V3
SD
C
4 13
5
A 12
6
11 Monitor
Interphone 10 type 6306
type 6201 9 type 6506
8 type 6326
Landing call 7
push-button 6
5
4
3
2
1
190
VARIATION 52
Connection of a push-button for auxiliary services (or stair light) by means of relay type 170/001 with interphone type
6201.
In the diagram, the push-button used in the interphone for this purpose is number 1 of the additional buttons.
N.B. Maximum capacity of the relay contacts: 3A-230V
CN1
Interphone
CN2
Relay
type 6201 + 6152
Mains type 170/001
PRI
CN4
Power supply
1 type 6568
2
SR
3
SD - + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 Buttons (for activation of
4
C stair light etc.)
5
A
6
4
8
Auxiliary service (stair light etc.)

Maximum load: 3A 230 VAC.
VARIATION 53
Connection of a push-button for auxiliary services (or stair light) by means of relay type 170/001 with monitor type
6306, 6506.
For switch-on of the stair light, use the push-button with the symbol .
N.B. Maximum capacity of the relay contacts: 3A-230V.
Relay
Mains type 170/001
PRI
Power supply
type 6568
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 0 1 2 3 4 5
Monitor
type 6306
type 6506
type 6326
V1
V2
M
V3
13
12
11
10
9
8
7 Stair light buttons
6 Maximum load 3A-230V
5
4
3
2
1
191
VARIATION 54
Wiring diagram of additional mechanical doorbells with interphone type 6201.
Additional 12 V A.C. doorbells may be installed by connecting relay type 170/101 as illustrated in the diagram below.
Maximum contact load: 230V, 3A.
Relay
type 170/101
Monitor
PETRARCA series
CN1
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
Interphone
CN2
type 6201
CN4
1
2 Bell
SR
3
SD
4
C Bell
5
A
6 supply
VARIATION 55
Additional mechanical bell connection with monitor type 6306, 6506.
Additional 12 VA.C. bells may be installed using relay type 170/101 by connecting it as shown in the wiring diagram.
Maximum contact load: 230V, 3A.
Relay
type 170/101
V1
V2
M
V3
13
12
11 Monitor
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
10 type 6306
9 type 6506
Bell 8 type 6326
7
6
5
Bell 4
supply 3
2
1
192
Technical specifications OF RINGTONE type 6150

- Two-tone sound signal - power supply: 13.5 ÷ 18Vc.c. - Consumption 75mA
DESCRIPTION
DING-DONG ringtone card for installation in interphones type 6200 - 6201 in the PETRARCA series.
Once installed, the card enables the interphone to be used in systems with AC call or, if fitted in SOUND
SYSTEM installations, converts the sound of the interphone from modulated to two-tone (DING-DONG).
RINGTONE ASSEMBLY
1) Open the interphone by separating the cover from the base.
2) Insert the electronic card in its seat and fix with the screw supplied.
3) Remove the 2 loudspeaker conductors (Faston type ) from the standard interphone card and insert
them (without taking account of polarisation) in the two pins (denominated "A-A") of ringtone type
6150.
4) Make the connection as shown in the diagrams attached.
VARIATION 56 Monitor
Interphone PETRARCA series
Wiring diagram of electronic two-tone ringtone type 6150 type 6201 +D
Loudspeaker CH
CN1
CN2
CN4
1
2
SR
The ringtone with electronic two-tone sound type SR 3
SD C SD
4
6150 must be inserted in interphone type 6201 to A C
5
A
6
change the modulated sound generated by the power
+
supply type 6568. A
A
CH
-
Loudspeaker
Art. 6
150
+ CH A A
-
Connection of power supply type 6583 on installations
Wiring diagram of video entry unit with conversation pri- with considerable voltage drop on power line “+ -”.
vacy and door lock release after call.
Additional power supply type 6583 may be connected as
Disconnect the jumper from connector "CN4" and mount con- shown in diagram, in case of long supply lines where power
versation privacy card type 7155. voltage on line wiring to monitors (+ -) is less than 15V= bet-
ween terminals 5-6. This unit can supply 18V= 1,6A with
If a conversation privacy card is fitted, the door lock can also continuous operation, 3A with intermittent operation.
be released after a call only by disconnecting the wire from
connector "SO" and reconnecting it to connector "SR" N.B. Set the jumper to position “B-C”
PETRARCA series
CN1
monitor
CN2
Mains
Interphone
type 6201 PRI
Monitor Power supply
type 6568
CN4
cable riser
1 + - + -
- + P2 AU 2 5 6 8 - + P1 S1 15 0
2
CN3
3
4
5
SR
6
SD
C Mains
A
PRI 15 0 +I C +U -
Power supply
SR A
SD C type 6583 B
A C
193
VARIATION 59
Call sound level control, with OFF indicator (red LED) and "lock open" indicator (green LED), with accessory module
type 6153 with interphones type 6201.
Wiring diagram of call volume control module
DESCRIPTION OF MODULE type 6153
without LEDs
Switching module type 6153 makes it possible to control the ringto- V1
V2
ne volume or disable it, on interphones with call loudspeaker +
in the PETRARCA series, type 6201. The device is also equipped -
with two LEDs , one for indicating that the ringtone is OFF (red indi- CH
cator) and one for indicating that the lock is open (green indicator); CH
the use of these two devices requires additional connections to be To power supply
made, as shown in the wiring diagrams on the next page. type 6568
Monitor V1
M
INSTALLING THE MODULE ON PETRARCA SERIES 6201 INTER- type 6000 V2
PHONES M
- Open the interphone, split the cover from the bottom making pres- V3
sure on the lower side of the cover (Fig. 1)
+A
- Snap off the plastic lamina by exerting pressure on it (Fig. 1B)
+
CN1
- Insert the card in its seat and fix it with the screw supplied (Fig. 2) -
- Disconnect the loudspeaker wire from "A" on the interphone. +D
- Insert the removed wire onto the pin (CN2) on the card type 6153. CH
- Insert the wire pre-connected to terminal n° 6 of type 6153, into
CN2
pin "A" of the interphone (Fig. 3).
Interphone
N.B. On terminal n° 7 of card type 6153, there is a wire to be used type 6201
CN4
for visual indication that the ringtone is disabled.
1
In position "0" (ringtone OFF) terminals 7 - 10 are connected to the
CN3
2
diode, thus enabling the red visual indicator (LED) to light. 3
4
5
SR
6
SD
C
A
6
CN2 DL1 7
8
A DL2 9
10
A - type 6153
Fig. 2 V1 V2 + - CH
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Call level selection

Left 0 1 2 3 Right
← →

Position "1": minimum volume
Position "2": medium volume
Fig. 3 Position "3": maximum volume
When the ringtone OFF visual indicator is

Loudspeaker
BI used (red LED) as well as the "lock open"
BL
R0 indicator (green LED)
C
A it is necessary to power these LEDs with a
separate power supply type 6582, which
can power up to 30 LEDs simultaneously.
type 6153 See diagrams on next page.
Standard interphone card 6
7
194
VARIATION 60
Connection of ringtone level control module, with OFF indicator (red LED) and "lock open" indicator (green LED) with
interphones type 6201.
Remove the jumper between V3-M
Mains Mains from the monitor terminal block
PRI
PRI
type 6582 type 6568
- +U +I A B C D - + P2 P1 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 O
V1
V2
The diagram shows the connection of type 6153 with
the
ringtone OFF (red LED) and "lock open" (green LED)
CH
CH indicators with interphones type 6201 and monitor type
Monitor V1 To power supply 6000,
M
type 6000 V2 type 6568 If you do not need to use one of the two functions, pro-
M
V3 ceed as follows:
+A
+ Relay With the ringtone OFF LED connect only the wire to ter-
CN1
- minal N. 10 of type 6153. With the "lock open" LED,

+D type 170/001
CH
1 2 3 4 5 connect only terminal N. 8 of type 6153.
CN2
As shown in the diagram, a power supply type 6582 is

CN4
1 used to power these LEDs .

CN3
2
3
4
The power supply can power a total of up to 30 LEDs
15
5
SR
6
simultaneously. For a larger number, it is necessary to
SD
C
A
S1
use further additional power supplies.
6
CN2 DL1 7
8
DL2 9
10
Interphone Lock with

type 6201+6153 normally open switch
V1 V2 + - C +U CH
VARIATION 61
Connection with "lock open" visual indicator (green LED) with monitor type 6306 and 6506.
Mains
Mains PRI
PRI

type 6582 type 6568
- +U +I A B C D - + P2 P1 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 O
The diagram shows the connection of

the "lock open" indicator (green LED)
V1
V2
with monitor type 6306 and 6500 (con-
nection to terminal 13),
As shown in the diagram, a power

CH
CH supply type 6582 is used to power the
green LEDs .
The power supply can power a total of
up to 30 LEDs simultaneously.
For a larger number, it is necessary to
V1
V2 use further additional power supplies.
M 1 2 3 4 5
V3
Monitor 13
12
type 6306 11
type 6506 10
type 6326 9
8
15
7
6
5 S1
4
3
2
1
Lock with
normally open switch
V1 V2 + - -U C CH
195
VARIATION 62
Wiring diagram of video door entry unit without coaxial cable with more than 10 floor distributors type 6669.
Important: For more than 10 video distributors type 6669 and up to a maximum of 15, use power supply type 6583.
N.B.
Connect jumpers between terminals V1 and R1 and V2 and R2 on the last distributor.
Last
distributor
type 6669
Top floor
Distributor
type 6669
Mains
To monitors 4th floor
Distributor
type 6669
Power supply
type 6583
To monitors 3rd floor
Distributor
type 6669
To monitors 2nd floor
Distributor
type 6669
To monitors 1st floor
To power supply type 6568

Wiring diagram: vc2940
196
VARIATION 63
Examples of video signal distribution on several cable risers without using coaxial cable.
1° Monitor cable riser 2° Monitor cable riser Monitor 3° Monitor cable riser Monitor 4° Monitor cable riser
type 6000 + type 6000 +
75ohm 75ohm
V1 V1
type 6201 + V1 type 6201 + V1
M M
V2 V2 type 6145 V2
75 Ohm type 6145 V2
75 Ohm
M M
M M
V3 V3
75ohm 13
Monitor 75ohm 13
V3 V3
75 Ohm 75 Ohm
12 type 6306 12
+A +A
CN1
11 11
CN1
10 type 6506 10
+
-
+
-
9 9
8 type 6326 8
+D +D
CH CH
7 7
Monitor
CN2
CN2
6 6
type 6306 5 5
4 4
type 6506
CN4
CN4
3 3
2 2
type 6326 1 1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
SR 5 SR 5
V1 V1 SD 6 SD 6
V2 V2 C C
M M A A
V3 V3
Monitor 13 Monitor 13
Monitor Monitor
type 6306 12 12 type 6000 + type 6000 +
11 type 6306 11 V1 V1
type 6506 type 6201 + type 6201 +
10
9
type 6506 10
9 type 6145
M
V2
M
V2
type 6326 type 6145
8 type 6326 8 M M
7 7 V3 V3
6 6
5 5 +A +A
CN1
CN1
4 4 + +
3 3 - -
2 2 +D +D
1 1 CH CH
CN2
CN2
CN4
CN4
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
SR 5 SR 5
SD 6 SD 6
C C
A A
V2 V1 + - V2 V1 + - E2 M E1 + -
V2 Distributor V2
V1 V1
- type 6670 -
+ +
Mains
2 x 75 Ohm resistor
PRI
Power supply
type 6568
- + P2 P1 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 O
A- Video-entrance panel
B- Camera with speech unit type 561-561G
C- Additional push-button for lock
D- Electric lock 12V L1
E- Diode strip type 27/005 - 2/994 A
L1- Panel bulb 3
4
(3x24V 3W max) 5 B
6
10x24V 3W with type M832 8
+T
16x24V 3W with type 832/030 V2
V1
-
ELVOX
Wiring diagram: vc4388 C D
197
VARIATION 64
Connection of a camera separate from the entrance panel with speech unit and additional bulbs for lighting the the vie-
wing zone.
The figure shows the connection of an entrance panel with the speech unit only and a separate camera type 5020 - 5A20 - 5B20
-5A10- 5B10 - 5C10. The illumination bulb (L) must be inserted as shown in the diagram. For B/W filming infrared lighting can
be used.
To connect the audio speech unit type 930 or 930A, use the video signal converter device type 2/567, which is installed in the
GALILEO series entrance panel with neutral module type 8000, and is included in the system to eliminate the coaxial cable from
the power supply to the entrance panel: this converts the output of the video signal for coaxial cable from 75 Ohm to video signal
on the twisted pair telephone line with balanced impedance.
Monitor V1
M 75 Ohm
type 6000 V2 Remove the con-
M
V3 nection jumper V3-
75 Ohm M from the monitor
+ terminal block and
- set the microswitch
CH located under the
monitor to the twi-
CN2
sted position.
CN4
1
2
3
4
SR 5
SD 6
C
A
Interphone
type 6201
V1
V2
M Mains Relay
V3 Additional type 170/001
13 PRI camera
Monitor 12 Power supply
11
type 6306 10 type 6568
type 6506 9
type 6326 8
- + P2 P1 2 5 6 8 - +T P1 S1 15 O +T - V M 1 3 4 5
7
6
5
4
L
3
2
1
Mains
E
L1
A
A- 8000 series audio entrance panel 3
4
B- Speech unit type 930, 930A B
C- Additional door lock push-button 6
D- 12V~ electric lock 8

V
F- Video signal converter type 2/567 M
R
R- Load resistance 75 Ohm + F
-
L- Viewing area illumination bulb V1
L1- Entrance panel illumination bulb V2
(3x24V 3W max)
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 C D
Wiring diagram: vc2933
198
®
4-WIRE VIDEO DOOR

ENTRY SYSTEM KITS
MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR 4-WIRE SYSTEM KITS (in mm2)
Monitor terminal up to10 m. up to 30 m. up to 50 m. up to 100 m.

11 - 12 1,5mm2 - - -
1-2 type 63CV / 0,5 mm2 0,75 mm2 1mm2
Video type 63CV

Coaxial cable 75 Ohm (type RG59) Coaxial cable 75 Ohm (type RG59)
199
4-WIRE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM KIT
®
OVERVIEW
The 4-WIRE video door entry system kit was designed to facilitate installation.
It consists of a 4" monitor with flat screen powered by a transformer to be connected to the AC mains, and a "PATAVIUM",
"8000", "3300" or letter box series entrance panel with camera and audio speech unit.
The system can be extended by adding extra monitors and/or interphones, a call repeater and other useful accessories supplied
on request.
Models of kit
637E Single residence kit with 8000 surface wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63U7 and a B/W monitor type 63M7.
637G Single residence kit with 8000 flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63U7 and a B/W monitor type 63M7.
637G/S2 Double residence kit with 8000 flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63U7/V and 2 B/W monitors type 63M7.
637G/C1 Single residence kit with 8000 flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63B7 and a colour monitor type 63C7.
637G/C2 Double residence kit with 8000 flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63B7/V and 2 colour monitors type 63C7
637V Single residence kit with 3300 flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63U7/V and a B/W monitor 63M7.
637T Single residence kit with Patavium flush wall-mounted entrance panel, camera type 63U7/V and B/W monitor type 63M7.
637P Single residence kit with letter box entrance panel, camera type 570, speech unit type 930E and a B/W monitor type 63M7.
200
®
OPERATING PRINCIPLE - 3,7 mm F4.5 lens with fixed focus

When entrance panel push-button is pressed, a call signal is heard and - Brightness automatic control
the monitor comes on immediately,showing a clear image of the caller. - Video signal standard CCIR, 625 lines, 50 images (standard EIA on
Lift interphone to communicate with caller and if required operate the request)
electric lock by pressing the push-button with the key symbol. The mon- - Video output voltage 1Vpp on 75 Ohms
itor turns off automatically after about 30".The installation can be - Operating temperature -5° +50° C.
- Infrared subject lighting.
switched on from the inside by pressing the push-button with the - Name-tag lighting by means of LEDs.
symbol, thus allowing an external view when required. - Built-in speech unit
- Removable terminal block for connection (point “E”).
Technical specifications OF MONITOR (type 63M7) - 12V D.C. 150mA supply provided by monitor.
- Surface wall-mounted housing in ABS plastic, available in white,
white/black or black. Technical specifications OF TRANSFORMER (type 832/030)
- Back plate and fixing screws for wall mounting (supplied in packing). - 4 -Module DIN housing in ABS plastic
- CRT with 4" flat screen. - 230V 50Hz supply voltage (other voltages on request)
- Electronic circuit on interchangeable card. - 15V A.C. 30VA output voltage
- Standard CCIR, 625 lines, 50 images (Standard EIA on request). - Internal protection against short-circuits with PTC
- 4MHz pass band. - Overall dimensions: 75x105x65 mm
- Input signal 1Vpp on 75 Ohms.
- Operating temperature: 0° C + 40° C. MONITOR INSTALLATION
- Built-in adjustable electronic ringtone. Install monitor far from sources of heat and light.
- 3-position variable ringtone volume adjustment. Fix the monitor hooking plate to the wall (its base mounted at 1.40 m.
- Brightness control from floor level). Carry out connections on monitor terminal block by fol-
- Contrast control lowing enclosed diagrams.
Insert the monitor on the previously fixed hooking plate.
- Push button for electric lock release .
It is possible to change this monitor into a desk version by using he
- Auto-switching push-button . desk-top conversion kit type 6610.
NOTES:
- Push push-button for auxiliary functions (stair-light, etc.). The installation ensures a good operation if connected with 30 m. cable
- 15V A.C. supply voltage type 63CV (supplied separately) and also if a 12V A.C. 10VA electrical
- Camera supply output door lock is connected.
- Overall dimensions: 204x220x71 mm If longer distances up to max 100m are required, increase cable sec-
tion. Use coaxial cable type RG59.
Technical specifications OF MONITOR (type 63C7).
- Surface wall-mounted housing in ABS plastic, available in white. ENTRANCE PANEL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY UNIT
- back-plate and fixing screws for wall mounting (supplied in packing). INSTALLATION
- With 4" colour LCD flat screen. Orient the external camera unit so that it is not struck
- Electronic circuit on interchangeable card. directly by light sources (sun, street lights, car headlights etc.). The sub-
- Pal standard video signal ject to be filmed must be lit frontally so as to
- Input signal 1Vpp on 75 Ohms. avoid filming against the light. The camera unit is equipped with infra-
- Operating temperature: 0° C + 40° C. red light emitters which, in the absence of illumination, make it possible
- Built-in adjustable electronic ringtone. to film a subject at a distance of about one metre. It is advisable to pro-
- Ringtone volume adjustment. tect the device with a wall-mounted canopy or other form of shelter.
- Brightness control Separate the flush-mounting box from the entrance panel, install the
- Colour control box at a recommended height of 1.65 m from its top edge to the ground.
- Push button for electric lock release .
INSTALLATION OF SUPPLY TRANSFORMER
- Auto-switching push-button 4-DIN module supply transformer type 832/030 may be wall mounted
with long fixing screws (supplied) or on a box equipped with DIN sup-
port. It is advisable to connect supply network with a double pole fused
- Push push-button for auxiliary functions (stair-light, etc.).
isolator.
- 15V A.C. supply voltage
This transformer is equipped with thermal protection (PTC) so that, in
- Camera supply output
the event of a short-circuit to the secondary supply, the protection cir-
- Overall dimensions: 204x220x71 mm
cuit removes the 15V secondary voltage until the fault is rectified.
- Weight: Kgs. 1.5 without packing.
After cutting off power supply to the primary and after eliminating
Technical specifications OF CAMERA (type 63B7 and 63B7/V)
the short-circuit, it is necessary to wait for a few minutes to allow
- CCD 1/4" sensor
cooling of the protective device, so that the transformer may start
- 3,0 mm F2,8 lens with fixed focus
normal operation again.
- Brightness automatic control
- Video signal standard PAL
FAULT-FINDING (can be solved by users):
- Video output voltage 1Vpp on 75 Ohms
MONITOR OFF
- Operating temperature -5° +50° C.
Check that transformer has been connected correctly to mains supply.
- Subject lighting by means of white light LED.
Voltage on terminals 11 and 12 of monitor should be of 15V.
- Name-tag lighting by means of LED diodes.
MONITOR ON WITHOUT PICTURE:
- Built-in speech unit
Check that cables between monitor and camera are wired properly and
- Removable terminal block for connection
that there are not interruptions and/or short circuits.
- 12V D.C. 150mA supply provided by monitor.
SCREEN WITH ONE OR TWO HORIZONTAL BARS AND/OR DIS-
- Overall dimensions: 120x80x25 mm
TORTED PICTURES.
- Weight: Kgs. 0.6 without packing.
Check that supply voltage to terminals M and +T of camera is 12V
±10% (10,8V÷13,2V). If installation still does not work, contact our main-
Technical specifications OF CAMERA (type 63U7 and 63U7/V)
tenance department or specialized technicians.
- CCD 1/4" sensor
201
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM KIT WITH
CAMERA TYPE 63U7 OR 63B7, FOR type 637E, 637G, 637G/C1 ®
Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7
Transformer
type 832/030
In the monitor, insert the 75 Ohm

resistor supplied as standard, bet-
MAINS
COAX
RED
YELLOW
Cable
type 63CV
COAX
type 63U7
YELLOW
type 63B7
RED

type 88V1
type 8901/637
type 8901/637T
LOCK
12V - 10VA
WIRING DIAGRAM N° vc4269-1
202
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM KIT WITH
CAMERA TYPE 63U7/V FOR KIT TYPE 637V, 637T ®
Monitor
type 63M7
Transformer
type 832/030

MAINS
COAX
RED
YELLOW
Cable
type 63CV

type 3381 COAX
type 2301/637 YELLOW

RED
type 63U7/V
LOCK
12V - 10VA
Connect entrance panel push-button according to wiring diagram.
203
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM KIT FOR TYPE 637P ®
Monitor
type 63M7
Transformer
type 832/030
7 8 9 10 11 13 V3 V2 0 15 PRI
75ohm resistor supplied as standard, bet-
MAINS
COAX
RED
YELLOW
Cable
type 63CV

type 2550/301L
-M COAX
A V
A- Camera
type 570
YELLOW
B- Speech unit
1
type 930E
2 RED C- Call push-button
B 3
4
D- Call push-button lighting
bulb 24V 3W
CN1 5
6
LOCK
12V - 10VA
Connect entrance panel push-button according to wiring diagram.
WIRING DIAGRAM N° vc2457
204
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 4 WIRES VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM WITH TWO MONITORS FOR TYPE 637G/S2, 637G/C2 ®
Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7
Transformer
type 832/030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O 11 12 13 V3 M V1 V2 O 15 PRI resistor supplied as standard, bet-
75ohm
MAINS
Monitor
type 63M7 Transformer
type 63C7 type 832/030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O 11 12 13 V3 M V1 V2 O 15 PRI
COAX
MAINS
YELLOW
RED
Cable
type 63CV

type 8902/637T
type 8902/637
M COAX
V
YELLOW
1
RED
type 63U7/V 2
type 63B7/V 4
6
P1
P2
ELVOX
LOCK
12V - 10VA
WIRING DIAGRAM N° vc3845
205
VARIATION OF STANDARD DIAGRAM FOR
4-WIRE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM KIT ®
VARIATION 66
Wiring diagram for relay type 537R onto 4-wire video kit, for switching on the auxiliary viewing zone illumination bulb.
N.B. Monitor
Relay type 537R remains type 63M7
energised all the time that type 63C7
the monitor is switched on.
75ohm
V2
V1
Mains
M
V3
} To entrance panel
13
15 12 1 Relay
PRI
0 11 2 type 537R
Transformer
10 3
Art 832/030 9 4
8 5
7
6 Maximum load
5 230V 3
4
3
2
1
VARIATION 67
Wiring diagram for 4-wire video kit with additional monitor.
Monitor Monitor
type 63M7 type 63M7
type 63C7 type 63C7
In the last monitor insert

the 75 Ohm resistor sup-
plied, between terminals
V2-M.
75ohm
V2 V2
V1 V1
M
V3
M
V3
}
Mains Mains
13 13 To
N.B. 15 12 15 12 entrance
PRI
PRI
Additional monitor type 63M7 or panel

0 11 0 11
63C7 is supplied on request. 10 10
Transformer Transformer
It must be powered with its own 9 type 832/030 9
type 832/030
transformer type 832/030. 8 8
The two monitors switch on 7 7
simultaneously when called.
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
206
VARIATION 68
Wiring diagram for relay type 170/001 for switching on stair light.
To switch on the stair light, press the push-button with the symbol . Maximum load to relay contacts, 230V 3A.
Monitor Monitor
Relay type 170/001 must be con- type 63M7 type 63M7
nected to terminals 8 and 10 of the type 63C7 type 63C7
first monitor as shown in the dia-
gram.
In the case of connection in parallel

of two monitors, the connection of
the relay to the second monitor must
be made only with terminal 8. 75ohm
V2 V2
V1 V1
Remember that if you connect two
monitors in parallel, it is necessary to
Mains
M
V3
Mains
M
V3
1
}
power each monitor with a transfor- 13 13 To
2
mer art 832/030. 15 12 15 12 entrance
3
PRI
PRI
0 11 0 11 panel
4
10 Transformer 10
Transformer 5
In the last monitor insert the 75 type 832/030 9 type 832/030 9
Ohm resistor supplied, bet- 8 8 Relay
7 7 type 170/001
ween terminals V2-M. 6 6
5 5
4 4 Stair light buttons
3 3 Max 3A 230V
2 2
1 1
VARIATION 69
Connection of additional door lock release button.

Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7
75ohm
V2
V1
Transformer
type 832/030
M
V3
} To entrance panel
13
15 12
PRI
0 11
10
Mains
9 Additional
8 button
7 lock
6
5
4
3
2
1
207
®
VARIATION 70
Connection of additional landing call push-button on 4-wire video entry unit kit.
Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7
75ohm
V2
V1
Transformer
type 832/030
M
V3
}
13
To entrance
15 12
PRI
panel
0 11
Mains 10
9
8
7 landing call
6 button
5
4
3
2
1
VARIATION 71
Connection of call repeater loudspeaker type 2/841 on 4-wire video door entry kit.
Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7
75ohm
V2
V1
Transformer
type 832/030
M
V3
}
13 To entrance panel
15 12
PRI
0 11
Mains 10 Call
9
repeater
8
type 2/841
7 2
6 3
5 5
4 6
3
2
1
208
VARIATION 72
Wiring diagram for 4-wire video door entry kit with additional interphone.
Monitor
Interphone type 63M7
N.B. type 6207 type 63C7
Additional interphone type 6207 is
supplied on request.
Calls reach the interphone and the
monitor simultaneously.
} To entrance
panel
Mains
Transformer
type 832/030
VARIATION 73
Connection of additional mechanical doorbells with relay type 170/101
Relay
type 170/101
C 1 2 15 RC 3 4 5
Doorbell
Doorbell power supply

Maximum load to contacts 230V 3A
N.B. The relay must be installed V2

V1
near the monitor M
Monitor
V3
13 type 63M7
12 type 63C7
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
209
®
VARIATION 74
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MONITOR type 63M7 WITH TWO VIDEO ENTRANCE PANELS WITH CAMERAS type
63U7 OR 63B7.
Monitor
type 63M7
type 63C7 In the monitor, insert the 75 Ohm
Transformer ween terminals V2-M.
type 832/030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O 11 12 13 V3 M V1 V2 O 15 PRI
75ohm
Mains
type 63CV
M V 1 2 CH
Switching module
type 537W
1 2 V M P1 1 2 V M P2
type 63CV
type 63CV
Camera MV Camera M
V
type 63U71 type 63U7 1
type 63B7 2 type 63B7 2
4 4
6 6
P1 P1
Video entrance panel Video entrance panel

type 88V1 type 88V1
type 8901/637 type 8901/637
type 8901/637T Lock type 8901/637T Lock
12V - 10VA 12V - 10VA
210
VARIANTE 75
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MONITOR type 63M7 WITH TWO VIDEO ENTRANCE PANELS WITH CAMERA type
63U7/V O 63B7/V.

Monitor Transformer
type 63M7 type 832/030
type 63C7
1 2 6 7 8 9 1O 11 12 13 V3 M V1 V2 O 15 PRI
75ohm
Mains
type 63CV
M CH
Switching module
type 537W
1 V MP M P2
type 63CV
type 63CV
M M
Camera Camera V
type 1 type 1
2 63U7/V 2
63U7/V 4
63B7/V 6 63B7/V 6
P1 P1
P2 P2
Video entrance Video entran-

panel ce panel
type 3381 type 3381
type 2301/637 type 2301/637
Lock Lock
12V - 10VA 12V - 10VA
211
®
OPEN VOICE AUDIO

AND VIDEO DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEMS

SYSTEM AND TWO-CHANNEL VARIATION WITH COAXIAL CABLE (in mm2)
a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, +, AS, S1

2 2 2
C1, C2, P1, P2, +T 1 mm 1,5 mm 2,5 mm
lock, calls
2 2 2
212
OPEN VOICE AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
®
TECHNICAL FEATURES OF POWER SUPPLY type 6450

Power supply for all two-channel open-voice audio door entry systems with "SOUND SYSTEM" call facility.
It is a new power supply for intercom systems equipped with an electronic double tone generator which replaces conventional
alternative calling with a buzzer or bell. The sound is emitted with two different tones thereby allowing the user to immediately
identify the source of the call (main entrance, gate, garage, etc.). This feature provides economic and practical advantages since
the use of several conventional sound emitting systems is no longer required; the signal is emitted from a single loudspeaker in
the interphone.
The power supply can be used on installations without conversation privacy.

- 15V rectified voltage 0.25A continuous duty for push-button illumination (3x24V 3W max)
- 15V A.C.door lock output: 1A intermittent service.
N.B. This particular type of installation requires the use of the GALILEO series door entrance panels with speech units
type 930A. The use of this type of speech unit allows the microphone to be located away from the loudspeaker, thus
allowing a balanced adjustment on the audio.

- Primary coil of transformer by PTC SIEMENS C850
- 1st. secondary coil for internal electronic supply by PTC SIEMENS C965
- 2nd. secondary coil for lock supply by PTC SIEMENS C945
- Electronic protection against overloads to speech unit.
ADJUSTMENTS
N.B.: The electric door lock must operate by way of an intermittent cycle so that one
operating period corresponds to 5 rest periods, thereby preventing the protection
Dimensions type 6450: 208x135x72 - Weight: 1.4 Kg.
OPERATION
The audio door entry installation consists of one entrance panel with speech unit, one power supply and one or more interpho-
nes. When an entrance panel push-button is pressed, the ringtone rings in the corresponding apartment. To communicate with
the speech unit, the user must press the push-button marked until the end of the conversation.
If desired, the user may activate the door lock release push-button; in this case the door opening time may be varied from 1 to
30 seconds using the potentiometer P3.
When testing the installed system, use trimmer P2 to adjust the optimal volume of the speech unit.
The power supply is also equipped with a specific device to eliminate any buzzing on the voice circuit caused by the use of wires
that are too long and/or too thin.
Push-buttons with name-tags are illuminated through output 0-15 on power supply. Up to a maximum number of 24V 3W bulbs
can be connected. An additional transformer, type M832 or 832/030 is required for entrance panels with more than three bulbs.
Intercommunicating networks cannot be created.
Interphones to be used on these installations are type 7400.
213
®
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS

C 8100, 8000, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM series entrance panel 1
D 930A Speech unit 1
E - 12V ~ electric lock 1
H - Landing call push-button n
n - Number of calls from entrance panel 1÷n
5[+1] 2
6[+1]
Note: The value in
be added in case of
5[+1] 1 outdoor call.
6[+1]
5[+1]
F
8
214
SINGLE/MULTIPLE RESIDENCE OPEN VOICE AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
WITH INTERPHONES type 7400 ®
N.B. power supply type 6582 powers the ringtone OFF indicator LEDs on interphones type 7400.
The power supply can power up to 70 interphones; add another power supply type 6582 for the subsequent 70 inter-
phones.
A- 8000, 8100, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM

MAINS MAINS series entrance panel
PRI PRI C- Electric lock
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY D- Speech unit type 930A
type 6582 type 6450 E- Landing call push-button
L1- entrance panel illumination bulb
- +U +I A B C D C2 1 2 3 S 5 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS S1 (3x24V 3W max.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
GALILEO 9
11
12 E
INTERPHONE
type 7400
L1 A
3
+U C2 1 2 3 S CH 4
5 D
6
7
8
B
ELVOX
215
®
LIST OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS

C 8100, 8000, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM series Entrance panel 1
D 930A Speech unit 1
E - 12V ~ electric lock 1
H 839/302-303 Switching module 1
I - Landing call push-button n
n - Number of calls from entrance panel 1÷n
5[+1] 2
6[+1]
5[+1] 1
6[+1]
5[+1]
Note: The value in
be added in case of 2
outdoor call.
8 8
R R
216
SINGLE/MULTIPLE RESIDENCE OPEN VOICE AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
WITH TWO SPEECH UNITS AND INTERPHONES type 7400 ®
N.B. power supply type 6582 powers the ringtone OFF indicator LEDs on interphones type 7400.
The power supply can power up to 70 interphones; add another power supply type 6582 for the subsequent 70 inter-
phones.
MAINS MAINS
PRI PRI
POWER SUPPLY type 6450 type 839/302
type 6582
- +U +I A B C D C2 1 2 3 S 5 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS S1 1 2 3 4 5 P1 7 8 9 P2 7 8 9
A
L1
3
4
5 D
6
7
8
1 B
2
3
ELVOX
4
5 C
6
8
GALILEO 9
11
12
E
INTERPHONE
A
type 7400
L1
+U C2 1 2 3 S CH 3
4
5 D
6
7
8
B
ELVOX
A- 8000, 1200, 8000, 3300, PATAVIUM

series entrance panel
C- Electric lock
D- Speech unit type 930A
(3x24V 3W max.)
N° c3788R1
217
OPEN VOICE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
®
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF POWER SUPPLY TYPE 6681

Power supply for all two-channel open-voice video door entry systems with “SOUND SYSTEM” call facility.
This new system is equipped with an electronic double tone generator “SOUND SYSTEM” which replaces conventional alternative calling with
a buzzer or bell. The sound is emitted with two different tones thereby allowing the user to immediately identify the source of the call (main
entrance, gate, garage, etc.). This feature provides economic and pratical advantages since the use of several conventional sound emitting sys-
tems is no longer required; the signal is emitted from a single loudspeaker in the interphone.
The power supply may be used on installations either with conversation privacy or without it. To create installations with conversation privacy use
only monitor type 5651 and 5653 provided with this function.

- 13V D.C. 0,3A camera supply.
- 15V rectified voltage 0.25A continuous duty for push-button illumination (3x24V 3W max)
- Door lock output: 15V D.C. 1A intermittent cycle
N.B.
The particular type of installations requires the use of GALILEO series door entrance panels with cameras arts. 559A, 559A/1, 559B
or speech unit type 930A. The use of this type of cameras or speech unit allows the microphone to be located away from the loud-
speaker, thus allowing a balanced adjustment on the audio.
POWER SUPPLY OPERATING MODES

- Selector set A-B:
Position A- Operation with “Sound system” call and rectified 0-15V output to prevent humming on the audio line.
Position B- Operation with “Sound system” call and 0-15 V A.C. output

- Primary coil of transformer by PTC SIEMENS C840 Selector set
- 1st. secondary coil for internal electronic supply by F 3,15A 250V (F1) fuse.
- 2nd. secondary coil for lock supply by PTC SIEMENS C945
- Electronic protection against short-circuits and overloads on monitor cable riser.
- Electronic protection against overloads to outdoor unit.
ADJUSTMENTS
N.B.: The electric door lock must operate by way of an intermittent cycle so that one
operating period corresponds to 5 rest periods, thereby preventing the protection Removable terminal block
Dimensions type 6681: 208x135x72 - Weight: 1.4 Kgs.
OPERATION
The video door entry installation consists of one camera and one speech unit entrance panel, one power supply and one or more monitors. When
an entrance panel push-button is pressed, the ringtone rings in the corresponding apartment. Almost immediately the image of the caller appears
on the monitor. The camera coverage area is illuminated by invisible infrared LED’S incorporated in the entrance panel. This illumination is not
visible to caller.
To communicate with the outdoor speech unit, the user must press the push-button marked until the end of the conversation.
The monitor switches off after a set time, thereby terminating any conversation in progress.
The system turns itself off automatically after a preset time, adjustable from 30 to 90 seconds using potentiometer P1 inside the power supply.
If the caller presses another user’s push-button, the previously called monitor is automatically disactivated without waiting for the end of the pre-
set time.
If desired, the user may activate the door lock release push-button. In this case, door-opening time may be varied from 1 to 30 seconds using
the potentiometer P3.
For simultaneous activation of two or more monitors, one extra power supply type 6582 must be installed for each additional monitor or type
6583 for more monitors.
A blocking circuit cuts off power to monitors if the line is overloaded or short-circuited. The power supply is also equipped with a specific device
to eliminate any buzzing on the voice circuit caused by the use of wires that are too long and/or too thin. Push-buttons with name-tags are illu-
minated through output 0-15 on power supply. Up to a maximum number of three 24V 3W bulbs can be connected. An additional transformer,
type M832 or 832/030 is required for entrance panels with more than three bulbs. Intercommunicating networks cannot be created.
Monitors to be used on this installation are type 5651, 5653, 7500.
These open voice monitors cannot be used with other models which do not belong to the dual channel open voice series monitors.
218
OPEN VOICE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
®
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram ref. VC3123)

Diagram
A 5651+ 5509, 5653 + 5509 Monitor + Back box 1÷n
C series 8000, 8100, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM entrance panel 1
D 559A or 559B Camera 1
E - Electric lock 12V ~ 1
G - Landing call push-button n
n - Number of entrance panel call 1÷n
[+1]
A [+1] [+1]
A
G G Note: The value in
be added in case of
outdoor call.
A [+1] [+1] A
G [+1] G
F
C+D
219
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH
OPEN VOICE type 5651 or 5653 WITH CONVERSATION PRIVACY ®
A- 8000, 8100, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM

series video door entry panel
N.B. D- Camera with speech unit
If a humming type 559A, 559B
sound is detect- E- Landing call push-button
ed on the phonic
L1- Panel bulb
line, set slide
(3x24V 3W max.)
switch “A-B”
under the cover MAINS
to position “A”. PRI
A
POWER SUPPLY
B type 6681
M1 V1 V2 M2 C2 1 2 3 - + S 5 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
CABLE
type 61/001 - type 61/003
V C2 1 2 3 5 6 S CH CH
CABLE
MONITOR type 61/001 A
type 5651 type 61/003
type 5653 V2
M
V1
1
L1
2
3
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
8 D +T
V
9
10 M
11 -
12
13
E ELVOX
B
V C2 1 2 3 5 6 S CH C
MONITOR CABLE RISER
Connect the 75 Ohm

resistor (provided) in
last monitor between
terminals V2-M. DIAGRAM N° vc3123-1 R1
220
SINGLE AND MULTI RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH OPEN VOICE WITHOUT
CONVERSATION PRIVACY WITH MONITOR TYPE 7500 AND INTERPHONE TYPE 7400 ®
LIST OF ARTICLES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION (Diagram ref. VC3624)

Diagram
A 7500 Monitor 1÷n
B 7400 Interphone 1÷n
C - Additional push-button for lock 1÷n
D - Electric lock 12V ~ 1
F series 8000, 8100, 1200, 3300, PATAVIUM Entrance panel 1
G 559B Camera 1
n - Number of entrance panel call 1÷n
A 6[+1]+(n-2)
B
COAX
7[+1] 6[+1]
2 2
GALILEO
H H
COAX 6[+1]+n
E
10+n+COAX
2
C
F+G
ELVOX
2
D
221
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE RESIDENCE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH OPEN VOICE WITH-
OUT CONVERSATION PRIVACY WITH MONITOR TYPE 7500 AND INTERPHONE TYPE 7400 ®
N.B. If a humming sound is detected

POWER SUPPLY on the phonic line, set slide switch “A-
type 6582 B” under the cover to position “A”.
MAINS
MAINS
PRI PRI
POWER SUPPLY
A
type 6681
B
- +U +I A B C D M1 V1 V2 M2 C2 1 2 3 - + S 5 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1 CABLE
type 61/001 - type 61/003
N.B. Only for LED

supply on type 7400
CABLE
V +U C2 1 2 3 5 6 S CH CH CH
type 61/001
type 61/003 A
MONITOR
type 7500
1
2
L1
3
4
5 5
6 6
7
CN1
8
8
9 D +T
10 E M
V
11
12 -
V1 ELVOX
M
V2 B
C
INTERPHONE
type 7400
1
2
3
4
5
6
GALILEO 8
9
11
12
E N.B.
Beyond the 50th.
monitor type 7500
add an additional
V +U C2 1 2 3 5 6 S CH power supply type
6583.
MONITOR CABLE RISER
A- 8000, 8100, 3300, 1200, PATAVIUM series Connect the 75 Ohm
video door entry panel resistor (provided) in
B- Additional push-button for lock last monitor between
C- Electric lock 12V~ terminals V2-M.
D- Camera with speech unit type 559B
L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max.)
16X24V 3W with type 832/030 DIAGRAM N° vc3624R2
222
VARIATION OF STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR OPEN VOICE
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ®
VARIATION 76
Wiring diagram with simultaneous switch-on of two or more monitors type 5651, 5653 with power supply type 6582.
The power supply type 6681 can power two monitors type 5651, connected as shown in the diagram.
If more than two monitors are to be switched on simultaneously, it is necessary to use an additional power supply type 6582 for
every two monitors.
Call To other
repeater monitors
type 934
Mains
Max 2 monitor
type 5651
o type 5653
Monitor
type 5651
type 5653

type 6582 type 6582 To power supply
type 6681
D PRI D PRI
Mains Mains
VARIATION 77
Connection with simultaneous switch-on of two or more monitors with power supply type 6583.
When 2 or more monitors need to be switched on simultaneously, it is possible to connect a single power supply as shown in
the diagram. A maximum of 4 monitors type 5651 or 5653 may be connected together.
To other
monitors
Max 4 Monitor
Monitor type 5651 o
type 5651 o type 5653
type 5653
Mains Mains
Call Power supply

repeater type 6583
type 934 To power supply
type 6681
223
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
®
VARIATION 78
Relay
Wiring diagram for additional mechanical doorbells. type 170/101
Monitor
You can connect additional doorbells operating at 12V A.C. type 7500
1
by using relay type 170/101 connected as shown in the dia- 2
3
gram. 4
1 C 2 3 4 RC 5 15
5
6 Mechanical doorbell
CN1
8
9
1O
11
12
V1 Doorbell
M
V2
supply
Relay
type 170/101 Relay
Maximum load type 170/101
3A-230V
Monitor
Mechanical doorbell type 5651
1 C 2 3 4 RC 5 15
type 5653
Doorbell Interphone
supply type 7400 Mechanical doorbell
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
GALILEO 8 Doorbell
9
supply
11
12
VARIATION 79
Connection of call repeater type 2/841. Monitor

type 7500
1 Call
Loudspeaker module type 2/841 repeats the sound of 2
the monitor without changing its tone. 3
repeater
4 type 2/841
5
6
CN1
9
1O
11
12
V1
M
V2
Call Call
repeater Interphone repeater
type 2/841 type 7400 type 2/841
CN1
1
2
Monitor
3
type 5651 4
type 5653 5
6
GALILEO 8
9
11
12
224
VARIATION 80 Relay
type 170/001 Auxiliary service
(stair light, etc.)
Wiring diagram for switching on the stair light by means
1 2 3 4 5
of relay type 170/001.
Monitor
type 7500
1
2 Push-buttons
(for maximum load
4 3A 230V A.C.)
6 Auxiliary service
CN1
(stair light, etc.)
Relay
type 170/001
1O
12
M
V2
STAIR LIGHT BUTTONS
Max load 3A 230V Relay
Mains type 170/001
Monitor PRI
Power supply Auxiliary service
type 5651 type 6450 (stair light, etc.)
type 5653
C2 1 2 3 S 5 6 7 8 C1 0 15 AS S1 1 2 3 4 5
Push-buttons
(for maximum load
3A 230V A.C.)
Auxiliary service
Power supply (stair light, etc.)
type 6681
Interphone
type 7400
CN1
N.B. 6
GALILEO
To switch on the stair light, press the push-button with the 9
11
symbol . The capacity of the contacts of the monitor push- 12
button is 24V 0.5A D.C./A.C. max.
VARIATION 81 Relay
type 170/001
Connection of 2nd additional push-button in monitors for acti-
vating auxiliary services.
To activate the auxiliary service, press the push-button with

Auxiliary services
the symbol . Max load 3A 230V
Monitor
N.B. The capacity of the contacts of the monitor push-button is type 5651
24V 0.5A D.C./A.C. type 5653
Power supply
type 6681
5
225
VARIATION ON STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR OPEN VOICE
VARIATION 82
Connection of push-button for monitor activation.
It is possible to activate the video door entry system from the monitor by using push-button with symbol; see diagram for connection.
N.B. The monitor ringtone is also activated.
MONITOR
Monitor
Mains
type 5651 type 7500
type 5653 Power supply
type 6681
Mains
POWER SUPPLY
type 6681
N.B.
The push-button marked with the symbol is used only for the automatic activation of the system and cannot be used for other purposes.
Connection of transformer type M832-832/030 to be fitted
Connection of power supply type 6583 on installations
on entrance panels with several bulbs for name-tag light-
with considerable voltage drop on power line “+ -”.
ing.
Power supply type 6583 may be connected as shown in the diagram
This transformer must be used when there are more than three bulbs
in case of long supply lines where power voltage on the line wiring to
for name-tag lighting.
TRANSFORMER the monitors (+ -) is less than 15V D.C. between terminals 5-6. The
type M832 unit can supply 18V D.C. 2A with intermittent operation.
type 832/030
Mains
POWER SUPPLY
type 6681
POWER SUPPLY
Mains type 6681
Mains
1st MONITOR 2nd MONITOR
CABLE RISER CABLE RISER
L1- 3X24v 3W max.

L2...Lx- 10X24v 3W max. con M832
16X24v 3W max. con 832/030 5
6
7 Mains
8
+T
V POWER SUPPLY
M
-
type 6583
N.B. Position the shunt in “B-C”
226
VARIATION OFSTANDARD WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR OPEN VOICE
VARIATION 85
Connection for landing call push-button.

Monitor
Pressing this push-button produces a different monitor tone than type 7500 Mains
a call from the entrance panel. The monitor, in this case, remains 1
PRI
2 Power supply
switched off. 3 A
4 B type 6681
5
M1 V1 V2 M2 C2 1 2 3 - + S 5 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
A- Push-button for landing call 6
CN1
8
9
1O
11
12
MONITOR V1 A
type 5651 M
V2
type 5653
Mains Interphone
type 7400 Mains
POWER SUPPLY
CN1
type 6681 1
PRI
Power supply
2 A
3 B type 6681-6450
4
M1 V1 V2 M2 C2 1 2 3 - + S 5 6 7 8 - +T AM 15 O S1 C1
5
A 6
GALILEO 8
9
11
12
A
VARIATION 86 MONITOR CABLE RISER
Mains ADDITIONAL CAMERA

Connection of camera
separate from entrance POWER SUPPLY
panel with speech unit type 6681
and additional bulbs for 24
camera coverage light-

ing.
A panel with speech unit only A- Audio-entrance panel

and a separate camera type series 8000, 8100, 1200, 3300
5000-5020-5A20-5B20- and PATAVIUM
5A10-5B10-5C10 may be B- Additional push-button for lock
connected instead of a video C- 12V A.C. electric lock
entrance panel. Bulb must be D- Speech unit type 930A
connected as shown in dia- F- Lens type 2/...-22/...-22/S...
gram. L1- Panel bulb (3x24V 3W max)
RELAY
N.B. type 170/001
Luminous push-button con- Max. Load
nected to terminals 3 and 4 of 3A - 230V
speech unit type 930A, may
be used to switch on panel Supply
bulbs briefly as shown in the A.C. mains
diagram. A timer may be Bulb for coverage
used for longer activation or area lighting
R
for stair-lighting. 0,5A-24V

A.C. maximum load.
227
VARIATION 87 1st CABLE RISER 2nd CABLE RISER 3rd CABLE RISER 4th CABLE RISER
Connection of video distribu-

tor type 5556/004 or type
6554 on monitor type 5651,
5652, 5653.
The video connection must be made
using a RG59 type cable or one sim-
ilar with an impedance of 75 Ohm.
All video outputs V1-V2-V3-V4 must
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
be loaded by 75-Ohm resistors sup-
TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL
plied. They must therefore be mount- BLOCKS BLOCKS BLOCKS BLOCKS
ed on unused output terminals or on
terminal V2-M of monitor. The last
video signal distributor must be
loaded by 75-Ohm resistor connect-
ed to unused terminal V.
N.B. Trimmer P1 in video signal dis-

tributor type 5556/004 can
increase video signal gain in
every output at the same time.
Manufacturer setting 1 gain.
To camera
Mains
POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTOR POWER SUPPLY

type 6582 type 6554 type 6681
type 5556/004
*
N.B. Position the shunt in “A-B-D” in
power supply type 6582.
*
VARIATION 88 Additional bell

type 860A
Wiring diagram of additional electronic ringtone type 860A.
Monitor
PRI 8 7 5 4
N.B. Electronic ringtone type 860A features a two or three-note type 7500
Mains
ringtone which is selected by connection to the corresponding ter- 1
2
minal (7 or 8). The ringtone is powered by the mains voltage. 3
4
5
Additional bell 6
CN1
8
type 860A
9
1O
11
12
V1
M
V2
PRI 8 7 5 4
Mains
Additional bell
V2 type 860A
M
V1
1 PRI 8 7 5 4
2
Monitor 3 Mains
type 5651 4 Phone
type 5653 5 type 7400
CN1
6
7 1
8 2
3
9
4
10 5
11 6
12 GALILEO 8
13 9
11
12
228
VARIATION ON STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR OPEN VOICE
VARIATION 89
Connection for more than 50 monitors type 7500.
Beyond the 50th. monitor type 7500 add an additional power supply type 6583.
Type 6583 allows the supply of a further 100 monitors.
TO POWER SUPPLY
type 6681
Monitor
type 7500
Mains
Power supply
type 6583
Monitor
type 7500
MONITOR CABLE RISER
229
®
Notes:
230

Porteiro Elvox 63M7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Porteiro Elvox 63M7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INDEX ®

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)

Risks connected to substances considered as dangerous (WEEE).

Product is according to CE mark and directives:

Conversion table for section-diameter and resistance of 100 m. standard conductors.

Diameter (tenths) 4/10 6/10 8/10 10/10 12/10 14/10 18/10

A.C. bell Bulb Loudspeaker A.C. supply from mains

A.C. buzzer Push-button Amplified microphone Ground

Electric lock Switch Receiver Coaxial cable block

MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR AUDIO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM (mm2)

a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, AS, S1

MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR STANDARD VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

a 0, 3, 12, 15, -, +, AS, S1

Video 75 Ohm coaxial cable (type RG59) or RG11double insulation

MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

Section type Terminals Ø up to 50 m. Ø up to 100 m. Ø up to 200 m.

MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SECTION FOR 4-WIRES KIT SYSTEM (in mm2)

Monitor terminal up to 10 m. up to 30 m. up to 50 m. up to 100 m.

1-2 type 63CV / 0,5 mm2 0,75 mm2 1mm2

Video type 63CV

Connection with section type b

Connection with section type a

Call connections with section type a

Fit the base of the interphone into the CN1 Fig. 4

bracket. Slide the base of the interpho-

the wires to the terminals of the inter-

the connection card by means of con-

Assembly of desk-top conversion kit for monitor and interphones:

Assembly of desk-top conversion kit for monitors only:

PROGRAMMING OF THE CONVERSATION PRIVACY

TERMINALS FOR MONITOR TYPE 6600 - 660A

4: Button for auxiliary services (related to terminal 5)

INSTALLATION 6601 INSTALLATION OF TYPE 6601 WITH BRACKETS TYPE R660

141mm 59mm 10mm

INSTALLATION OF TYPE 6701 INSTALLAZIONE 6601/AU

139 139 136

INTSLLATION OF TYPE 660C

INSTALLAZIONE 6601/AU CON LE STAFFE Art. R660 INSTALLAZIONE 6701/AU

FLUSH WALL-MOUNTING OPEN VOICE 4" MONITOR

External controls (Fig.6)

F) BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB “ ”

INTERPHONE TYPE 7400

INSTALLATION OF INTERPHONE TYPE 7400

MONITOR SERIES 7500

MOUNTING OF MONITOR WITH INTERPHONE TYPE 7500

GIOTTO 6300 SERIES MONITORS

Control functions A) INTERPHONE: enables communication with the speech unit.

Installation instructions Fig. 1 1 Fig. 2

INSTALLING 6500 SERIES

Version Overall dimensions Flush-mounting hole dimensions

Entrance panels for B/W camera

Entrance panels for colour camera

Entrance panels for audio speech unit

Pushbutton entrance panels

Opening the entrance panel

To reach name-tag, remove name-tag holder from the back, as shown.

Series 3390 video (Galileo Security) VIDEO ENTRANCE PANELS

AUDIO ENTRANCE PANELS

Series 3300 additional (Galileo Security) ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSH-BUTTONS

330C - 332C - 333C

The recommended height for

The average recommended

Fig. 3A Fig. 3B Mounting with rainproof cover